100% Construction Documents Bid Set - CDW Bid Spec...SECTION 08114 CUSTOM STEEL DOORS SECTION 08130...

100% Construction Documents

– Bid Set

REQUEST FOR BID

AUDUBON COMMISSION

AUDUBON ZOO

ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE WILDLIFE

New Orleans, LA

January 2014 __________________________________________________________

ISSUING OFFICE:

AUDUBON COMMISSION IN CONJUNCTION WITH

AUDUBON NATURE INSTITUTE

CECILIE HALLIWILL

6500 MAGAZINE STREET

NEW ORLEANS, LA 70118

504-212-5325

504-866-1224 FAX

Email: [email protected]

TORRE DESIGN

CONSORTIUM, LTD. A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION

ZOOLOGICAL & RECREATIONAL PLANNERS ●

ARCHITECTS ● LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS

Set Number______

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00003 - 1


SECTION 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00007 SEALS AND STAMP PAGE BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00100 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00210 SUPPLEMETARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 00320 EXISTING CONDITIONS 00410 BID FORM AND BID BOND FORM 00450 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 00460 ATTESTATION CLAUSE REQUIRED BY LA. R.S. 38:2227 00465 ELECTRONIC VERIFICATION AFFIDAVIT CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00500 AGREEMENT 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00800 SUPPLIMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01100 SUMMARY SECTION 01150 ACTIVITY LIMITATIONS SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01420 REFERENCES SECTION 01453 STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DIVISION 2 SITEWORK SECTION 02105 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN SECTION 02222 EXCAVATION SECTION 02223 BACKFILLING SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING SECTION 02240 DEWATERING SECTION 02250 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION



SECTION 12324 TRENCHING SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02455 TIMBER PILES SECTION 02514 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM SECTION 02530 SITE SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS SECTION 02560 SEWER AND DRAIN MANHOLES SECTION 02581 HOT WIRE SYSTEMS SECTION 02720 SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS SECTION 02741 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 02721 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT SECTION 02821 FENCES AND GATES SECTION 02920 LAWNS AND GRASSES DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 MASONRY SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 5 METALS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05530 GRATINGS DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06160 SHEATHING SECTION 06175 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES SECTION 06180 GLUE LAMINATED TIMBER SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08114 CUSTOM STEEL DOORS SECTION 08130 STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08800 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) SECTION 09934 FLOOR SEALER SECTION 09963 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS



DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS SECTION 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11161 ZOO EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13126 MODULAR BUILDING PARTITIONS DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15055 MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTERS SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION SECTION 15100 VALVES SECTION 15122 GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 15241 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15252 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15769 RADIANT HEATERING UNITS SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 15838 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16020 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION SECTION 16040 ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT SECTION 16045 ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK SECTION 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS SECTION 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16450 GROUNDING SECTION 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS SECTION 16510 LIGHTING END OF SECTION 00003


SEALS/STAMP PAGES 00007 - 1

DOCUMENT 00007 - SEALS/STAMP PAGES This Seals/Stamp Page responds to the requirements of Louisiana Title 46, Professional Occupational Standards, Part 1, Architects Chapter 11. Administration, Rule 1105 B. The following specification sections of the Project Manual have been assembled by Torre Design Consortium, Ltd. and were prepared by me or under my responsible supervision. 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00007 SEALS AND STAMP PAGE

00100 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00210 SUPPLEMETARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

00320 EXISTING CONDITIONS

00410 BID FORM AND BID BOND FORM

00450 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

00460 ATTESTATION CLAUSE REQUIRED BY LA. R.S. 38:2227

00465 ELECTRONIC VERIFICATION AFFIDAVIT

00500 AGREEMENT

00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES

00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

00800 SUPPLIMENTARY CONDITIONS

SECTION 01100 SUMMARY

SECTION 01150 ACTIVITY LIMITATIONS

SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES

SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01420 REFERENCES

SECTION 01453 STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS

SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 02105 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 02581 HOT WIRE SYSTEMS

SECTION 02741 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

SECTION 02721 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

SECTION 02821 FENCES AND GATES

SECTION 02920 LAWNS AND GRASSES

SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES


SEALS/STAMP PAGES 00007 - 2

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05530 GRATINGS

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK

SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS

SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 08114 CUSTOM STEEL DOORS

SECTION 08130 STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES

SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08800 GLAZING

SECTION 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)

SECTION 09934 FLOOR SEALER

SECTION 09963 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS

SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

SECTION 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

SECTION 11161 ZOO EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

SECTION 13126 MODULAR BUILDING PARTITIONS


ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00100 - 1

DOCUMENT 00100 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Subject: ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE WILDLIFE. Prospective Bidders: Audubon Commission invites bids from qualified general contractors to build new animal facilities at Freeport-McMoRan Audubon Species Survival Center, 14001 River Road, New Orleans, LA 70131. Bids are due on or before April 1, 2014 at 1:00 pm. Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope marked “ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE WILDLIFE”. Bidders shall supply one (1) original copy. Bids may also be submitted electronically through www.bidsync.com. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at the place and time that the bids are to be received. There will be a non-mandatory pre-bid meeting at the ACRES Building, 14001 River Road, New Orleans, LA 70131 on March 18, 2014 at 9:00 am in the Conference Room. Submit Bids to the following: Audubon Commission c/o

Audubon Nature Institute – Purchasing Office at Audubon Zoo Attn: Cecilie Halliwill 6500 Magazine Street New Orleans, LA 70118 Bids received after the day and time specified above will be rejected by the Audubon Commission as non-responsive and returned to the bidder unopened. All questions regarding this bid invitation shall be addressed in writing, seventy-two (72) hours prior to bid opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. Bid packages shall be available the first date of advertisement. Complete Bidding Documents for this project are being distributed in electronic form on behalf of the Owner by Letterman’s. They may also be obtained without charge and without deposit from the Public Plan Room at www.lettermansdigitalvault.com. Printed copies are not available from the Owner or Designer but arrangements can be made to obtain them through most reprographic firms. Plan holders are responsible for their own reproduction costs. Questions about this procedure shall be directed to Letterman’s: Letterman’s Blue Print & Supply Co., 2475 Canal Street, Suite 101 New Orleans, LA 70119. Phone: 504-821-9997, Fax: 504-821-9947 Email: [email protected]. Bidders wishing to submit bid electronically may download a complete package at www.bidsync.com.

Each Bidder must deposit with his/her bid security in the amount, form and subject to the conditions provided in the Information for Bidders. Sureties used for obtaining bonds must appear as acceptable on the U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570. The construction period is three hundred sixty five (365) calendar days and the Liquidated Damages are one thousand ($1000.00) dollars per day. Contractor Licensing, the State of Louisiana public bid laws, LA Revised Statutes Sections 37 and 38, apply to the award of this Contract. Bids shall be accepted from Contractors who are licensed, under the laws of the State of Louisiana, for the classification of “Building Contractor” No bid may be withdrawn for a period of forty five (45) days after receipt of bids, except under provisions of LA.R.S. 38:2215A. This procurement is undertaken pursuant to LRS 38:2212 et seq. The provisions of these statues shall govern and control all procurement hereunder notwithstanding any provisions herein to the contrary.

http://www.lettermansdigitalvault.com/

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.bidsync.com/


ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00100 - 2

The Contractor shall begin procurement of materials within ten (10) working days of the signing of the contract which is also the Notice to Proceed. Minority, female-owned firms are encouraged to submit bids. Sincerely, Cecilie Halliwill, CPPB Purchasing Director Advertised in The Times-Picayune February 28, 2014 March 5, 2014 March 12, 2014


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200 - 1

DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. The Instructions to Bidders to be used on this Project will be the AlA Document A 701, 1997 Edition, as

published by the American Institute of Architects.

B. This document is included, in its entirety, in the Project Manual following this page.

END OF DOCUMENT

AIA®

Document A701TM

– 1997

Instructions to Bidders

AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved.

WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of

this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent

possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:51:53 on 02/22/2010 under Order No.0420463579_1 which expires on

08/10/2010, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (810889588)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:

The author of this document

has added information

needed for its completion.

The author may also have

revised the text of the

original AIA standard form.

An Additions and Deletions

Report that notes added

information as well as

revisions to the standard

form text is available from

the author and should be

reviewed.

This document has important

legal consequences.

Consultation with an

attorney is encouraged with

respect to its completion

or modification.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any

portion of this AIA® Document

to another electronic file is

prohibited and constitutes a

violation of copyright laws

as set forth in the footer of

this document.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)


14001 River Road, New Orleans, Louisiana 70131

New Orleans, LA 701

THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address)

Audubon Commission in conjunction with Audubon Nature Institute

6500 Magazine Street

New Orleans, LA 70118

THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address)

Torre Design Consortium, Ltd., A Professional Corporation



TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR






User Notes: (810889588)

2

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding

Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions

to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of

the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and

other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract.

§ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in

other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which

modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.

§ 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted

in accordance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the

Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated

in Alternate Bids.

§ 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of

the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

§ 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or

services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding

Documents.

§ 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion

of the Work.

ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that:

§ 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such

documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being

bid concurrently or presently under construction.

§ 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be

performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract

Documents.

§ 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without

exception.

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the

Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be

refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten

days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the

deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be

refunded.

§ 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the

Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders.






User Notes: (810889588)

3

§ 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect

assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding

Documents.

§ 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the

purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding

Documents.

§ 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work

being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is

submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors,

inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered.

§ 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a

written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum.

Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding,

and Bidders shall not rely upon them.

§ 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required

function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

§ 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been

received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name

of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution

including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement

setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of

other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof

of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of

a proposed substitution shall be final.

§ 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an

Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

§ 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract

Documents.

§ 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of

Bidding Documents.

§ 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that

purpose.

§ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum

withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the

Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid.

ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents.






User Notes: (810889588)

4

§ 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium.

§ 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall

govern.

§ 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.

§ 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change."

§ 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without

forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids

stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any

other manner.

§ 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The

Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be

signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall

further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a

current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder.

§ 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the

Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid

and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations

arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the

amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of

the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2.

§ 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided

in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the

bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

§ 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered

until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time

has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected.

§ 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid

shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and

shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of

the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a

separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof.

§ 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received

after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened.

§ 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.

§ 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered.

§ 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following

the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid.

§ 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by

notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the

signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time-






User Notes: (810889588)

5

stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as

not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.

§ 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that

they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.

§ 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted.

ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids

received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to

Bidders.

§ 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by

other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to

rejection.

§ 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been

submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available.

The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid

which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests.

§ 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically

provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and

Alternates accepted.

ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly

executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously

required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents.

§ 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than

seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that

financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable

evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of

selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces;

.2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and

equipment proposed for the Work; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to

a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and

responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding

Documents.

§ 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or

Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the

Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option,

(1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or






User Notes: (810889588)

6

Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted

bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be

forfeited.

§ 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable

objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written

consent of the Owner and Architect.

ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of

the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual

sources.

§ 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid.

If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such

bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum.

§ 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will

be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of

execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder

shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be

furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1.

§ 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and

Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum.

§ 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract.

§ 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix

thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA

Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a

Stipulated Sum.


SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00210 - 1

DOCUMENT 00210 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

The following supplements modify the "Instructions to Bidders," AIA Document A701 - 1997, 1997 Edition -

Electronic Format. Where a portion of the Instruction to Bidders is modified or deleted by these modifications, the

unaltered portions remain in effect.

Note: Information contained in other Documents of the Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Contract

Conditions shall be referred to for clarification and deviations from that in the "Instructions to Bidders."

ARTICLE 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

Add Subparagraph 2.1.5:

2.1.5 The Bidder must currently be licensed in the State of Louisiana with a classification of "Building

Construction" Have been in business for at least five (5) years and completed five (5) projects of a similar size or

larger than this project and of similar complexity.

Delete Paragraph 3.1.1 as written and substitute the following: 3.1.1 Complete Bidding Documents for this project are being distributed in electronic form on behalf of the Owner by Letterman’s. They may be obtained without charge and without deposit from the Public Plan Room at www.lettermansdigitalvault.com. Printed copies are not available from the Owner or Designer but arrangements can be made to obtain them through most reprographic firms. Plan holders are responsible for their own reproduction costs. Questions about this procedure shall be directed to Letterman’s: Letterman’s Blue Print & Supply Co., 2475 Canal Street, Suite 101 New Orleans, LA 70119. Phone: 504-821-9997, Fax: 504-821-9947 Email: [email protected]. Bidders wishing to submit bid electronically may also download a complete package at www.bidsync.com.

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

Delete Paragraph 3.3.2 as written and substitute the following:

3.3.2 No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by the

Proposer and has been received by the Architect at least seven (7) working days prior to the date for receipt of

bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a

complete description of the proposed substitute including model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test

data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other

materials, equipment or work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. It shall be the

responsibility of the Proposer to include in his proposal all changes required of the Contract Documents if the

proposed product is used. Prior approval is given contingent upon supplier being responsible for any costs which

may be necessary to modify the space or facilities needed to accommodate the materials and equipment

approved. A response will be provided within 3 days.

3.4 ADDENDA

http://www.lettermansdigitalvault.com/

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.bidsync.com/



Delete Subparagraph 3.4.3 as written and substitute the following:

3.4.3 Addenda shall not be issued within a period of seventy-two (72) hours prior to the advertised time for the

opening bids, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and any other legal holidays; however, if the necessity arises to

issue an addendum modifying plans and specifications within the 72 hour period prior to the advertised time for

the opening of bids, then the opening of bids shall be extended between seven (7) and thirty (30) working days,

without the requirement of re-advertising. Addenda will be delivered to all prime bidders by Letterman’s, make

sure to properly register, addenda will be delivered within twenty-four hours of issuance by email, fax or other

electronic means or by hand and copy will be mailed to all prime bidders who have registered. Requirements of

La. R.S. 38:2122 (C)(2)(a) shall be followed.


3.4.5 The Owner shall have the right to extend the bid date by up to thirty (30) days without the requirement of

re-advertising. Any such extension shall be made by addendum issued by the Architect.

4.2 BID SECURITY

Add the following Clause 4.2.1.1:

4.2.1.1 No bid shall be considered or accepted unless the bid is accompanied by bid security in an amount of

not less than five percent (5%) of the base bid and all alternates, if any.

4.2.2. Change “AIA Document A310, Bid Bond” to “the Bid Bond Form following LOUISIANA UNIFORM

PUBLIC WORKS BID FORM.”

4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

Add the following to Subparagraph 4.3.1:

4.3.1 One original of the Bid Form is required. General Contractors submitting a bid must complete the Bid

Form and attach the executed Bid Security Form. Non-collusion Affidavit, Electronic Verification Form, Attestation

Clause Required by LA. R.S. 38:2227 and Corporate Resolution (if not required with bid submittal, see the bid

form), are required to be submitted within 10 days of the bid opening by the apparent low bidder. Include the

Bidder's state contractor's license number on the envelope of the bid submittal.

4.3.4 Add: Electronic bidding as defined in the Advertisement for Bids is the only form of electronic bidding

allowed.


4.4.5 No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his bid or any part thereof for forty-five (45) days after the time

agreed upon for the receipt of bid except as provided for in RS 38:2215

5.1 OPENING OF BIDS

Delete Subparagraph 5.1 as written and substitute the following:



The properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud at the place and time the bids are received. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS Delete Subparagraph 5.2 as written and substitute the following: The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids as permitted by public bid laws. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection.

5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD)

Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 5.3.1.

Delete Subparagraph 5.3.2 as written and substitute the following:

5.3.2 Alternates, if accepted, shall be accepted in the order in which they are listed on the Bid Form.

Determination of the low bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the base bid and any alternates accepted.

However, the Owner shall reserve the right to accept alternates in any order which does not affect determination

of the low bidder.


5.3.3 This procurement is undertaken pursuant to LRS 38:2212 et seq. The provisions of these statues shall

govern and control all procurement hereunder notwithstanding any provisions herein to the contrary.

ARTICLE 6 POST BID INFORMATION 6.1 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Add: The apparent low bid Contractor shall submit the fully completed form A305 within ten (10) calendar days after bid opening 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY Delete Subparagraph 6.2 in its entirety.

6.3 SUBMITTALS

Delete Subparagraph 6.3.3 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

7.2 TIME AND DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS

7.2.1 Modify the first sentence of this paragraph as follows, change: “The Bidder shall deliver the required

bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract” to “The Bidder shall

deliver the required bonds to the Owner at the time of execution of the Contract.” Audubon shall be responsible



for the recordation of all contract documents, including, but not limited to, the contract and attendant documents,

as well as any and all subsequent contract documents.

Add the following Article 9:

ARTICLE 9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

9.1 TIME OF COMPLETION

9.1.1 Time is of the essence. All work shall be completed within three hundred sixty five (365) calendar days

from the Notice to Proceed. Work shall commence within (10) ten days from date of Notice to Proceed. The work

hours are explained in section 01100 of the specifications.

9.1.2 Work shall not commence until the Contractor has received a fully executed copy of the Contract which

authorizes the Work and has also received a Notice to Proceed issued by the authorized representative. Work

commenced prior to receipt of both a fully executed copy of the Contract and a written Notice to Proceed from an

authorized City official shall be deemed unauthorized and such work will progress solely at Contractor's risk.

9.2 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

9.2.1 If the project is not substantially complete on the date set forth under ‘Time of Completion’, the Contractor

and his Surety will be liable for and will pay the Owner $1000.00 per each calendar day of delay until the work is

substantially complete unless circumstances dictate otherwise at the discretion of the Owner.


ARTICLE 10 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

10.1 Pre-Bid Conference: For all interested parties, the Owner will conduct a Non-Mandatory Pre-Bid

Conference and site tour on March 18, 2014 at 9:00 a.m. The location of the Pre-Bid Conference will be in the

ACRES Building at 14001 River Road, New Orleans, Louisiana. Attendance at the Pre-Bid Conference is not

mandatory for Contractors submitting proposals

10.2 Any revision of the Bidding Documents made as a result of the Pre-Bid Conference shall not be valid

unless included in an addendum issued in accordance with Paragraph 3.4 of the Instructions to Bidders.


ARTICLE 11 MBE, EDB AND WBE OWNED BUSINESS PARTICIPATION

Audubon Commission continues to acknowledge the desirability of participation by business enterprises owned by

members of racial and ethnic minorities, those individuals or businesses defined as economically disadvantaged

and women in all Audubon projects, whether they involve construction, professional services or commodities.

Such participation assists Audubon Commission in its efforts to provide real economic opportunity to those in the

community who in the past and now, have not had access to the capital required or to resources needed to

acquire or develop ownership interests in the enterprises, firms, or corporations contracting for such projects.



In support of Audubon Commission’s Supplier Diversity policy, the specifications of any contract in excess of Ten

Thousand Dollars shall include a bidder’s commitment to make good faith efforts to comply with the intention of

the Plan which is to extend Sub-contractor bid opportunities and joint venture participation opportunities to

historically underutilized business enterprises owned by members of racial and ethnic minorities, those individuals

or businesses defined as economically disadvantaged and women. Contractor’s are encouraged to purchase the

materials for the work from one or more minority, economically disadvantaged or woman owned business

enterprises and/or subcontract a portion of the work to one or more EDB Enterprises.

Each Contractor shall provide the name and address of any MBE, EDB or WBE involved in the Contract along

with the description of work performed and/or the product or service supplied. Monthly reports shall be provided to

Cecilie Halliwill, [email protected].

END OF DOCUMENT


INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 00300 - 1

DOCUMENT 00300 – INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

A. SOIL INVESTIGATION

1. Three historic reports of soil and subsurface investigations at the site are available, the

results of which can be found in the reports issued by Eustis Engineering Services,

L.L.C., dated September 3, 1991, October 11, 1991 and July 26, 1993.

B. INTERPRETATION

1. The soil reports are available by request. Soil investigation data is available only for

information and the convenience of bidders. The Owner, the Owners Representative and

the Architect disclaim any responsibility for the accuracy, true location and extent of the

soils investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim responsibility

for interpretation of that data by bidders, as in projecting soil-bearing values, soil stability

and the presence, level and extent of underground water. The Contractor must follow the

more stringent requirement noted in either the geotechnical report or the technical

specifications for construction procedures.

END OF DOCUMENT


EXISTING CONDITIONS 00320 - 1

DOCUMENT 00320 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. CONDITION OF SITE: The Contractor is to accept the area of the work in its present condition and

therefore shall carefully examine the area of the work and determine for himself all existing conditions

visually discernable and/or reasonably expected from his understanding of the Contract Documents

and/or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents or his knowledge of this particular type of

project, and he shall be responsible for same.

END OF DOCUMENT


BID FORM / BID SECURITY FORM 00410 - 1

DOCUMENT 00410 – BID FORM /BID SECURITY FORM

A. The Bid Form and Bid Security Form to be used on this Project will be the LOUISIANA UNIFORM

PUBLIC WORKS BID FORM and BID BOND FORM.

B. These documents are included, in their entirety, in the Project Manual following this page.

END OF DOCUMENT

January 2009

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORKS BID FORM

TO: Audubon Commission in conjunction

with Audubon Nature Institute

Attn: Cecilie Halliwill



BID FOR: ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE

WILDLIFE

14001 River Road,

New Orleans, Louisiana 70131

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding

Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any

addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools,

appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and

completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: Torre Design Consortium

Ltd. and dated: January 2014.

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: : (Enter the number the

Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging

TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base

Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of:

Dollars ($ )

ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices

designated as alternates in the unit price description.

Alternate No. 1 Exterior fence dig out barrier for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ )

Alternate No. 2 Two (2) additional okapi suites for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ )

Alternate No. 3 Two (2) additional okapi suites for the lump sum of:

N/A Dollars ($ )

NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE:

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included with

the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed.

** If someone other than a corporate officer signs for the Bidder/Contractor, a copy of a corporate resolution or other signature

authorization shall be required for submission of bid. Failure to include a copy of the appropriate signature authorization, if

required, may result in the rejection of the bid unless bidder has complied with La. R.S. 38:2212(A)(1)(c) or RS 38:2212(O) .

BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA RS 38:2218.A is attached to

and made a part of this bid. If a bid bond is provided it shall be on the attached form and only on the attached form.

January 2009

This Page Left Blank

January 2009

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM

UNIT PRICE FORM

TO: Audubon Commission in conjunction BID FOR: ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE

with Audubon Nature Institute WILDLIFE

Attn: Cecilie Halliwill 14001 River Road,

6500 Magazine Street New Orleans, Louisiana 70131


UNIT PRICES: This form shall be used for any and all work required by the Bidding Documents and described as unit

prices. Amounts shall be stated in figures and only in figures.

DESCRIPTION: Base Bid or Alt.# ___

REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity

times Unit Price)

No. 1

Unsuitable

Subgrade

Removed

1000 Cubic Yard

DESCRIPTION: x

QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity

times Unit Price)

No. 2 Select Fill

Material

Installed

1000 Cubic Yard

DESCRIPTION: x

REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity

times Unit Price)

N/A

All quantities are estimated. The Contractor will be paid based upon actual quantities as verified by the Owner

January 2009

This Page Left Blank

January 2009

BID BOND

Date:

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That of , as

Principal, and , as Surety, are held

and firmly bound unto the Audubon Commission (Owner), in the full and just sum of five (5%) percent of the

total amount of this proposal, including all alternates, lawful money of the United States, for payment of

which sum, well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and

assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents.

Surety represents that it is listed on the current U. S. Department of the Treasury Financial

Management Service list of approved bonding companies as approved for an amount equal to or greater that

the amount for which it obligates itself in this instrument or that it is a Louisiana domiciled insurance

company with at least an A - rating in the latest printing of the A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. If surety

qualifies by virtue of its Best's listing, the Bond amount may not exceed ten percent of policyholders' surplus

as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide.

Surety further represents that it is licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana and that this Bond

is signed by surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. This Bid Bond is accompanied by appropriate power of

attorney.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, whereas said Principal is herewith

submitting its proposal to the Owner on a Contract for:

________________________________________________________________________________

NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Contract be awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall, within

such time as may be specified, enter into the Contract in writing and give a good and sufficient bond to secure

the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract with surety acceptable to the Owner, then this

obligation shall be void; otherwise this obligation shall become due and payable.

PRINCIPAL (BIDDER) SURETY

BY: BY:

AUTHORIZED OFFICER-OWNER-PARTNER AGENT OR ATTORNEY-IN-FACT(SEAL)

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 00450 - 1


DOCUMENT 450 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF

PARISH OF

_______________________________________, being first duly sworn, deposes and says that:

(1) He is (Owner) (Partner) (Office) (Representative) or (Agent), of

_________________________________, the Bidder that has submitted the attached bid:

(2) Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid: (3) Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives,

employees or parties of interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly, or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the Bid price or the Bid price of any other bidder, or to secure through any advantage against the Audubon Commission of any person interested in the proposed contract; and

(4) The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any

collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant.

END OF DOCUMENT

__________________________

Notory

Subscribed and sworn to, this

, 2014


ATTESTATIONS 00460 - 1

DOCUMENT 00460 -ATTESTATIONS

A. The Attestations form required by the State of Louisiana covering LA. R.S.38:2227 and LA.

R.S.38:2212.10 must be completed by the Contractor.


END OF DOCUMENT


ELECTRONIC VERIFICATION AFFIDAVIT 00465 - 1

DOCUMENT 00465 - ELECTRONIC VERIFICATION AFFIDAVIT

STATE OF LOUISIANA

PARISH OF ORLEANS

BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, personally came and appeared the undersigned,

[officer ] of [company name], who, after being duly sworn, did depose and state that:

1. [company name] is registered and participates in a status verification system, as defined by Act

376 of the 2011 Louisiana Legislative Session, as “…electronic verification of work authorization

program of the Illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act of 1996, 8 U.S.C.

1324(a), and operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security, known as the ‘EVerify’

program,” to verify that all employees in the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the

United States or are legal aliens; and that

2. [company name] shall continue to utilize a status verification system to verify the legal status of

all new employees in the State of Louisiana during the term of any contract with a public entity

for the physical performance of services; and that

3. [company name] shall require all subcontractors to submit to [company name] a sworn affidavit

verifying that said subcontractor is registered and participates in a status verification program,

and that subcontractor shall continue to utilize a status verification program to verify the legal

status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana during the term of any subcontract with

[company name].

Dated this ‐‐ day of ‐‐‐‐‐, 2014.

______________________________

SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED

BEFORE ME, THIS ‐‐ DAY

OF ‐‐‐‐‐, 2014.

__________________________


AGREEMENT 00500 - 1

DOCUMENT 00500 -AGREEMENT

A. The form of contract to be used for this project will be the American Institute of Architects Form,

"Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a

STIPULATED SUM, AlA Document A101 -2007, 2007 Edition -Electronic Format".


END OF DOCUMENT

AIA®

Document A101TM

– 2007

Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

AIA Document A101™ – 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The

American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International

Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal

penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:18:04 on

10/21/2009 under Order No.6758282110_1 which expires on 05/13/2010, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (1648783682)

1














reviewed.


legal consequences.




or modification.

AIA Document A201™–2007,

General Conditions of the

Contract for Construction,

is adopted in this document

by reference. Do not use

with other general

conditions unless this

document is modified.







this document.

AGREEMENT made as of the « » day of « » in the year « »

(In words, indicate day, month and year)

BETWEEN the Owner:



New Orleans, LA 70118»

and the Contractor:

(Name, legal status, address and other information)

»

«

»

for the following Project:


14001 River Road


The Architect:




Telephone No. (504) 899-2932

The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.






User Notes: (1648783682)

2

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS

ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other

Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed

in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and

are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the

entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or

agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in

Article 9.

ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in

the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.

ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated

below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. Notice to proceed is

due thirty (30) days after award of Contract. This may be extended by mutual consent LA R.S. 38:2215C.

(Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date

will be fixed in a notice to proceed.)

The signing of the contract by the Owner shall constitute the Notice to Proceed to the Contractor.

If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages and other security interests,

the Owner’s time requirement shall be as follows:

N/A

§ 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement.

§ 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than three hundred sixty five

(365) days from the date of commencement, or as follows:

(Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of

commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the

Work.)

« »






User Notes: (1648783682)

3

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date None required.

, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

(Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for

bonus payments for early completion of the Work.)

Liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day which the work is not completed beginning with the first day

beyond the date of substantial completion stipulated in paragraph 3.3, the liquidated damages will be One Thousand

dollars ($1000.00) per day.

ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the

Contract. The Contract Sum shall be » ($ «» ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract

Documents.

§ 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract

Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner:

(State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the

Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other

alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.)

« »

§ 4.3 Unit prices, if any:

(Identify and state the unit price; state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit ($ 0.00)

§ 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any:

(Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.)

Item Price

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for

Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the

Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of

the month, or as follows:

«N/A »

§ 5.1.3 Contractor shall submit applications for payment monthly. Provided that an Application for Payment is

received by the Architect not later than the first day of a month, the architect shall have 30 days to review and

submit the Certificate for Payment to the Owner, who shall make payment to the Contractor of the amounts thereby

certified by the Architect not later than 30 days from final approval of the Architect.

§ 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the

Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract

Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported

by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the

Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.






User Notes: (1648783682)

4

§ 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end

of the period covered by the Application for Payment.

§ 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be

computed as follows:

.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by

multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum

allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of five percent (5% ).

Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute

shall be included as provided in Section 7.3.9 of AIA Document A201™–2007, General Conditions

of the Contract for Construction;

.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and

suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved

in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less

retainage of five percent (5%);

.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and

.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment

as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201–2007.

§ 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under

the following circumstances:

.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the

full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete

Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and

(Section 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201–2007 requires release of applicable retainage upon

Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.) The Owner will not release retainage

until a clear Lien Certificate is recorded.

.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the

Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document

A201–2007.

§ 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:

(If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from

the percentages inserted in Sections 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract

Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.)

Not Allowed; except upon Owner’s receipt of Clear Lien & Privilege Certificate.

§ 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for

materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.

§ 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the

Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct

Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201–2007, and to satisfy other requirements,

if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.

§ 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the

Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:

Final payment shall be made after the delay for filing of a Labor and Material claim has expired in accordance with

provisions of LSA-R.S. 38:2241, et seq.






User Notes: (1648783682)

5

ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 6.1 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Architect will serve as Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Section 15.2 of AIA Document A201–2007, unless

the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as Initial Decision Maker.

(If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker,

if other than the Architect.)

« »

§ 6.2 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Section 15.3 of AIA Document A201–2007, the

method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows:

(Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution

below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims

will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.)

[ « » ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201–2007

[ X ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction

[ « » ] Other (Specify)

« »

ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document

A201–2007.

§ 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2007.

ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2007 or another Contract

Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract

Documents.

§ 8.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated

below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is

located.

(Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)

N/A

§ 8.3 The Owner’s representative:

(Name, address and other information)


§ 8.4 The Contractor’s representative:

(Name, address and other information)

« »

«

§ 8.5 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the

other party.

§ 8.6 Other provisions:

Arbitration is not applicable between the parties.






User Notes: (1648783682)

6

« »

ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in

the sections below.

§ 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A101–2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner

and Contractor.

§ 9.1.2 The General Conditions are AIA Document A201–2007, General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction.

§ 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

Section 00800 Supplementary

Conditions

January 2014 00800-1 through 00800-4

§ 9.1.4 The Specifications:

(Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)

Section Title Date Pages

Cover - 16510 ALLIANCE FOR

SUSTAINABLE

WILDLIFE

January 2014 755

§ 9.1.5 The Drawings:

(Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)

Number Title Date Cover – EOG 1.1 ALLIANCE FOR

SUSTAINABLE

WILDLIFE

January 2014

§ 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any:

Number Date Pages

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding

requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.

§ 9.1.7 Additional documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents:

.1 AIA Document E201™–2007, Digital Data Protocol Exhibit, if completed by the parties, or the

following:

N/A

.2 Other documents, if any, listed below:

(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA

Document A201–2007 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid,

Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor’s bid are not part of the Contract

Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be

part of the Contract Documents.)

N/A






User Notes: (1648783682)

7

ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of AIA Document

A201–2007.

(State bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required in Article 11 of AIA Document

A201–2007.)

Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount ($ 0.00) As per Specification As per Specification

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

«J. Kelly Duncan, President

(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)


BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00600 - 1

DOCUMENT 00600 - BONDS AND CERTIFICATES A. GUARANTY BONDS As per clause 11.4.1 of Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish and pay for a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond of a company qualified to do business in the State of Louisiana, and which is acceptable to the Owner. Each Bond shall be in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum, as security for the true and faithful performance of the Contract and payment in full of all subcontractors and persons performing labor, services, materials, machinery and fixtures in connection with the Work. The Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond Form may be AlA Document A 312 as published by the American Institute of Architects modified if necessary to comply with applicable statutes, or other bond form acceptable to the Audubon Nature Institute. The bonds shall be signed by an official of the bonding company and shall be accompanied by the bonding agent's written power of attorney. Provide six (6) copies each of the bonds and the power of attorney. B. INSURANCE

Refer to Article 11 of the General Conditions and Section 00800 -Supplementary Conditions for the description of

required insurance certificates. Provide 6 (six) copies of each of the insurance certificates.

END OF DOCUMENT


GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 - 1

DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The general conditions of the Contract to be used for this project will be the "General Conditions of the

Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 - 2007, 2007 Edition Electronic Format". B. This document is included, in its entirety, in the Project Manual following this page.

END OF DOCUMENT

AIA®

Document A201TM

– 2007

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction






User Notes: (726497603)

1














reviewed.


legal consequences.




or modification.







this document.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)


14001 River Road

New Orleans, Louisiana 70131

THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address)




THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address)




TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES






User Notes: (726497603)

2

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work

9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3

Acceptance of Work

9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3

Access to Work

3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1

Accident Prevention

10

Acts and Omissions

3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5,

10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2

Addenda

1.1.1, 3.11.1

Additional Costs, Claims for

3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4

Additional Inspections and Testing

9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5

Additional Insured

11.1.4

Additional Time, Claims for

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5

Administration of the Contract

3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5

Advertisement or Invitation to Bid

1.1.1

Aesthetic Effect

4.2.13

Allowances

3.8, 7.3.8

All-risk Insurance

11.3.1, 11.3.1.1

Applications for Payment

4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10,

11.1.3

Approvals

2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10,

4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1

Arbitration

8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.3.2, 15.4

ARCHITECT

4

Architect, Definition of

4.1.1

Architect, Extent of Authority

2.4.1, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2,

9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1,

13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1

Architect, Limitations of Authority and

Responsibility

2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2,

4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4,

9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2

Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses

2.4.1, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4

Architect’s Administration of the Contract

3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5

Architect’s Approvals

2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect’s Authority to Reject Work

3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1

Architect’s Copyright

1.1.7, 1.5

Architect’s Decisions

3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3,

7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,

13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3

Architect’s Inspections

3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5

Architect’s Instructions

3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2

Architect’s Interpretations

4.2.11, 4.2.12

Architect’s Project Representative

4.2.10

Architect’s Relationship with Contractor

1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5,

3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18,

4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5,

9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5,

15.2

Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors

1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7

Architect’s Representations

9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1

Architect’s Site Visits

3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5

Asbestos

10.3.1

Attorneys’ Fees

3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3

Award of Separate Contracts

6.1.1, 6.1.2

Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for

Portions of the Work

5.2

Basic Definitions

1.1

Bidding Requirements

1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1

Binding Dispute Resolution

9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1,

15.3.2, 15.4.1

Boiler and Machinery Insurance

11.3.2

Bonds, Lien

7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Bonds, Performance, and Payment

7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4

Building Permit

3.7.1

Capitalization

1.3






User Notes: (726497603)

3

Certificate of Substantial Completion

9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5

Certificates for Payment

4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7,

9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3

Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval

13.5.4

Certificates of Insurance

9.10.2, 11.1.3

Change Orders

1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8,

5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10,

8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9,

12.1.2, 15.1.3

Change Orders, Definition of

7.2.1

CHANGES IN THE WORK

2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.4.1, 8.3.1,

9.3.1.1, 11.3.9

Claims, Definition of

15.1.1

CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4

Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims

15.4.1

Claims for Additional Cost

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4

Claims for Additional Time

3.2.4, 3.7.46.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5

Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for

3.7.4

Claims for Damages

3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,

11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6

Claims Subject to Arbitration

15.3.1, 15.4.1

Cleaning Up

3.15, 6.3

Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to

2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,

6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1,

15.1.4

Commencement of the Work, Definition of

8.1.2

Communications Facilitating Contract

Administration

3.9.1, 4.2.4

Completion, Conditions Relating to

3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,

9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2

COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND

9

Completion, Substantial

4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,

12.2, 13.7

Compliance with Laws

1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4,

10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6,

14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3

Concealed or Unknown Conditions

3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3

Conditions of the Contract

1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4

Consent, Written

3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1,

9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2

Consolidation or Joinder

15.4.4

CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY

SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

1.1.4, 6

Construction Change Directive, Definition of

7.3.1

Construction Change Directives

1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,

9.3.1.1

Construction Schedules, Contractor’s

3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2

Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts

5.4, 14.2.2.2

Continuing Contract Performance

15.1.3

Contract, Definition of

1.1.2

CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR

SUSPENSION OF THE

5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14

Contract Administration

3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5

Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating

to

3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1

Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of

1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3

Contract Documents, Definition of

1.1.1

Contract Sum

3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4,

9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4,

15.2.5

Contract Sum, Definition of

9.1

Contract Time

3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4,

8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2,

15.1.5.1, 15.2.5

Contract Time, Definition of

8.1.1

CONTRACTOR

3

Contractor, Definition of

3.1, 6.1.2






User Notes: (726497603)

4

Contractor’s Construction Schedules

3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2

Contractor’s Employees

3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,

11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1,

Contractor’s Liability Insurance

11.1

Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors

and Owner’s Forces

3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4

Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors

1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,

11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8

Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect

1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5,

3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2,

6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6,

10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1

Contractor’s Representations

3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2

Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the

Work

3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8

Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents

3.2

Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work

9.7

Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract

14.1, 15.1.6

Contractor’s Submittals

3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2,

9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2

Contractor’s Superintendent

3.9, 10.2.6

Contractor’s Supervision and Construction

Procedures

1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,

7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3

Contractual Liability Insurance

11.1.1.8, 11.2

Coordination and Correlation

1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1

Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications

1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11

Copyrights

1.5, 3.17

Correction of Work

2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2

Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents

1.2

Cost, Definition of

7.3.7

Costs

2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3,

7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6,

11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14

Cutting and Patching

3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate

Contractors

3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3,

12.2.4

Damage to the Work

3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4.1, 11.3.1, 12.2.4

Damages, Claims for

3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,

11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6

Damages for Delay

6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2

Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of

8.1.2

Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of

8.1.3

Day, Definition of

8.1.4

Decisions of the Architect

3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3,

7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,

13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2

Decisions to Withhold Certification

9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3

Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,

Rejection and Correction of

2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2,

9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1

Definitions

1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,

15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1

Delays and Extensions of Time

3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,

10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5

Disputes

6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2

Documents and Samples at the Site

3.11

Drawings, Definition of

1.1.5

Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of

3.11

Effective Date of Insurance

8.2.2, 11.1.2

Emergencies

10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4

Employees, Contractor’s

3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,

10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1

Equipment, Labor, Materials or

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13.1, 3.15.1,

4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,

9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2

Execution and Progress of the Work

1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5,

3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2,

9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3






User Notes: (726497603)

5

Extensions of Time

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2,

10.4.1, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5

Failure of Payment

9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2

Faulty Work

(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)

Final Completion and Final Payment

4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5,

12.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.4.3

Financial Arrangements, Owner’s

2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4

Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance

11.3.1.1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1

Governing Law

13.1

Guarantees (See Warranty)

Hazardous Materials

10.2.4, 10.3

Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers

5.2.1

Indemnification

3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2,

11.3.7

Information and Services Required of the Owner

2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5,

9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1,

13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3

Initial Decision

15.2

Initial Decision Maker, Definition of

1.1.8

Initial Decision Maker, Decisions

14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5

Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority

14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4,

15.2.5

Injury or Damage to Person or Property

10.2.8, 10.4.1

Inspections

3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3,

9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5

Instructions to Bidders

1.1.1

Instructions to the Contractor

3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2

Instruments of Service, Definition of

1.1.7

Insurance

3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11

Insurance, Boiler and Machinery

11.3.2

Insurance, Contractor’s Liability

11.1

Insurance, Effective Date of

8.2.2, 11.1.2

Insurance, Loss of Use

11.3.3

Insurance, Owner’s Liability

11.2

Insurance, Property

10.2.5, 11.3

Insurance, Stored Materials

9.3.2

INSURANCE AND BONDS

11

Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy

9.9.1

Intent of the Contract Documents

1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4

Interest

13.6

Interpretation

1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1

Interpretations, Written

4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4

Judgment on Final Award

15.4.2

Labor and Materials, Equipment

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,

4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,

9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2

Labor Disputes

8.3.1

Laws and Regulations

1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13.1, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,

10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,

13.6.1, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4

Liens

2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8

Limitations, Statutes of

12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1

Limitations of Liability

2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,

4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3,

11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2

Limitations of Time

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7,

5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,

9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5,

11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15

Loss of Use Insurance

11.3.3

Material Suppliers

1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5

Materials, Hazardous

10.2.4, 10.3

Materials, Labor, Equipment and

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12,

3.13.1, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2,

9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1,

14.2.1.2






User Notes: (726497603)

6

Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and

Procedures of Construction

3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2

Mechanic’s Lien

2.1.2, 15.2.8

Mediation

8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3,

15.4.1

Minor Changes in the Work

1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13

Modifications, Definition of

1.1.1

Modifications to the Contract

1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7,

10.3.2, 11.3.1

Mutual Responsibility

6.2

Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of

9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3

Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of

2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3,

9.10.4, 12.2.1

Notice

2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1,

9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1,

13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1

Notice, Written

2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7,

9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14,

15.2.8, 15.4.1

Notice of Claims

3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4

Notice of Testing and Inspections

13.5.1, 13.5.2

Observations, Contractor’s

3.2, 3.7.4

Occupancy

2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5

Orders, Written

1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1,

13.5.2, 14.3.1

OWNER

2

Owner, Definition of

2.1.1

Owner, Information and Services Required of the

2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,

9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1,

13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3

Owner’s Authority

1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2,

4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3,

7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4,

9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2,

12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7

Owner’s Financial Capability

2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4

Owner’s Liability Insurance

11.2

Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors

1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work

2.4, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Clean Up

6.3

Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to

Award Separate Contracts

6.1

Owner’s Right to Stop the Work

2.3

Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work

14.3

Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract

14.2

Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications

and Other Instruments of Service

1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11.1, 3.17,

4.2.12, 5.3.1

Partial Occupancy or Use

9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5

Patching, Cutting and

3.14, 6.2.5

Patents

3.17

Payment, Applications for

4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1,

14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3

Payment, Certificates for

4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1,

9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4

Payment, Failure of

9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2

Payment, Final

4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3.1,

13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3

Payment Bond, Performance Bond and

7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4

Payments, Progress

9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9

Payments to Subcontractors

5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2

PCB

10.3.1

Performance Bond and Payment Bond

7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4

Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws

2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2

PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION

OF

10






User Notes: (726497603)

7

Polychlorinated Biphenyl

10.3.1

Product Data, Definition of

3.12.2

Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings

3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7

Progress and Completion

4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3

Progress Payments

9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3

Project, Definition of

1.1.4

Project Representatives

4.2.10

Property Insurance

10.2.5, 11.3

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10

Regulations and Laws

1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,

10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14,

15.2.8, 15.4

Rejection of Work

3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1

Releases and Waivers of Liens

9.10.2

Representations

3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1,

9.8.2, 9.10.1

Representatives

2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1,

5.1.2, 13.2.1

Responsibility for Those Performing the Work

3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10

Retainage

9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Review of Contract Documents and Field

Conditions by Contractor

3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3

Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and

Architect

3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2

Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and

Samples by Contractor

3.12

Rights and Remedies

1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1,

6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,

13.4, 14, 15.4

Royalties, Patents and Copyrights

3.17

Rules and Notices for Arbitration

15.4.1

Safety of Persons and Property

10.2, 10.4

Safety Precautions and Programs

3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4

Samples, Definition of

3.12.3

Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and

3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7

Samples at the Site, Documents and

3.11

Schedule of Values

9.2, 9.3.1

Schedules, Construction

3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2

Separate Contracts and Contractors

1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2

Shop Drawings, Definition of

3.12.1

Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7

Site, Use of

3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1

Site Inspections

3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5

Site Visits, Architect’s

3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5

Special Inspections and Testing

4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5

Specifications, Definition of

1.1.6

Specifications

1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14

Statute of Limitations

13.7, 15.4.1.1

Stopping the Work

2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1

Stored Materials

6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4

Subcontractor, Definition of

5.1.1

SUBCONTRACTORS

5

Subcontractors, Work by

1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,

9.6.7

Subcontractual Relations

5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1

Submittals

3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3,

9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3

Submittal Schedule

3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7

Subrogation, Waivers of

6.1.1, 11.3.7

Substantial Completion

4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,

12.2, 13.7

Substantial Completion, Definition of

9.8.1

Substitution of Subcontractors

5.2.3, 5.2.4






User Notes: (726497603)

8

Substitution of Architect

4.1.3

Substitutions of Materials

3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8

Sub-subcontractor, Definition of

5.1.2

Subsurface Conditions

3.7.4

Successors and Assigns

13.2

Superintendent

3.9, 10.2.6

Supervision and Construction Procedures

1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,

7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3

Surety

5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7

Surety, Consent of

9.10.2, 9.10.3

Surveys

2.2.3

Suspension by the Owner for Convenience

14.3

Suspension of the Work

5.4.2, 14.3

Suspension or Termination of the Contract

5.4.1.1, 14

Taxes

3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4

Termination by the Contractor

14.1, 15.1.6

Termination by the Owner for Cause

5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6

Termination by the Owner for Convenience

14.4

Termination of the Architect

4.1.3

Termination of the Contractor

14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE

CONTRACT

14

Tests and Inspections

3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2,

9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5

TIME

8

Time, Delays and Extensions of

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,

10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5

Time Limits

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2,

5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,

9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5,

13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4

Time Limits on Claims

3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2

Title to Work

9.3.2, 9.3.3

Transmission of Data in Digital Form

1.6

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF

WORK

12

Uncovering of Work

12.1

Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown

3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3

Unit Prices

7.3.3.2, 7.3.4

Use of Documents

1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3

Use of Site

3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1

Values, Schedule of

9.2, 9.3.1

Waiver of Claims by the Architect

13.4.2

Waiver of Claims by the Contractor

9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6

Waiver of Claims by the Owner

9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6

Waiver of Consequential Damages

14.2.4, 15.1.6

Waiver of Liens

9.10.2, 9.10.4

Waivers of Subrogation

6.1.1, 11.3.7

Warranty

3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7.1

Weather Delays

15.1.5.2

Work, Definition of

1.1.3

Written Consent

1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,

9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2

Written Interpretations

4.2.11, 4.2.12

Written Notice

2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7,

9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14,

15.4.1

Written Orders

1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1,

15.1.2






User Notes: (726497603)

9

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the

Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other

Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in

the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment

to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written

order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the

Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,

other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or

proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements.

§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated

agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written

or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be

construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the

Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner

and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the

Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the

Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 THE WORK The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or

partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by

the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole

or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors.

§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and

dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,

equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the

tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their

respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies,

surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in

accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2.

§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and

completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by

one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent

consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the

indicated results.






User Notes: (726497603)

10

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not

control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be

performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction

industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of

numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and

articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in

another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective

Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and

other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or

equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to

meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as

publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use

and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All

copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service.

The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the

Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the

specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants.

§ 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form,

they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already

provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the

Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have

express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization.

Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means

the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information

necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such

information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,

usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide

reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the

Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the

Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3)

the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due.

The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or

the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not

materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.






User Notes: (726497603)

11

§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,

including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,

assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent

changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for

the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of

information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the

Work.

§ 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with

reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control

and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the

Contractor’s written request for such information or services.

§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of

the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as

required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the

Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such

order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part

of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent

required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails

within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such

default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner

may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from

payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including

Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect

or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the

Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor

shall pay the difference to the Owner.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the

Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the

jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have

express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means

the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests,

inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become

generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal

observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.






User Notes: (726497603)

12

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the

Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as

the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing

conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These

obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the

purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor

shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the

Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the

Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional,

unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable

laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor

shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a

request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the

Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or

3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations

of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been

avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the

Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or

omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract

Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules

and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The

Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques,

sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract

Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific

instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall

evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite

safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,

methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the

Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from

the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques,

sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely

responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences

or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees,

Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or

on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that

such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,

materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other

facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent

and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections

3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the

Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.






User Notes: (726497603)

13

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other

persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly

skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will

be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further

warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,

except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or

equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes

remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or

insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the

Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are

legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled

to go into effect.

§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building

permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper

execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally

required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility

for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1)

subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract

Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily

found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions

are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly

investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or

decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an

equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions

at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the

terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the

reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as

provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial

markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately

suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such

notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume

the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but

shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the

Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in

Article 15.

§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items

covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,






User Notes: (726497603)

14

but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable

objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

.1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and

all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;

.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but

not in the allowances; and

.3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted

accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference

between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs

under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance

at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and

communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner

through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14

days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the

proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply

within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made

reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent,

which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and

Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits

current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the

Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall

provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter

as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval.

The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be

coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review

submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase

in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to

the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change

Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made

during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required

submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the

Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.






User Notes: (726497603)

15

§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the

Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of

the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and

other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards

by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is

to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design

concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents

require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals

upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.

Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the

Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in

accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal

schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of

the Owner or of separate contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to

the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified

materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and

coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract

Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal

and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been

approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of

responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop

Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect

in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific

deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued

authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop

Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,

Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the

absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of

architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of

the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s

responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be

required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or

certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the

Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria

that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a

properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,

specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings

and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear

such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled






User Notes: (726497603)

16

to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or

provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all

performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will

review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for

conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor

shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract

Documents.

§ 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably

encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make

its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition

existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed

construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by

excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor

except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably

withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s

consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or

rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste

materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about

the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner

shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever

located.

§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement

of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but

shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular

manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are

contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the

Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a

patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the

Architect.

§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,

Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,

losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the

Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death,

or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the

negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or

anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is

caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce






User Notes: (726497603)

17

other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section

3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,

a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,

compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts,

disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing

architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the

Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents

shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect.

Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom

the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the

Architect.

§ 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be

an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment.

The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract

Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed

with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,

and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when

fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to

make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will

not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or

procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the

Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and

quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract

Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and

deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the

Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or

charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or

employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially

authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about

matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be

through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the

Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review

and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the

Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the






User Notes: (726497603)

18

Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed.

However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to

exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,

material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the

Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals

such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance

with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be

taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved

submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional

judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the

accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for

installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as

required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the

Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval

of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods,

techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an

assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor

changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and

recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date

of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the

Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and

assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section

9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in

carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of

such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the

Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests

will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable

from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations

and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not

show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent

expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The

Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with

reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and

Specifications in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the

Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in

number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor”

does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.






User Notes: (726497603)

19

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to

perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract

Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-

subcontractor.

§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as

practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of

persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)

proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in

writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or

entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within

the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made

reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the

Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the

Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but

rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall

be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order

shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract

Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively

in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or

Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each

Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by

terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,

including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents,

assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the

Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor

so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically

provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the

Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the

Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The

Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,

copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the

Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may

be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of

such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided

that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to

Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the

Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the

Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and

obligations under the subcontract.






User Notes: (726497603)

20

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s

compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a

successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity,

the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the

subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s

own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or

operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those

portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is

involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations

on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes

each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate

contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with

other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any

revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction

schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until

subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations

related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations

and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without

excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.

§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and

storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the

Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by

the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly

report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable

for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that

the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the

Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor

because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be

responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly

timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially

completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are

described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.






User Notes: (726497603)

21

§ 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their

respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the

Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the

Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the

limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction

Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the

Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the

Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive

or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and

Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and

Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract

Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes

in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the

Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change

Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be

based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to

permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or

percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.7.

§ 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally

contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that

application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or

Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in

the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,

provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or

Contract Time.

§ 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith,

including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall

be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.






User Notes: (726497603)

22

§ 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,

the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of

those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an

amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a

reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form

as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise

provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits

required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or

consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the

Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to

the Work; and

.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a

net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and

credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall

be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor

may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment.

The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs

and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be

reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis

as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the

adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such

agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be

issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or

extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be

effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.

ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in

the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically

defined.

§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement

the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely

commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be






User Notes: (726497603)

23

furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the

effective date of such insurance.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion

within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of

the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by

changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other

causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or

by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change

Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of

the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by

the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the

various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as

the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing

the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under

Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by

such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of

requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract

Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in

the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the

Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the

Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by

others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and

equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance

by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location

agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon

compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such

materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable

insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner

no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for

Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the






User Notes: (726497603)

24

Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims,

security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or

entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to

the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is

properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification

in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,

based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the

best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that

the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to

an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of

subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion

and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further

constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance

of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-

site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,

sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers

and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to

ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary

to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot

be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the

Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised

amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to

make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of

subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to

such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor

is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless

security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or

equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the

unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;

or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts

previously withheld.

§ 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option,

issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the

Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the

Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such

payment on the next Certificate for Payment.

§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and

within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.






User Notes: (726497603)

25

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the

Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to

the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate

agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar

manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of

completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on

account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid

Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted

Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact

Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an

obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided

in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the

Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,

payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by

the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under

contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require

money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any

fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity

to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after

receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days

after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding

dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect,

stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended

appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-

down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof

is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the

Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept

separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of

items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the

responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or

designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not

included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so

that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor

shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification

by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to

determine Substantial Completion.






User Notes: (726497603)

26

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a

Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish

responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and

insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the

Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion

of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written

acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if

any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment

shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when

such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented

to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the

Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided

the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,

retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in

writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract

Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and

submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use

shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement

between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect

the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the

Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not

constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance

and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the

Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect

will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information

and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in

accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the

Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will

constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being

entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits

to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected

with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts

withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the

Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed

to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the

Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by

the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data

establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security

interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the

Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a

bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after

payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in

discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.






User Notes: (726497603)

27

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault

of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the

Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the

Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the

remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract

Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that

portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to

certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,

except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver

of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time

of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs

in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to

prevent damage, injury or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the

site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub-

subcontractors; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,

roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course

of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their

protection from damage, injury or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,

reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,

promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are

necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under

supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property

insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in

whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed

by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under

Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or

anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,

and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in

addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.






User Notes: (726497603)

28

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty

shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise

designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or

create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of

others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not

insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice

shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents

regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the

Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death

to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl

(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately

stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory

to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such

material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the

Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications

of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or

who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the

Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the

persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity

proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no

reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall

resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be

extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable

additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,

Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against

claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from

performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or

death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or

expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property

(other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence

of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings

to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be

responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s

fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of

a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to

perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s

fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for

the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the

Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.






User Notes: (726497603)

29

§ 10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to

prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor

on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do

business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims

set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under

the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by

a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of

them may be liable:

.1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that

are applicable to the Work to be performed;

.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the

Contractor’s employees;

.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than

the Contractor’s employees;

.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;

.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible

property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;

.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of

ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;

.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and

.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under

Section 3.18.

§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the

Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an

occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the

Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment,

and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction

of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract

Documents.

§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of

the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the

insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies

will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An

additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations,

shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal

or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning

reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be

furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness.

§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include

(1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in

part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an

additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the

Contractor’s completed operations.

§ 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance.

§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully

authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s






User Notes: (726497603)

30

risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract

Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at

the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,

unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who

are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person

or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered,

whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-

subcontractors in the Project.

§ 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation,

insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without

duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework,

testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any

applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services

and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.

§ 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of

the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to

commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the

Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof

shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or

maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all

reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.

§ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such

deductibles.

§ 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work

in transit.

§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company

or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or

otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or

companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that

would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.

§ 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by

law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;

this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,

and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.

§ 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss

of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action

against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other

hazards however caused.

§ 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other

special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such

insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.

§ 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent

to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment

property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring

the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section

11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate

policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.






User Notes: (726497603)

31

§ 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that

includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable

conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision

that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’

prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.

§ 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-

subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate

contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,

for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to

this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of

such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the

Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-

subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for

validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of

subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even

though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay

the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the

property damaged.

§ 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made

payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any

applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of

insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for

validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss,

give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against

proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the

Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in

accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and

Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for

convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change

in the Work in accordance with Article 7.

§ 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in

interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such

objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method

of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method

of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute

over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators.

§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of

the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically

required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.

§ 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment

of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall

authorize a copy to be furnished.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically

expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the

Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.






User Notes: (726497603)

32

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior

to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such

Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate

Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such

costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or

a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.

§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of

the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,

installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost

of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary

thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of

Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties

established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,

any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor

shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously

given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after

discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the

Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require

correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct

nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or

Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first

performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual

completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the

Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or

partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work

that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to

other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for

correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct

the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents

may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the

Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the

Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as

appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.






User Notes: (726497603)

33

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have

selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section

15.4.

§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal

representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided

in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the

other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain

legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction

financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.

§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the

firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or

certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party

giving notice.

§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder

shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available

by law.

§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty

afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a

breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.

§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract

Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public

authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and

approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public

authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect

timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such

procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until

after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or

applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.

§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require

additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written

authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection

or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of

when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such

costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the

portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary

by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses

shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract

Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.






User Notes: (726497603)

34

§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the

Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid

unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate

as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at

the place where the Project is located.

§ 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of

warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements

of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law,

but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and

Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days

through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any

other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for

any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to

be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be

stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of

the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not

made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable

evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,

Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work

under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work

by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of

days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’

written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work

executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a

Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract

with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract

Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional

days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided

in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective

agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful

orders of a public authority; or






User Notes: (726497603)

35

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that

sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and

after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of

the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and

construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written

request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs

incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall

not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for

the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not

expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,

the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case

may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall

survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in

whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by

suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include

profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause

for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the

Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;

and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the

notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts

and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment

for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on

the Work not executed.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other

relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in

question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to

substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.






User Notes: (726497603)

36

§ 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial

Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.

Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or

within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article

14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make

payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue

Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall

be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency

endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided

herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on

progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be

documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have

been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to

this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,

business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of

such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of

personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit

except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination

in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of

liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 INITIAL DECISION § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial

Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise

indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be

required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30

days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been

rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide

disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or

more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting

data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise,

or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker

lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the

Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the

Claim.






User Notes: (726497603)

37

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek

information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial

Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of

such persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional

supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a

response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting

data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon

receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim

in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that

the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the

reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision

Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding

on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding

dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party

file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the

demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue

binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if

any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner

may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in

accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 MEDIATION § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those

waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent

to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree

otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction

Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in

writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation.

The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event,

mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending

mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the

parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed

to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the

place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in

mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 ARBITRATION § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any

Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually

agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction

Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,

delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The






User Notes: (726497603)

38

party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on

which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for

mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based

on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a

written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of

legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in

accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity

duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court

having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any

other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration

permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,

and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a

common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,

provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an

additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question

not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under

this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and

Contractor under this Agreement.


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 1

SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 2007 Edition -Electronic Format". Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1; GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents

Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.4 1.2.4 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and govern the execution of the work of all Sections of the Specifications.

3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS 3.7.1 Modify the paragraph as follows: Change “Contractor“ to “Owner.” The paragraph shall read “Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits….” ARTICLE 5; SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3 Subcontractual Relations Modify the first sentence of this paragraph as follows, change: “By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall…” to “By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall…” ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.8 Substantial Completion

Delete 9.8.5 in its entirety and substitute the following:

9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.

9.10 Final Completion And Final Payment

Add the following Subparagraph to 9.10.2:

.1 Retainage will not be released until a clear Lien Certificate is recorded.



ARTICLE 11; INSURANCE AND BONDS Add the following requirements to apply to all insurance and bonds required under ARTICLE 11. a. Insurance and bonds provided by the Contractor shall be with a reliable company (having

at least an "A VIll":

Rating according to the latest A.M. Best Key Rating Guide and on the U.S. Treasury List)

of the Contractors choice, acceptable to and approved by the Owner and authorized to

do business in the state where the project is located. b. The Contractor shall have the policies endorsed to permit occupancy of all or part of the

work by Owner at any time during the coverage term of the policies. c. All liability policies referred to in this Article shall be maintained in the same company. d. All insurance furnished in compliance with this Article shall include the Owner, his agents,

consultants, employees and representatives and the Architect as additional named insured and shall waive rights of subrogation against the Owner. The Owner so stated on all insurance Certificates shall be as indicated on the Contract.

e. Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Insurance indicating that the Indemnification

clause included in 3.18 has been added to his Comprehensive General Liability Policy with the same limits of coverage indicated herein.

f. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to

expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Add the following Subparagraph 11.1.2.1

11.1.2.1 All contractors who are to perform work on Audubon properties shall be required to carry the following insurance coverage. Insurance certificates shall be provided to the Purchasing office prior to the start of any work. Audubon Commission, Audubon Nature Institute and City of New Orleans shall be listed as an additional insured (on all certificates of insurance for all public works contracts, for all other work; Audubon Commission, Audubon Nature Institute and City of New Orleans shall be listed as a certificate holders. Audubon Commission and Audubon Nature Institute shall, be notified of any termination, of these stated insurance requirements. Certification must include; name and address of insurance company (must be authorized by an Insurance Department in Louisiana to transact business in the State of Louisiana): policy number, and liability coverage and amounts.

Send certificate to: Audubon Commission and Audubon Nature Institute Attn: Purchasing Director 6500 Magazine Street New Orleans, LA 70118



Worker’s Compensation

Employer’s Liability: Each Accident: $500,000 Disease: $500,000 Policy Limit, Each Employee: $500,000

Automobile Liability

$500,000 Each Person $500,000 Each Accident

General Liability (including Premises Operations; Independent Contractors’ Protective, Products and Completed Operations, Broad Form Property Damage):

Bodily Injury $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate. Property Damage $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate

Contractual Liability (Hold Harmless Coverage):

Bodily Injury $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence . Personal Injury (with Employment Exclusion deleted, if applicable): $1,000,000 Aggregate.

If General Liability policy includes a General Aggregate, such General Aggregate shall not be less than $2,000,000.

11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

Paragraph 11.3.1.1 note that coverage shall include named windstorms including hurricanes.

11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

Delete 11.4.1 in its entirety and substitute the following:

11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for a Performance Bond and Labor and Material

Payment Bond of a company on the U.S. Treasury List, complying with Louisiana Revised

Statutes 9:4801 and qualified to do business in the State in which the project is being

constructed, and which is acceptable to and in form approved by the Owner, each bond in a

amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, as security for the true a..'1d

faithful performance of the Contract and payment in full of all subcontractors and persons

performing labor, services, materials, machinery and fixtures in connection with the work.. The

surety shall be bound in solido with the Contractor. The executed bonds, together with the

bonding agent's power of attorney, shall be furnished to the Owner along with the executed

Contract, and the number of copies reasonable required by him.

11.4.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than the date the

Agreement is entered into; or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter

of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence

satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.



11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on

behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney."

ARTICLE 12; UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

Add the following to 12.2:

12.2.6 The corrective remedies set forth in this Paragraph 12.2 are not exclusive and shall not

deprive the Owner of any action right or remedy otherwise available to it for breach of any of the

provisions of the Contract Documents and for any damages suffered by Owner as a result of such

defects in the Work."

ARTICLE 14; TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

Subparagraphs 14.1.1, 14.1.2, 14.1.3 and 14.1.4 are deleted. ARTICLE 15; CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.4 ARBITRATION Delete all subparagraphs 15.4.1.thru 15.4.4.3. END OF DOCUMENT


SUMMARY 01100 - 1

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Owner's occupancy requirements. 4. Specification formats and conventions. 5. Intent of Contract Documents.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Activity Limitations" for limitations and procedures governing

temporary use of Owner's facilities. 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE WILDLIFE 1. Project Location: Freeport-McMoRan Audubon Species Survival Center, 14001 River

Road, New Orleans, LA 70131

B. Owner: Audubon Institute.

C. Architect: Torre / Design Consortium Ltd. 5005 Magazine Street, New Orleans, LA D. The Work consists of the following: Construction of an animal holding barns, fenced animal

paddocks, paving and other site improvements are required as part of the Work. 1. The Work includes site clearing, rough grading, fine grading, site utilities, asphalt, fenc-

ing, concrete paving, timber piles, masonry walls, structural steel and steel fabrication, carpentry, metal roofing, roof accessories, sheet metal, hollow metal doors and frames, hardware, glazing, interior and exterior finishes, plumbing, heating and ventilation, elec-trical systems, and lighting.

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.


SUMMARY 01100 - 2

1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy adjacent site and buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing service road, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct existing service road, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Work on or under the service road must be coordinated with the Owner.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.


SUMMARY 01100 - 3

1.8 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all materials, appliances, labor and services of every kind necessary for the proper execution of the Work. The Contract Documents are to be considered as one document, and whatever is called for by any one of the documents shall be as binding as if called for by all. In the event that a contradiction exists between the various drawings and/or specifications, the more stringent requirements shall apply. Layout of building and site improvements shall be based on the architecture and site work drawings unless deviation is approved by the Architect. All deviations between architecture/sitework and engineering drawings must be brought to the Architects attention for review before the work can proceed, failure to follow this procedure will result in the contractor making adjustments in the work at his own expense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01100


ACTIVITY LIMITATIONS 01150-1

SECTION 01150 - ACTIVITY LIMITATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes provisions for construction operations on the Owner’s property performed by the Contractor or any party providing goods or services as a part of this contract. Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction Coordination. 2. Public and Zoo Staff Access. 3. Contractor’s use of the Owner’s property. 4. Construction Limits. 5. Penalties.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for Preparing

and submitting Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section “Execution Requirements” for procedures for

coordinating general installation and field –engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. General: Promptly upon award of the contract, notify all pertinent personnel regarding requirements of this Section. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of

the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for activities. Include such items as required notices and reports.

D. Construction Limits and Staging Areas: To as great an extent as possible, the

Contractor has been assigned permanent construction limits, storage and staging areas, and access routes.

E. Public and Zoo Staff Access: Maintain continuous and unobstructed access by the

public and the zoo staff to all areas not within the area of the Work of this Contract. Temporary interruptions to this access or to the utility services to the Buildings within this area are at the discretion of the Owner. Make written request to the Owner 72 hours prior to any proposed interruption of access or utility service.



1.4 CONTRACTOR’S ACCESS TO ZOO

A. Deliveries: To avoid traffic conflict with Local Residents, and to avoid overloading of streets and driveways elsewhere on the Owner’s property, limit the access of trucks, deliveries of materials and tools, workmen, and all other equipment to a route agreed to by both the General Contractor and by the Owner.

1. No delivery of materials for the work of this Contract will be

accepted at zoo gates or offices other than that established by the prior approval of the owner.

1.5 CONTRACTOR’S ACCESS TO THE CONSTRUCTION SITE

A. General: Require Contractor’s vehicles, vehicles belonging to employees of the Contractor, and all other vehicles and workmen entering upon the Owner’s property in performance of the work of the Contract, to use only the Access Route described in this section and as indicated on the drawings.

1. Restore the construction Access Route as indicated on the drawings following completion of the Work.

2. Secure all Street Use or other permits required for this Access Route. 3. Provide the specified construction fencing along all edges of the construction

access route if one is not already present. If using an existing fence, the fence must be restored to its original condition.

1.6 STAGING, PARKING, AND STORAGE AREAS

A. General: Staging and storage areas are shown on the Drawings. No other staging and storage areas are available on the grounds of the Zoo.

4. The Contractor will provide all required arrangements for off site storage and

staging of materials. 5. All Contractor parking is to occur within the limit of the work line, or the

staging area. 6. Upon completion of the project, the staging and surrounding area are to be

cleaned of all materials and trash. 1.7 SECURITY AND SAFETY

A. General: Restrict the access of all persons entering upon the Owners’ property in

connection with the Work to the limit of work lines shown on the plans.

1. Normal Hours of Work are between 7:00 a.m. – 6:00 p.m. 2. Notify Zoo security of any work to be performed outside the normal hours of

work; Owner approval is required. 3. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining public safety in and around the

construction site. Provide temporary fencing or other methods as the Contractor deems appropriate.

B. Locking Gates: All gates must be closed and locked at all times except during actual

passage of workmen, supplies, or equipment.



1. Coordinate keying and key control procedures with the Owner.

C. Safety:

1. The speed limit on zoo grounds is 5 miles per hour. 2. Secure or chain ladders and other equipment when not in use and after

working hours to prevent use by vandals.

D. Animal Safety: No Contractor shall have access to any animal areas or enclosures except in the presence of an Animal Keeper or Curator.

1. Allow no one to bring pets or animals of any kind to the zoo grounds, whether

in vehicles or not. 2. Allow no one to bring radios and/or other audio devices onto the zoo

grounds. 3. The timing of the use of power activated drivers must be coordinated and

approved by Zoo staff. Discharge sounds like a gun shot and can cause animals to charge fencing and injure themselves.

1.8 EXISTING TREE AND SHRUB PROTECTION

A. General: Carefully protect all existing shrubs and trees designated to remain during the course of the Work of this Contract.

1. Comply with all requirements of section 02122: Tree Protection and

Trimming. 1.9 KEEPING ROADS AND STREETS CLEAN

A. Vehicle Wash Down: Establish a wash down area (stone construction exit) as indicated on the drawings. All vehicles leaving the site are to use this facility to prevent soil or other debris from being distributed on the roads/streets outside of the project site. The wash down area must be cleaned/refurbished as required to maintain its effectiveness at providing a soil free surface for complete vehicle wash off.

B. Debris left on roads and streets outside the Zoo must be cleaned by the Contractor immediately upon discovery.

C. Concrete washout pit: located next to the wash down area, all washout of concrete trucks and equipment must occur in this location.

1.10 PENALTIES

A. General: Contractor shall be aware that the Owner will assess a fine of $1000.00 (One Thousand Dollars) plus the cost to repair any damages resulting from the violation. This penalty will be assessed for each and every violation of the following list of required items. Charges will be assessed on a per occurrence, per day basis.

1. Starting work without specified construction fence. 2. Storage of materials outside of the staging area or limit of work line. 3. Parking outside of the designated areas. 4. Leaving the access gate open and unattended. 5. Access fence or gate to Zoo not dog tight (does not apply to Owner supplied

gate).



6. Exceeding speed limit within zoo. 7. Contractor found in animal area without Zoo personnel escort. 8. Concrete truck or equipment washout outside of designated area. 9. Soil or debris distributed on roads/streets outside of the project site. 10. Note penalties listed in Section 02122. 11. Failure to completely clean up the staging and surrounding area within thirty

(30) days after substantial completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END SECTION 01150


ALTERNATES 01230 - 1

SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 01230 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Bid Alternate No. 1: Add to all exterior fencing additional mesh dig out barrier see drawings. Base bid will include fencing.

B. Bid Alternate No. 2: Add two (2) okapi suites to okapi nighthouse as shown on the drawings, including foundation, mechanical and electrical work. Base bid is leaving the existing vegetation in place.

C. Bid Alternate No. 3: Add two (2) okapi suites to okapi nighthouse as shown on the drawings, including foundation, mechanical and electrical work. Base bid is leaving the existing vegetation in place.



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices. 2. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions or Field Order authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.



B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or a form acceptable to the Architect and Owner.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Owners Change Order Form.

REQUESTS FOR “EXTRA’S” OR OTHER ADDITIONAL PAYMENTS OVER AND ABOVE THE CURRENT CONTRACT SUM WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED WITHOUT THE PRIOR, WRITTEN APPROVAL OF BOTH THE OWNER AND THE ARCHITECT.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. The Owner’s testing laboratory shall make measurements and determine quantities of work-in-place that involves use of established unit price .

C. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES


UNIT PRICES 01270 - 2

A. Unit Price No. 1: Add / deduct for each cubic yard of unsuitable subgrade material removed. See section 02300. Contractor to include 1000 cubic yards in his base bid price.

B. Unit Price No. 2: Add / deduct for each cubic yard of borrow material fill installed as specified in place and compacted. See section 02300. Contractor to include 1000 cubic yards in his base bid price.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices.

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than twenty one days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.



1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. See example at the end of this section. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Subdivide line items by area of work (i.e. each building, exhibit area and site location) Include one separate line item under principal subcontracts called Project Closeout which will include the following tasks - operation and maintenance manuals completion, punch list activities, Project Record Documents completion, and demonstration and training, the value shall be proportional to that sub contractors closeout responsibilities.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.



1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect, Engineer and Owners Representative as a rough draft before the scheduled monthly meeting (usually during the first or last week of the month) the draft will be reviewed on site and the Contractor will be instructed to make any adjustments and then submit the notorized copies for certification. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Payment Application Forms: Use Form supplied by the Owner as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

2. Each Application for Payment must be accompanied by a progress record drawings when appropriate, see “Closeout Procedures”.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Initial progress report. 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 11. Performance and payment bonds.



H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.



An excerpt from an example pay application is attached after this page.


CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

2 O

F 13

PA

GE

S

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:C

ontra

ctor

's si

gned

cer

tific

atio

n is

atta

ched

.A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N D

ATE

:In

tabu

latio

ns b

elow

, am

ount

s are

stat

ed to

the

near

est d

olla

r.PE

RIO

D T

O:

Use

Col

umn

I on

Con

tract

s whe

re v

aria

ble

reta

inag

e fo

r lin

e ite

ms m

ay a

pply

.A

RC

HIT

ECT'

S PR

OJE

CT

NO

:A

BC

DE

FG

HI

ITEM

DES

CR

IPTI

ON

OF

WO

RK

SCH

EDU

LED

WO

RK

CO

MPL

ETED

MA

TER

IALS

TOTA

L%

BA

LAN

CE

RET

AIN

AG

EN

O.

VA

LUE

FRO

M P

REV

IOU

STH

IS P

ERIO

DPR

ESEN

TLY

CO

MPL

ETED

(G ÷

C)

TO F

INIS

H(IF

VA

RIA

BLE

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

STO

RED

AN

D S

TOR

ED(C

- G

)R

ATE

)(D

+ E

)(N

OT

INTO

DA

TED

OR

E)

(D+E

+F)

1G

ener

al C

ondi

tions

2In

sura

nce

3B

onds

4Pe

rmits

5M

obili

zatio

n6

Supe

rvis

ion

7La

y-ou

t8

Phot

ogra

phs

9Te

mpo

rary

Fac

ilitie

s & C

ontro

ls10

Hau

ling

11C

lean

Up

(Pro

gres

sive

)12

Cle

an U

p (F

inal

)13

Cem

rock

Pre

-Con

stru

ctio

n C

osts

14C

emro

ck M

obili

zatio

n15

Lod

ge15

Lod

ge16

Term

ite C

ontro

l17

Con

cret

e Fo

rmw

ork

18C

oncr

ete

Rei

nfor

cem

ent

19C

ast I

n Pl

ace

Con

cret

e20

Nat

ural

istic

Con

cret

e Fo

rmat

ions

21U

nit M

ason

ry22

Stru

ctur

al S

teel

23St

eel J

oist

s24

Stee

l Dec

k25

Met

al F

abric

atio

ns &

Sta

irs26

Pipe

& T

ube

Rai

lings

27R

ough

Car

pent

ry28

Hea

vy T

imbe

r Con

stru

ctio

n29

Shea

thin

g30

Exte

rior A

rchi

tect

ural

Woo

d W

ork

31In

terio

r Arc

hite

ctur

al W

ood

Wor

k32

Cab

inet

s & C

ount

erto

ps33

Plas

tic P

anel

ing

34El

asto

mer

ic S

heet

Wat

erpr

oofin

gU

sers

may

obt

ain

valid

atio

n of

this

doc

umen

t by

requ

estin

g of

the

licen

se a

com

plet

ed A

IA D

ocum

ent D

401

- Cer

tific

atio

n of

Doc

umen

t's A

uthe

ntic

it y

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

3 O

F 13

PA

GE

S

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:#REF!

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

DA

TE:

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re st

ated

to th

e ne

ares

t dol

lar.

PER

IOD

TO

:U

se C

olum

n I o

n C

ontra

cts w

here

var

iabl

e re

tain

age

for l

ine

item

s may

app

ly.

AR

CH

ITEC

T'S

PRO

JEC

T N

O:

AB

CD

EF

GH

IIT

EMD

ESC

RIP

TIO

N O

F W

OR

KSC

HED

ULE

DW

OR

K C

OM

PLET

EDM

ATE

RIA

LSTO

TAL

%B

ALA

NC

ER

ETA

INA

GE

NO

.V

ALU

EFR

OM

PR

EVIO

US

THIS

PER

IOD

PRES

ENTL

YC

OM

PLET

ED(G

÷ C

)TO

FIN

ISH

(IF V

AR

IAB

LEA

PPLI

CA

TIO

NST

OR

EDA

ND

STO

RED

(C -

G)

RA

TE)

(D +

E)

(NO

T IN

TO D

ATE

D O

R E

)(D

+E+F

)35

Cry

stal

line

Wat

erpr

oofin

g36

Traf

fic C

oatin

gs37

E.I.F

.S.

38Sh

akes

39R

oofin

g40

Shee

t Met

al F

lash

ing

& T

rim41

Join

t Sea

lant

s42

Stai

ned

Con

cete

Flo

ors

43St

eel D

oors

& F

ram

es44

Plas

tic D

oors

45Fl

ush

Woo

d D

oors

46Ex

terio

r Woo

d W

indo

ws &

Doo

rs47

Doo

r Har

dwar

e48

Gla

zing

49G

ypsu

mB

oard

Ass

embl

ies

49G

ypsu

m B

oard

Ass

embl

ies

50C

eram

ic T

ile51

Aco

ustic

al P

anel

Cei

lings

52W

ood

Floo

ring

53R

esili

ent T

ile F

loor

ing

54Pa

intin

g55

Woo

d St

ains

56Fl

oor S

eale

r57

Spec

ial C

oatin

gs58

Alu

min

um F

lags

& S

teel

Pol

es59

Fire

Pla

ce C

ap60

Vis

ual D

ispl

ay B

oard

s61

Toile

t Com

partm

ents

62Si

gns

63Lo

cker

s64

Fire

Pro

tect

ion

Spec

ialti

es65

Toile

t & B

ath

Acc

esso

ries

66M

isce

llane

ous S

peci

altie

s67

Fire

Sup

pres

sion

Spr

inkl

ers

68El

evat

or E

ngin

eerin

g/Sh

op D

rwng

s.U

sers

may

obt

ain

valid

atio

n of

this

doc

umen

t by

requ

estin

g of

the

licen

se a

com

plet

ed A

IA D

ocum

ent D

401

- Cer

tific

atio

n of

Doc

umen

t's A

uthe

ntic

it y

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

4 O

F 13

PA

GE

S

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:#REF!

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

DA

TE:

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re st

ated

to th

e ne

ares

t dol

lar.

PER

IOD

TO

:U

se C

olum

n I o

n C

ontra

cts w

here

var

iabl

e re

tain

age

for l

ine

item

s may

app

ly.

AR

CH

ITEC

T'S

PRO

JEC

T N

O:

AB

CD

EF

GH

IIT

EMD

ESC

RIP

TIO

N O

F W

OR

KSC

HED

ULE

DW

OR

K C

OM

PLET

EDM

ATE

RIA

LSTO

TAL

%B

ALA

NC

ER

ETA

INA

GE

NO

.V

ALU

EFR

OM

PR

EVIO

US

THIS

PER

IOD

PRES

ENTL

YC

OM

PLET

ED(G

÷ C

)TO

FIN

ISH

(IF V

AR

IAB

LEA

PPLI

CA

TIO

NST

OR

EDA

ND

STO

RED

(C -

G)

RA

TE)

(D +

E)

(NO

T IN

TO D

ATE

D O

R E

)(D

+E+F

)69

Elev

ator

Equ

ipm

ent &

Inst

alla

tion

70Pl

umbi

ng71

Mob

iliza

tion

& P

erm

its72

Dom

estic

Wat

er S

yste

m73

Sani

tary

Was

te S

yste

m74

Plum

bing

Fix

ture

s75

Wat

er H

eate

rs76 77

HV

AC

78Eq

uipm

ent

79D

uct/A

ir D

istri

butio

n80

Insu

latio

n81

Pipi

ng82

Con

trols

83Te

st&

Bal

ance

83Te

st &

Bal

ance

84 85E

lect

rica

l86

Mob

iliza

tion

& P

erm

its87

Rou

gh In

88Tr

im O

ut89

Pane

ls90

Fire

Ala

rm S

yste

m91 92

Gri

zzly

Exh

./Und

erw

ater

Vie

w93

Irrig

atio

n Sy

stem

s94

Land

scap

ing

95C

oncr

ete

Foun

datio

ns@

Roc

kwor

k96

Nat

ural

istic

Con

cret

e Fo

rmat

ions

97N

atur

alis

tic C

oncr

ete

Pavi

ng98

Met

al F

abric

atio

ns99

Cag

ing/

Fenc

e10

0R

ough

Car

pent

ry10

1G

lazi

ng10

2Pl

umbi

ngU

sers

may

obt

ain

valid

atio

n of

this

doc

umen

t by

requ

estin

g of

the

licen

se a

com

plet

ed A

IA D

ocum

ent D

401

- Cer

tific

atio

n of

Doc

umen

t's A

uthe

ntic

ity

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

5 O

F 13

PA

GE

S

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:#REF!

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

DA

TE:

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re st

ated

to th

e ne

ares

t dol

lar.

PER

IOD

TO

:U

se C

olum

n I o

n C

ontra

cts w

here

var

iabl

e re

tain

age

for l

ine

item

s may

app

ly.

AR

CH

ITEC

T'S

PRO

JEC

T N

O:

AB

CD

EF

GH

IIT

EMD

ESC

RIP

TIO

N O

F W

OR

KSC

HED

ULE

DW

OR

K C

OM

PLET

EDM

ATE

RIA

LSTO

TAL

%B

ALA

NC

ER

ETA

INA

GE

NO

.V

ALU

EFR

OM

PR

EVIO

US

THIS

PER

IOD

PRES

ENTL

YC

OM

PLET

ED(G

÷ C

)TO

FIN

ISH

(IF V

AR

IAB

LEA

PPLI

CA

TIO

NST

OR

EDA

ND

STO

RED

(C -

G)

RA

TE)

(D +

E)

(NO

T IN

TO D

ATE

D O

R E

)(D

+E+F

)10

3D

omes

tic W

ater

Sys

tem

104

Sani

tary

Was

te S

yste

m10

510

6G

rizz

ly N

ight

hous

e10

7Te

rmite

Con

trol

108

Con

cret

e Fo

rmw

ork

109

Con

cret

e R

einf

orce

men

t11

0C

ast I

n Pl

ace

Con

cret

e11

1U

nit M

ason

ry11

2M

etal

Fab

ricat

ions

113

Pipe

& T

ube

Rai

lings

114

Cag

ing/

Fenc

e11

5Sk

ylig

hts

116

Elas

tom

eric

She

et W

ater

proo

fing

117

Col

dFl

uid

App

lied

Wat

erpr

oofin

g11

7C

old

Flui

d A

pplie

d W

ater

proo

fing

118

Cry

stal

line

Wat

erpr

oofin

g11

9R

oofin

g/Sh

eet M

etal

Fla

shin

g/Tr

im12

0Jo

int S

eala

nts

121

Fibe

rgla

ss D

oors

, Fra

mes

& H

dwre

.12

2Sp

ecia

l Coa

tings

123

Res

inou

s Flo

orin

g12

4C

emen

titio

us C

oatin

gs12

5Pa

intin

g12

6Fl

oor S

eale

r12

7El

asto

mer

ic C

oatin

gs12

8Pl

umbi

ng12

9D

omes

tic W

ater

Sys

tem

130

Sani

tary

Was

te S

yste

m13

1Pl

umbi

ng F

ixtu

res

132

Wat

er H

eate

rs13

313

4H

VA

C13

5Eq

uipm

ent

136

Duc

t/Air

Dis

tribu

tion

Use

rs m

ay o

btai

n va

lidat

ion

of th

is d

ocum

ent b

y re

ques

ting

of th

e lic

ense

a c

ompl

eted

AIA

Doc

umen

t D40

1 - C

ertif

icat

ion

of D

ocum

ent's

Aut

hent

icit y

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

6 O

F 13

PA

GE

S

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:#REF!

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

DA

TE:

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re st

ated

to th

e ne

ares

t dol

lar.

PER

IOD

TO

:U

se C

olum

n I o

n C

ontra

cts w

here

var

iabl

e re

tain

age

for l

ine

item

s may

app

ly.

AR

CH

ITEC

T'S

PRO

JEC

T N

O:

AB

CD

EF

GH

IIT

EMD

ESC

RIP

TIO

N O

F W

OR

KSC

HED

ULE

DW

OR

K C

OM

PLET

EDM

ATE

RIA

LSTO

TAL

%B

ALA

NC

ER

ETA

INA

GE

NO

.V

ALU

EFR

OM

PR

EVIO

US

THIS

PER

IOD

PRES

ENTL

YC

OM

PLET

ED(G

÷ C

)TO

FIN

ISH

(IF V

AR

IAB

LEA

PPLI

CA

TIO

NST

OR

EDA

ND

STO

RED

(C -

G)

RA

TE)

(D +

E)

(NO

T IN

TO D

ATE

D O

R E

)(D

+E+F

)13

7In

sula

tion

138

Pipi

ng13

9C

ontro

ls14

0Te

st &

Bal

ance

141

142

Ele

ctri

cal

143

Rou

gh In

144

Trim

Out

145

Pane

ls14

6Fi

re A

larm

Sys

tem

147

148

149

Wol

f Exh

ibit

150

Irrig

atio

n Sy

stem

151

Land

scap

ing

151

Land

scap

ing

152

Con

cret

e Fo

unda

tions

@R

ockw

ork

153

Nat

ural

istic

Con

cret

e Fo

rmat

ions

154

Met

al F

abric

atio

ns15

515

6Pl

umbi

ng

157

Dom

estic

Wat

er S

yste

m15

8Sa

nita

ry W

aste

Sys

tem

159

160

161

Wol

f Nig

htho

use

162

Term

ite C

ontro

l16

3C

oncr

ete

Form

wor

k16

4C

oncr

ete

Rei

nfor

cem

ent

165

Cas

t In

Plac

e C

oncr

ete

166

Uni

t Mas

onry

167

Stru

ctur

al &

Mis

cella

neou

s Ste

el16

8C

agin

g/Fe

nce

169

Col

d Fl

uid

App

lied

Wat

erpr

oofin

g17

0Jo

int S

eala

nts

Use

rs m

ay o

btai

n va

lidat

ion

of th

is d

ocum

ent b

y re

ques

ting

of th

e lic

ense

a c

ompl

eted

AIA

Doc

umen

t D40

1 - C

ertif

icat

ion

of D

ocum

ent's

Aut

hent

icit y

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

7 O

F 13

PA

GE

S

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:#REF!

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

DA

TE:

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re st

ated

to th

e ne

ares

t dol

lar.

PER

IOD

TO

:U

se C

olum

n I o

n C

ontra

cts w

here

var

iabl

e re

tain

age

for l

ine

item

s may

app

ly.

AR

CH

ITEC

T'S

PRO

JEC

T N

O:

AB

CD

EF

GH

IIT

EMD

ESC

RIP

TIO

N O

F W

OR

KSC

HED

ULE

DW

OR

K C

OM

PLET

EDM

ATE

RIA

LSTO

TAL

%B

ALA

NC

ER

ETA

INA

GE

NO

.V

ALU

EFR

OM

PR

EVIO

US

THIS

PER

IOD

PRES

ENTL

YC

OM

PLET

ED(G

÷ C

)TO

FIN

ISH

(IF V

AR

IAB

LEA

PPLI

CA

TIO

NST

OR

EDA

ND

STO

RED

(C -

G)

RA

TE)

(D +

E)

(NO

T IN

TO D

ATE

D O

R E

)(D

+E+F

)17

1St

eel D

oors

, Fra

mes

& H

ardw

are

172

Fibe

rgla

ss D

oors

, Fra

mes

& H

dwre

.17

3R

esin

ous F

loor

ing

174

Spec

ial C

oatin

gs17

5Pa

intin

g17

6El

asto

mer

ic C

oatin

gs17

717

817

9Pl

umbi

ng18

0D

omes

tic W

ater

Sys

tem

181

Sani

tary

Was

te S

yste

m18

2Pl

umbi

ng F

ixtu

res

183

184

185

Ele

ctri

cal

185

Ele

ctri

cal

186

Rou

gh In

187

Trim

Out

188

Pane

ls18

9Fi

re A

larm

Sys

tem

190

191

192

Elk

Exh

ibit

193

Irrig

atio

n Sy

stem

s19

4La

ndsc

apin

g19

5N

atur

alis

tic C

oncr

ete

Form

atio

ns19

6M

etal

Fab

ricat

ions

& R

ailin

gs19

719

819

9Pl

umbi

ng20

0D

omes

tic W

ater

Sys

tem

201

Sani

tary

Was

te S

yste

m20

220

320

4U

sers

may

obt

ain

valid

atio

n of

this

doc

umen

t by

requ

estin

g of

the

licen

se a

com

plet

ed A

IA D

ocum

ent D

401

- Cer

tific

atio

n of

Doc

umen

t's A

uthe

ntic

ity

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EET

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

703

PA

GE

10

OF

13 P

AG

ES

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:C

ontra

ctor

's si

gned

cer

tific

atio

n is

atta

ched

.A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N D

ATE

:In

tabu

latio

ns b

elow

, am

ount

s are

stat

ed to

the

near

est d

olla

r.PE

RIO

D T

O:

Use

Col

umn

I on

Con

tract

s whe

re v

aria

ble

reta

inag

e fo

r lin

e ite

ms m

ay a

pply

.A

RC

HIT

ECT'

S PR

OJE

CT

NO

:A

BC

DE

FG

HI

ITEM

DES

CR

IPTI

ON

OF

WO

RK

SCH

EDU

LED

WO

RK

CO

MPL

ETED

MA

TER

IALS

TOTA

L%

BA

LAN

CE

RET

AIN

AG

EN

O.

VA

LUE

FRO

M P

REV

IOU

STH

IS P

ERIO

DPR

ESEN

TLY

CO

MPL

ETED

(G ÷

C)

TO F

INIS

H(IF

VA

RIA

BLE

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

STO

RED

AN

D S

TOR

ED(C

- G

)R

ATE

)(D

+ E

)(N

OT

INTO

DA

TED

OR

E)

(D+E

+F)

273

274

275

276

Gen

eral

Site

wor

k27

7D

emol

ition

278

Uns

uita

ble

Mat

eria

l Allo

wan

ce27

9Li

mes

tone

Allo

wan

ce28

0B

orro

wed

Fill

Mat

eria

l Allo

wan

ce28

1C

onst

ruct

ion

Entra

nce

282

Earth

wor

k28

3R

ubbl

e28

4Si

te C

lear

ing

285

Sele

ct &

Impe

rmea

ble

Fill

286

Eros

ion

Con

trol

287

Hot

wire

287

Hot

wire

288

Stor

m D

rain

age

& A

ppur

tena

nces

289

Asp

halt

Pavi

ng29

0Si

dew

alks

291

Irrig

atio

n Sy

stem

s29

2Fe

nces

& G

ates

293

Segm

enta

l Ret

aini

ng W

alls

294

Land

scap

ing

295

Exhi

bit M

esh,

Fur

nish

ing,

Fur

nitu

re29

6C

oncr

ete

Form

wor

k29

7C

oncr

ete

Rei

nfor

cing

298

Cas

t In

Plac

e C

oncr

ete

299

Con

cret

e Fo

unda

tions

@R

ockw

ork

300

Nat

ural

istic

Con

cret

e Fo

rmat

ions

301

Nat

ural

istic

Con

cret

e Pa

ving

302

Met

al F

abric

atio

ns30

3Tr

ench

Gra

te30

4R

ough

Car

pent

ry30

5Jo

int S

eala

nts

306

Pain

ting

Use

rs m

ay o

btai

n va

lidat

ion

of th

is d

ocum

ent b

y re

ques

ting

of th

e lic

ense

a c

ompl

eted

AIA

Doc

umen

t D40

1 - C

ertif

icat

ion

of D

ocum

ent's

Aut

hent

icit y

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

3 · C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FOR

G70

2 · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N.W

. WA

SH

ING

TON

, D.C

. 20

006-

5232

G70

3-19

92


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.



C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including qualifications/experience superintendent, project manager and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

2. The field superintendent that starts this project is required to remain on the project for its duration. Substitution is only allowed in the event of death or the owner requests that they be replaced. If this provision is not followed, the owner reserves the right to charge the contractor $20,000.00 (twenty thousand dollars) due to the additional work required by the owner and consultant.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.



B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. s. First aid. t. Security. u. Progress cleaning. v. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owners Representative of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems.



k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours.



10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.



1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly, use a Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Special reports.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing

meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction

photographs. 5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

C. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

D. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies.

1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.

F. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Limitations of continued occupancies. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Use of premises restrictions. d. Seasonal variations. e. Environmental control.

2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:



a. Submittals. b. Purchases. c. Mockups. d. Deliveries. e. Installation. f. Tests and inspections. g. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.5 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups.



16. Partial Completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized.

2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1

SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record

Documents at Project closeout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For photographer.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit one print of each photographic with Application for Payment.

1. Format: 4-by-6-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name of Architect. c. Name of Contractor. d. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction. f. Unique sequential identifier.

3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal

of prints on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.


A. Photographer Qualifications: Engaged a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows.

1.6 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

1.7 EXTRA PRINTS

A. Extra Prints: If requested by Architect, photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs. Photographer shall distribute these prints directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for extra prints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color, digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take twenty photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting

the Work. 3. Take eight photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately

record physical conditions at start of construction.



4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 24 color, digital photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum

1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

4. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.

5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports. 6. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 7. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 8. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals. 9. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will[ not] be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.



2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal from the date they are received by the Architect. Submittal will be returned to directly to the Contractor with a executed copy to the Architect .

a. Submittals from the following specification sections may be transmitted directly to the Architects consultants with one copy sent to the Architect: 1) Structural/civil sections –02300, 02455, 02456, 02510, 02530, 02740,

02750, 03300, 03410, 05120, 05400 and 06100. 2) Mechanical / plumbing sections – All Division 15. 3) Electrical – All Division 16.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 3.5 by 4.5 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals



shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken

and will be returned.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor unless prior permission is give by the Architect.

1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter.

3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Reviewed" or “Reviewed as Noted.”

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.



K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Review" or “Reviewed as Noted” taken by Architect.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. The Architect will give the contractor electronic copies of the Layout and Grading plans for the Contractor to use in laying out the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit ten copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Three

copies will be returned to the contractor. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.



b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches(215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches(750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit ten copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Three copies will be returned to the contractor. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.



E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.

F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copy.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.



F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

K. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load



diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section " Photographic Documentation."

V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit four copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design



professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. CONTRACTOR MUST REVIEW ALL SUBMITTALS BEFORE SENDING TO THE ARCHITECT NOT JUST PLACE HIS STAMP ON THEM, IF THE ARCHITECT RECEIVES A SUBMITTAL THAT HAS NOT BEEN REVIEWED BY THE CONTRACTOR HE WILL RETURN IT TO THE CONTRACTOR WITHOUT OUT ACTION.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal “Reviewed,” the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal “Reviewed as Corrected,” the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

3. Return for Resubmitted: When the Architect marks a submittal “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit,” do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.

4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked “Action Not Required.”



C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified job site quality control services. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.



D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.



B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering



services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.



2. Notify Architect twenty one days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made directly by the Owner. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.



E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Owner and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 01420 - 1

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.



C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials (202) 624-5800

www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878



www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372 www.aosaseed.com APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood

Systems

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org



ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering

Institute

(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers (800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205) 733-4077 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991



BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association

International)

www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000



www.csa-international.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Approvals FM Approvals (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772

www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850



www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155 www.internationalbadminton.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561



www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (972) 238-5591 www.intertek.com ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com



MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

(703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,

ext. 453 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000



www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522



(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America)

(703) 736-9666

www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil

Engineers

(See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.;



Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries

Alliance (703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488



www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers

Association) (212) 297-2109

www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door

Association) (847) 299-5200

www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of

California) (916) 372-9943

www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-

4100 www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (888) 422-



7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-

4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-

6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-

0543 SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov



NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-

2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-

0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-

1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-

1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus



(See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-

8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-

7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-

2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-

0080 www.access-board.gov

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home

Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (800) 952-

5210 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-

2041 CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-

6815 www.calregs.com CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-

2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov



TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458-

6650 Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice.tamu.edu





STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS 01453-1

SECTION 01453 – STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes required structural inspections for coordination by General Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: Contractor shall hire and pay for the services of a qualified Testing/Inspector firm to

perform inspections required by this contract as identified herein.

A. Forms and items to be submitted prior to commencing construction include subsections 3.2, 3.3, 3.8, and 3.9.

B. Forms and items to be submitted while construction is in process includes subsection 3.7.

C. Forms and items to be executed just prior to Substantial Completion includes subsection 3.4 and 3.5.



3.2 Confirmation of Requirements Project: Alliance for Sustainable Wildlife

Location: New Orleans, LA

Owner: Audubon Nature Institute

This Statement of Special Inspections encompasses the following discipline: Structural This Statement of Special Inspections is in accordance with the Special Inspection and Structural Testing requirements of the Building Code. It includes a schedule of Special Inspection services applicable to this project as well as the name of the Structural Special Inspection Coordinator (SSIC) and the identity of other approved agencies to be retained for conducting these inspections and tests. The Structural Special Inspection Coordinator (SSIC) shall be hired and paid for by the Contractor and shall keep records of all Structural inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Code Official (BCO) and the Structural Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge (SRDP), Kerwin Julien, Sr., PE. Discovered discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. The SSIC shall be responsible for such notifications. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Building Official and the Structural Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities to comply with the Contract Documents. Interim reports shall be submitted to the SRDP by the SSIC at intervals determined by the SSIC. A Final Report of Special Inspections documenting completion of all required Special Inspections, testing and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the SRDP and BCO, by the SSIC, prior to issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. Substantial Completion shall not be considered until the final report has been submitted. Job site safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Interim Report Frequency: Upon request of Building Official ________ or per attached schedule.

Prepared by:

Design Professional Seal

Kerwin Julien, Sr., PE (SRDP)

Signature Date

Owner’s Authorization:

Building Code Official’s Acceptance:

Signature Date Signature Date

I have read and understand all requirements for Special Inspections. SSIC: General Contractor: Print Signature Date Print Signature Date



3.3 List of Agents

Project: Alliance for Sustainable Wildlife


Owner: Audubon Nature Institute This Statement of Special Inspections encompass the following discipline: Structural

This form shall be completed and submitted by Contractor prior to commencing work.

(Note: Statement of Special Inspections for other disciplines besides structural may be included under a separate cover)

This Statement of Special Inspections / Quality Assurance Plan includes the following building systems:

Soils and Foundations Cast-in-Place Concrete Precast Concrete System Masonry Systems Structural Steel Wood Construction Special Cases

Special Inspection Agencies Individual Name, Firm Address, Telephone, Contact

Person, e-mail 1. STRUCTURAL Special Inspections Coordinator (SSIC)

2. Special Inspector (SI 1)

3. Special Inspector (SI 2)

4. Testing Agency (TA 1)

5. Testing Agency (TA 2)

6. Other (O1)

Note: The inspectors and testing agencies shall be engaged by the General Contractor. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the SRDP Building Official, prior to commencing work.



3.4 Final Report of Special Inspections (SSIC/SI 1) [To be completed by the Structural Special Inspections Coordinator (SSIC/SI 1). Note that all Agent’s Final Reports must be received prior to issuance.] Project: Alliance for Sustainable Wildlife


Owner: Audubon Nature Institute Owner’s Address: 6500 Magazine Street, New Orleans, LA 70118

Architect of Record: L. Azeo Torre, AIA Torre Design Consortium (name) (firm)

Structural Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge:

Kerwin Julien, Sr., PE Julien Engineering & Consulting, Inc. (name) (firm)

To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project, and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved. Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. This form shall be completed and submitted by Contractor.

Respectfully submitted,

Structural Special Inspection Coordinator

(Type or print name)

(Firm Name)

Signature Date Licensed SSIC Engineer Professional Seal



3.5 Special Inspector’s/Agent’s Final Report Project: Alliance for Sustainable Wildlife

Special Inspector or Agent:

(name) (firm)

Designation: This form shall be completed and submitted by each Special Inspector.

To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections or testing required for this project, and designated for this Inspector/Agent in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved.

Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Respectfully submitted,

Special Inspector or Agent:

(Type or print name)

Signature Date Licensed Professional Seal or

Certification Number



3.6 Qualifications of Inspectors and Testing Technicians The qualifications of all personnel performing Special Inspection and testing activities are subject to the approval of the Building Official. The credentials of all Inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided to the Special Inspector for their records. NOTE VERIFICATION THAT QUALIFIED INDIVIDUALS ARE AVAILABLE TO PERFORM STIPULATED TESTING AND/OR INSPECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED PRIOR TO SUBMITTING STATEMENT. Key for Minimum Qualifications of Inspection Agents: The individual performing a stipulated test or inspection have a specific certification, license or experience as indicated below, such requirement shall be listed below and shall be clearly identified within the schedule under the Agent Qualification Designation. PE/SE Structural Engineer – a licensed SE or PE specializing in the design of building structures PE/GE Geotechnical Engineer – a licensed PE specializing in soil mechanics and foundations EIT Engineer-In-Training – a graduate engineer who has passed the Fundamentals of Engineering

examination Experienced Testing Technician ETT Experienced Testing Technician – An Experienced Testing Technician with a minimum 5 years

experience with the stipulated test or inspection American Concrete Institute (ACI) Certification ACI-CFTT Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1 ACI-CCI Concrete Construction Inspector ACI-LTT Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade 1&2 ACI-STT Strength Testing Technician American Welding Society (AWS) Certification AWS-CWI Certified Welding Inspector AWS/AISC-SSI Certified Structural Steel Inspector American Society of Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT) Certification ASNT Non-Destructive Testing Technician – Level II or III. International Code Council (ICC) Certification ICC-SMSI Structural Masonry Special Inspector ICC-SWSI Structural Steel and Welding Special Inspector ICC-SFSI Spray-Applied Fireproofing Special Inspector ICC-PCSI Prestressed Concrete Special Inspector ICC-RCSI Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) NICET-CT Concrete Technician – Levels I, II, III & IV NICET-ST Soils Technician - Levels I, II, III & IV NICET-GET Geotechnical Engineering Technician - Levels I, II, III & IV Other



3.7 Structural Schedule of Special Inspections A. SOILS & FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION

VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION

IBC Section 1704.7, 1704.8, 1704.9

Y/N EXTENT: CONTINUOUS,

PERIODIC, SUBMITTAL, OR

NONE

COMMENTS AGENT AGENT QUALIFICATION

TASK COMPLETED

1. Verify existing soil conditions, fill placement and load bearing requirements

a. Prior to placement of prepared fill, determine that the site has been prepared in accordance with the contract documents.

P IBC 1704.7.1 PE/GE, EIT or ETT

b. During placement and compaction of fill material, verify material being used and maximum lift thickness comply.

P IBC 1704.7.2 PE/GE, EIT or ETT

c. Test in-place dry density of compacted fill. p IBC 1704.7.2 PE/GE, EIT or ETT

2. Pile foundations:

a. Observe and record procedures for static load testing of piles. C IBC 1704.8 PE/GE, EIT or ETT

b. Record installation of each pile and results of load test. Include cutoff and tip elevations of each pile relative to permanent reference.

C PE/GE, EIT or ETT

c. Verify pile materials, sizes, and lengths C IBC 1704.8 EIT or ETT

d. Verify placement locations and plumbness, confirm type and size of hammer, record number of blows per foot of penetration, determine required penetrations to achieve design capacity, record tip and butt elevations and document any damage.

C IBC 1704.8 EIT or ETT

3. Pier foundations: Verify installation of pier foundations for buildings assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F.

C IBC 1704.9 PE/GE, EIT or ETT

a. Verify pier diameter and length C PE/GE, EIT or ETT

b. Verify pier embedment P PE/GE, EIT or ETT c. Verify suitability of end bearing strata P PE/GE, EIT or ETT



B. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION


IBC Section 1704.4


PERIODIC, SUBMITTAL,

OR NONE

COMMENTS AGENT

AGENT QUALIFICATION

TASK COMPLETED

1. Inspection of reinforcing steel, including prestressing, tendons, and placement P ACI 318: 3.5,

7.1-7.7 PE/SE, EIT or ETT

2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding in accordance with Table 1704.3, Item 5B

Welding of Reinf Not Allowed

3. Inspect bolts and other embedment’s to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete where allowable loads have been increased

C IBC 1912.5 PE/SE, EIT or ETT

4. Verifying use of required design mix C ACI 318: Ch 4,

5.2-5.4 PE/SE or EIT

5. At time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength test, perform slump and air content test and temperature C

ASTM C 172ASTM C 31

ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8

ACI-CFTT or ACI-STT

6. Inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques C ACI 318: 5.9,

5.10 PE/SE or EIT

7. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques P ACI 318: 5.11-

5.13 PE/SE or EIT

8. Inspection of prestressed concrete

a. Application of prestressing forces C ACI 318: 18.20 PE/SE or EIT

b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons in the seismic force-resisting system

C ACI 318: 18.18.4 PE/SE or EIT

9. Erection of precast concrete members P ACI 318: Ch 16 PE/SE or EIT

10. Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in post tensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs

P ACI 318: 6.2 ACI-STT

11. Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete member being formed P ACI 318: 6.1.1 PE/SE or EIT



C. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION

IBC Section 1704.5

Y/N

EXTENT: CONTINUOUS,


OR NONE

COMMENTS

AGENT AGENT QUALIFICATION

TASK COMPLETED

1. From the beginning of masonry construction, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance:

a. Proportions of site-mixed mortar, grout andprestressing grout for bonded tendons. P ACI530.1, 2.6A PE/SE or EIT

b. Placement of masonry units and construction of mortar joints. P ACI530.1, 3.3B PE/SE, EIT or

ETT

c. Placement of reinforcement, connectors and anchorges. P ACI530, 1.12;

ACI530.1, 3.4, 3.6 A PE/SE, EIT or ETT

d. Grout space prior to grouting. C ACI530.1, 3.2D PE/SE, EIT or ETT

e. Placement of grout. C ACI530.1, 3.5 PE/SE, EIT or ETT

2. The inspection program shall verify:

a. Size and location of structural elements. P ACI530.1, 3.3G PE/SE or EIT b. Type, size and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction.

C ACI530, 1.2.2(e), 2.1.4, 3.1.6 PE/SE or EIT

c. Specified size, grade and type of reinforcement. P ACI530, 1.12;

ACI530.1, 2.4, 3.4 PE/SE, EIT or ETT

d. Welding of reinforcement. Welding of Reinf. Not Allowed

e. Protection of masonry during cold weather and (temperature below 40°F) or hot weather(temperature above 90°F).

P IBC 2104.3,

2104.4; ACI530.1, 1.8C, 1.8D

PE/SE, EIT or ETT

f. Application and measurement of prestressing force. P ACI530.1, 3.6B PE/SE or EIT

3. Preparation of any required grout specimens, mortar specimens and/or prisms shall be observed. C

IBC 2105.2.2, 2105.3; ACI 530.1,

1.4 PE/SE or EIT

4. Compliance with required inspection provisions of the construction documents and the approved submittals shall be verified.

P ACI530.1, 1.5 PE/SE or EIT

5. Prior to grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance:

a. Grout space is clean. P ACI530.1, 3.2D PE/SE or EIT b. Placement of reinforcement and connectors and pre-stressing tendons and anchorages. P ACI530, 1.13,

ACI530.1, 3.4 PE/SE or EIT

c. Proportions of site-prepared grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons. P ACI530.1, 2.6B PE/SE or EIT

d. Construction of mortar joints. P ACI530.1, 3.3B PE/SE or EIT 6. Grout placement shall be verified to ensure compliance with code and construction document provisions.

C ACI530.1, 3.5 PE/SE or EIT

a. Grouting of prestressing bonded tendons. C ACI530.1, 3.6C PE/SE or EIT



D. STEEL CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION

IBC Section 1704.3

Y/N

EXTENT: CONTINUOUS,

PERIODIC, SUBMITTAL, OR

NONE


TASK COMPLETED

1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and washers:

a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents.

S

Applicable ASTM

material specifications;

AISC 335, Section A3.4; AISC LRFD, Section A3.3

PE/SE or EIT

b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance required. S PE/SE or EIT

2. Inspection of high-strength bolting a. Bearing-type connections.

P AISC LRFD Section M2.5

IBC Sect 1704.3.3

AWS/AISC-SSI

b. Slip-critical connections. C or P

(method dependent) AWS/AISC-SSI

3. Material verification of structural steel (IBC Sect 1708.4):

a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents. P and S

ASTM A 6 or ASTM A 568

IBC Sect 1708.4

PE/SE or EIT

b. Manufacturers' certified mill test reports.

S

ASTM A 6 or ASTM A 568

IBC Sect 1708.4

PE/SE or EIT

4. Material verification of weld filler materials: a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification in the approved construction documents. P

AISC, ASD, Section A3.6;AISC LRFD, Section A3.5

PE/SE or EIT

b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance required. S PE/SE or EIT

5. Submit current AWS D1.1 welder certificate for all welders who will be welding on this project. S AWS D1.1 PE/SE or EIT

6. Inspection of welding (IBC 1704.3.1): a. Structural steel:

1) Complete and partial penetration groove welds. C

AWS D1.1

AWS-CWI 2) Multipass fillet welds. C AWS-CWI 3) Single-pass fillet welds> 5/16” C AWS-CWI 4) Single-pass fillet welds< 5/16” P AWS-CWI 5) Floor and deck welds. P AWS D1.3 AWS-CWI

b. Reinforcing steel (IBC Sect 1903.5.2): 1) Verification of weldability of reinforcing steel other than ASTM A706.

Welding of Reinf. Not Allowed

2) Reinforcing steel-resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames, and boundary elements of special reinforced concrete shear walls and shear reinforcement.

AWS-CWI

3) Shear reinforcement. AWS-CWI 4) Other reinforcing steel. AWS-CWI



7. Inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance (IBC Sect 1704.3.2) with approved construction documents:

a. Details such as bracing and stiffening. P

PE/SE or EIT b. Member locations. P PE/SE or EIT c. Application of joint details at each connection. P PE/SE or EIT

E. FABRICATION AND IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES – STRUCTURAL STEEL


IBC Section 1704.2



OR NONE


TASK COMPLETED

1. Fabrications Procedures: Review of fabricator’s written procedural and quality control manuals and periodic auditing of fabrication practices by an approved special inspection agency. At the completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building code official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents.

S Fabricator

shall submit qualifications

PE/SE or EIT

2. AISC Shop Certification S PE/SE or EIT 3. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the SRDP stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents.

S IBC 1704.2.2 PE/SE or EIT

F. FABRICATION AND IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES – WOOD TRUSSES


2006 IBC Section 1704.2



OR NONE


TASK COMPLETED

1. Fabrications Procedures: Review of fabricator’s written procedural and quality control manuals and periodic auditing of fabrication practices by an approved special inspection agency. At the completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building code official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents.

-OR-

S

Fabricator shall submit one of the

two qualificationsIBC 1704.2

PE/SE or EIT

2. TPI Inspection Program: Fabricator shall participate in the TPI Quality Assurance Inspection Program, and maintain a copy of the Quality Assurance Procedures Manual, QAP-90. Submit copy of certificate. All trusses shall bear the TPI Registered Mark.

3. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building code official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents

S IBC 1704.2 PE/SE or EIT



G. WOOD CONSTRUCTION


2006 IBC Section 1704.6



OR NONE


TASK COMPLETED

1. Fabrication of high-load diaphragms: High-load diaphragms designed in accordance with Table 2306.3.2 shall be installed with special inspections as indicated in Section 1704.1.

a. Verify wood structural panel sheathing for grade and thickness P IBC 1704.6 PE/SE or EIT

b. Verify the nominal size of framing members at adjoining panel edges P IBC 1704.6 PE/SE or EIT

b. Verify the nail or staple diameter and length P IBC 1704.6 PE/SE or EIT

b. Verify the number of fastener lines P IBC 1704.6 PE/SE or EIT

b. Verify the spacing between fasteners in each line and at edge margins P IBC 1704.6 PE/SE or EIT

2. Load Tests for Joist Hangers: Provide evidence of manufacturer’s load test in accordance with ASTM D1761 including the vertical load bearing capacity, torsional moment capacity, and deflection characteristics when there is no calculated procedure recognized by the code.

S IBC 1715

[submit ICBO reports]

PE/SE or EIT



3.8 Quality Assurance Plan – Seismic and Wind QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR WIND RESISTANCE CHECK LIST [IBC 1706] Wind Exposure Category

C

REQ

UIR

ED

NO

T R

EQU

IRED

N

OT

APP

LIC

AB

LE

QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN REQUIREMENTS (A Quality Assurance Plan is required where indicated below)

In wind exposure Categories A and B, where the 3-second-gust basic wind speed is 120 miles per hour (mph) (52.8 m/sec) or greater.

In wind exposure Categories C and D, where the 3-second-gust basic wind speed is 110 mph (49 m/sec) or greater.

SSIC:

Building Code Official’s Acceptance:

Signature Date Signature Date



3.9 Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility

Each contractor and subcontractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a system or component designated in the Quality Assurance Plan must submit a separate Statement of Responsibility. The Statement of Responsibility is required for Seismic Design Category C or higher. Make additional copies of this form as required. Project: Alliance for Sustainable Wildlife Contractor’s Name: Address: License No.: Description of designated building systems and components included in the Statement of Responsibility: Contractor’s Acknowledgment of Special Requirements I hereby acknowledge that I have received, read, and understand the Quality Assurance Plan and Special Inspection program. I hereby acknowledge that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the construction documents approved by the Building Official. ________________________________ _______________ Signature Date Contractor’s Provisions for Quality Control Procedures for exercising control within the contractor’s organization, the method and frequency of reporting and the distribution of reports is attached to this Statement. Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) in the organization are attached to this Statement.

END OF SECTION


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity

requirements for products in those Sections. 5. Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for pest control. 6. Division 2 Section "Flexible Pavement" for construction and maintenance of asphalt

paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 7. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of

cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Owner’s Representative Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.



D. Responsible Usage: The Contractor must use the Owner provided water and electrical power wisely and avoid wasteful activities. If the Owner determines that the Contractor is not being responsible in his use of these items, he shall give the contractor 3 warnings before the Contractor shall be required to provide his own water and power.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving."

B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch(50-mm), 0.148-inch-(3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet(1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-(60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-(73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-(42-mm-) OD top rails.

C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch(50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet(1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-(60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-(73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-(42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.

D. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.



B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-(1.2-m-) square tack board.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F(20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc(215 lx) at desk

height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.



3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office.



g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial

Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."



C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming."

F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

G. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

H. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. Where the fence becomes part of the Zoo’s perimeter fence separating the Zoo from non-zoo areas or where the construction gate will not be kept closed, the fence must be kept “dog tight” meaning it shall keep a dog from going under or through the fence and into the zoo. Dogs in the zoo are very dangerous to the animals.

1. Extent of Fence: Along Limit of Work line as indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.

I. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

J. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.



B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.


1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 14 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Letter of acceptance. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.




A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.



1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the



specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when all of the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 9. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

C. Additional Conditions: The Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If none the



following conditions are satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction, and the requested substitution can be approved.

3. The request is directly related to an “or-equal” clause or similar language in the Contract Documents.

4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

5. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractors failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

D. The Contractor’s submittal and the Architect’s acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.




EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction Layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and

patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to



other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points



promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet(2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended

ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.



3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.



B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION


CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.




A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. 10. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety..

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

D. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations.



5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

END OF SECTION


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives.

3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, , damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.



8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.



1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order by exhibit and building, starting with exterior areas first.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.



q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1


SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents

of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit two set(s) of copies of marked-up Record Transparencies. Architect and Engineers will provide comments and note whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: Submit three set(s) of copies of marked-up Record Transparencies, one set of Record Transparencies and 3 CD’s each containing PDF’s of all record drawings.

1) Electronic Media: CD-R.

B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Transparencies: At the beginning of construction print a set of 3 mil Mylar transparencies to be used throughout the construction period to record changes made during construction

1. Preparation: Mark Transparencies to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record transparencies.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

7. Progress Record Drawings - Contractor is to submit, with each application for payment, a set of prints of record drawings that have changed since the last submittal. The Architect will review progress record drawings for content before the application for payment is certified. Approval of application will be withheld until said drawings are submitted and reviewed.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.



1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.



2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, systems and

equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for

operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance

manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for

operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch(215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.



2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch(215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Operating standards. 3. Operating procedures. 4. Operating logs. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Control diagrams. 7. Piped system diagrams. 8. Precautions against improper use. 9. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.



D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.



C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.



1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 02105 - 1

SECTION 02105 - STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Construction and maintenance of erosion control and management control features.


A. The Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan includes: 1. Certification of Compliance 2. LPDES Notice of Intent (NOI) 3. Erosion and Sediment Controls 4. Other Controls 5. Stormwater Management Controls 6. Inspection and Maintenance of Controls 7. Records of Construction Activities 8. LPDES Notice of Termination (NOT)

B. SUBMITTALS

1. LPDES Notice of Intent (NOI) shall be filled by each Owner and the Contractor prior to beginning the Work.

2. LPDES Notice of Termination (NOT) shall be filed by each Owner and the Contractor at final acceptance of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner necessary information and documentation for the Owner’s submittal.

3. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) based on most recent revision EPA template shall be prepared by the Contractor. SWPPP to include all elements required to comply with EPA requirements including, but not limited to: erosion control BMP’s, materials handling BMP’s, plan indicating location of BMP’s, inspection schedule and forms, etc.

1.3 MATERIAL

A. Erosion and Sediment Controls:

1. Temporary Seeding: Temporary seeding shall be in accordance with Section 02920 “Lawns and Grasses.”

2. Fertilizer: Fertilizer shall be in accordance with Section 02920 “Lawns and Grasses.” 3. Mulch: Mulch shall be in accordance with Section 1018.19 of the Louisiana Standard

Specification for Roads and Bridges, 2000 Edition. 4. Silt Fencing: Silt Fencing shall be in accordance with Section 204.03(e) of the Louisiana

Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 2000 Edition. 5. Sand Bags: Bags shall be woven polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide fabric,

minimum unit weight of 4oz. per square yard, mullen burst strength exceeding 300psi in conformance with the requirements in ASTM designation D3786, and ultra violet stability exceeding 70% in conformance with the requirements in ASTM designation D4355. Use of Burlap is not acceptable. Each sand bag shall have a length of 18in., width of 12in., thickness of 3in. and mass of approximately 33lb. Bag dimensions are nominal, and may vary based on locally available materials. Submit alternate bag size to Engineer for approval prior to use. Fill material to be pumped river sand.



B. Other Controls 1. Stabilized Construction Entrance: Stabilized construction entrance shall be of limestone

material conforming to Section 1003.04 (e) of the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 2000 Edition.

1.4 INSTALLATION

A. Erosion and Sediment Controls:

1. Temporary seeding (and mulching where required) of all disturbed areas, silt fencing and check dams as indicated. These measures are to be used for erosion and sediment controls throughout the time of demolition and construction. Temporary seeding and fertilizer shall be executed in accordance with Section 02920 “Lawns and Grasses.” Silt fencing and check dams shall be executed in accordance with Section 207.07 of the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 2000 Edition. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Silt fencing shall be required at the perimeter of the property, along all apparent right-of-ways as indicated in the Drawings.

2. Controls shall be constructed and the stabilization measures applied in the order indicated on the Drawing. Construction of controls and stabilization measures shall be by personnel experienced and/or adequately trained in this type of installation.

B. Other Controls: 1. In addition to erosion and sediment controls, the Contractor shall be responsible in

addressing other potential pollutant sources on the demolition and construction site, which may include compliance with applicable State and City waste disposal, control of offsite vehicle tracking, and control of dust generated by construction activities. A stabilized construction entrance shall be installed at all entrance and exit points of debris hauling and equipment transport.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all temporary drainage conditions during construction of the Project. Temporary drainage ditches and swales and, in particular, Sedimentation Basins, shall be provided during construction – as required by the phases and means and methods employed by the Contractor. At no time will the Contractor be allowed to drain directly on to streets or other rights-of-ways.

C. Inspection and Maintenance of Controls:

1. Contractor shall inspect controls every 7 days or within 24 hours of a storm of 0.5

inches in depth. All disturbed areas of the site, areas of material storage, and all of the erosion and sediment controls should be inspected. Controls must be in good operating conditions until the area they protect has been completely stabilized and the demolition activity is complete.

2. During each inspection, the contractor should complete the stabilization or structural measures and prepare an inspection report, noting any damages or deficiencies.

D. Record of Construction Activities:

1. Contractor shall keep records of the construction activities on-site. Records shall include, but not limited to:

a. All complete inspection reports. b. Dates of major construction and grading activities in all areas of the site. c. Dates of stabilization of all areas of the site.



2. A copy of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan must be kept at the construction site

from the time construction begins until the site is finally stabilized. 3. The Owner shall retain copies of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and all other

reports required by the permit, as well as all of the data used to complete the NOI for 3 years after the completion of final site stabilization.

E. Report Releases of Reportable Quantities: 1. Contractor shall have the responsibility to report spills of hazardous substances in

amounts that equal or exceed Reportable Quantity (RQ) levels in accordance with EPA regulations (40 CFR part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, or 40 CFR Part 302). If there is a RQ release during the construction period, the contractor must take the following minimum steps:

a. Notify the National Response Center immediately at (800) 424-8802. b. Submit a written description of the release to the EPA Regional Office providing the

date and circumstances of the release and the steps to be take to prevent another release.

1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection by General Contractor



EXCAVATING 02222 - 1

SECTION 02222 - EXCAVATING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES


1. Excavating. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements 2. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 3. Section 02240 – Dewatering 4. Section 02250 – Excavation Support and Protection

1.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Engage services of a registered Surveyor to establish control points for all excavation work. B. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. C. Establish physical reference stakes locating boundaries and depths of excavations.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of excavation is as required to remove material encountered to elevations implied and subsequent disposal of materials removed.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform excavation in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Barricade open excavations occurring as a part of this work and post safety devices including warning lights.

B. Operate safety devices as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral

movement, undermining, washout and other hazards. D. For trees remaining, maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap.

Paint root cuts of 1” diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain from damage. C. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. D. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs

from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.2 EXCAVATING A. Provide shoring and underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavating work. B. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of

character of materials and obstructions encountered. C. Should uncharted or incorrectly chartered piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,

consult utility company immediately for directions and notify Engineer within 24 hours. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

D. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner, or others, except

when permitted in writing, by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

E. Excavate subsoil to accommodate slabs-on-grade, paving and site structures. F. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity;

perform compaction in accordance with Section 02223. G. If possible, slope banks and install with machine to angle of repose or less until shored. Otherwise

design, provide and install an excavation support system as necessary. H. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. I. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation, and

provide and operate pumps necessary to water excavation. J. Hand trim excavation as required. Remove loose matter. K. Remove lumped subsoil and rocks. L. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub grade elevations or

dimensions without specific direction of Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at Contractor’s expense.

1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending

indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Engineer.



2. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

M. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required sub grade elevations, notify

Engineer who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required sub grade elevations, carry

excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Engineer. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of

contract conditions relative to changes in work. N. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances

having jurisdiction. Shore and brace were sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

1. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. O. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,

stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable conditions.

1. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

P. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials were directed, until required for backfill

or fill. Place grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Q. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations

and grades as shown. R. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be

installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide at least 9” to 12” clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.

1. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to

establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. 2. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid

freeze-ups. 3. For pipes or conduit 5” or less in nominal size and for flat-bottomed multiple-duct conduit units,

do not excavate beyond depth indicated for base of bedding. Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.

4. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made to verify firmness and proper compaction or tamping of existing soil and that there is no standing water present. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

5. Excavations more than 5 feet deep shall have shoring as designed by a registered Professional Engineer hired and paid for by the contractor. See Section 312320.

6. Excavations more than 4 feet deep must have temporary ladders every 25 feet along horizontal travel of trench.

S. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until

notified to resume work. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements



B. Provide for visual inspection of surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing and developing standing water.



BACKFILLING 02223 - 1

SECTION 02223 - BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Fill and backfill. 2. Preparation of subbbase. 3. Compaction of subbase material


1. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements 2. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

3. Section 02222 - Excavating

1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Contractor to submit information on proposed borrow source for backfill material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill Type: Mississippi River “pumped sand”, AASHTO A-4 or better having a maximum liquid

limit of 25 and a maximum plasticity index of 6. B. All sands shall be free of trash, weeds, lumps, humus, pieces of wood or any other deleterious

material. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that area is free of debris, snow, ice, and water, and ground surfaces are not frozen. B. Verify area is properly graded.


BACKFILLING 02223 - 2

3.2 PREPARATION A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with river sand and

compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Scarify subgrade surface to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater

than requirements for subsequent fill material.

3.3 BACKFILLING A. Place select fill material in lifts no greater than 6 inches, and compact to 95% of the maximum

dry density at optimum moisture in accordance with ASTM D698. Finished subbase should be established to the lines and grades shown on the drawings.

3.4 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus ¼ inch.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements: Field inspection and testing shall be performed by a

qualified company selected and paid for by the Contractor. 1. Test for backfill compaction every lift at least once at every 30 linear feet of utility trench.

2. Test each excavation once per lift for at least every 1200 square feet in all other areas but no less than two tests per lift in any separate area.

B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698.

C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, recompact, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

D. Contractor to coordinate prior notification to Testing Firm and Engineer before proceeding with

subsequent work. END OF SECTION 02223


SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1

SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing plants to remain. 2. Removing existing plants. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.


1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements.

3. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" for protecting trees remaining on-site that are affected by site operations.

4. Division 2 Section "Excavation" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches(50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Excavation".

1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected

and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified

asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.



2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.

3.4 UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18

inches(450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of on-site in the location directed by the Owner.

B. Fence clearing - remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new fence.

1. Try and work around trees that are 6” or larger. 2. Use a Forestry cutter attachment on clearing equipment to cut and chip vegetation and

small trees in place as part of the clearing operation. 3. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of on-site in the location directed by the Owner.

C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches(200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.



3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches(1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

3.8 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.



DEWATERING 02240 - 1

SECTION 02240 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INLCUDES


1. Construction dewatering and maintenance.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Section 02222 – Excavating

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain

dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control surface water and subsurface hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. This also includes measures to prevent standing water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers, headers, filters, pumps, power units, discharge lines, piezometers, and flow-measuring devices; and means of discharge, control of sediment, and disposal of water.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dewatering system indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent

existing buildings, structures, and site improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.


DEWATERING 02240 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water. B. Monitor dewatering systems continuously. C. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, during dewatering

operations. D. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump

equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls.

1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering. 2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.

E. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.

F. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation,

construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability.

G. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations,

drains, sewers, and other excavations. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of excavation.

H. Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.



EXCAVATING SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02250 - 1

SECTION 02250 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for recording preexisting conditions and excavation support and protection system progress.

2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities.

3. Section 02240 – Dewatering.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads.

1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings,

structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 4. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified land surveyor and professional engineer.

D. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.

2. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.

a. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.




A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Geotechnical report.

b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions.

c. Proposed excavations.

d. Proposed equipment.

e. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system.

f. Working area location and stability.

g. Coordination with waterproofing.

h. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's written permission.

B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection.

2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.

C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks.

1. Corners: Roll-formed corner shape with continuous interlock.

D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application.

E. Shotcrete: Comply with Division 3 Section "Shotcrete" for shotcrete materials and mixes, reinforcement, and shotcrete application.

F. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

H. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M or steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.

D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.

E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems.



3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING

A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.

3.3 SHEET PILING

A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Install water and bracing as required.

Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.

3.4 BRACING

A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless otherwise approved by Architect.

2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until

permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.

3.5 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.

1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlaying construction and abandon remainder.

2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Division 31 Section "Backfilling."

3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.

B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.



TRENCHING 02324 - 1

SECTION 02324 - TRENCHING PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes trench excavation, and backfilling for underground utilities. 1. Provide all necessary dewatering, sheeting and bracing. 2. Notify and coordinate with utility companies and Owner.


1. Section 02222 – Excavating. 2. Section 02223 – Backfilling. 3. Section 02230 – Site Clearing. 4. Section 02514 – Water Distribution System. 5. Section 02530 – Sanitary Sewerage Systems. 6. Section 02720 – Site Storm Drainage Systems.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for any sheeting and bracing required for support of open trenches.

1. Sheeting and bracing drawings shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a

Professional Civil Engineer with current registration in the State of Louisiana hired and paid for by the Contractor.

2. Submit copies of the calculations supporting the design of the sheeting and bracing. 1.3 COORDINATION

A. Existing Utilities 1. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall contact and coordinate with the owners of

existing utilities and shall locate and identify all existing underground utility services within 15 feet of the proposed work.

a. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary excavation permits from the utility companies and government agencies.

2. In case water, gas lines, conduits, or other utilities become broken in the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall stop work and give immediate notice to the proper authorities and shall be responsible for any damage to persons or property caused by such breaks.

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred with making such breaks, at no cost to Owner.

b. The Contractor shall conduct CCTV sewer inspection of all existing sanitary sewerage and storm drainage lines that are to remain as indicated in on the drawings and shall provide resulting written and videographic report to Engineer prior to commencing


TRENCHING 02324 - 2

work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Selected backfill as specified in Section 312323 shall be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify known underground utilities and stake and flag locations. Provide shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods as required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.

B. Provide dewatering equipment as required to maintain trench in stable and workable condition. C. Planning and Staging of Work 1. The excavation, dewatering and bracing shall be carried out in such a manner as to eliminate

any possibility of undermining or disturbing adjacent tracks which are, or may be in service, the foundations of any existing structures, or any work previously completed within the surrounding area.

3.2 TRENCHING

A. Excavation

1. Excavate soil required for installation of all types of underground cables and/or conduits. 2. Excavate trenches to a sufficient width to enable installation of required conduits.

3. Hand trim excavation and provide a finished trench free of loose matter.

a. Where excavation indicates that the subsurface materials, at the bottom of the trench are in a loose or soft state, the Contractor shall excavate to a depth where suitable material is encountered, or as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

b. Where the bottom of the trench has been excavated to a greater depth than required, the Contractor shall refill this area using specified bedding. No additional compensation shall be given to the Contractor. Refilling with excavated material to bring the bottom of the trench to the proper grade will not be permitted.

4. All excavated material shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. Excavated material meeting the requirements of the project specifications as backfill may be used upon approval from the Owner’s Representative.

5. Rocks, boulders and large stones shall be removed to provide a clearance of at least 6 inches below and on each side of all conduits.

a. Refill area with approved bedding as specified in subparagraph 3.2.A.3.b. above.

6. Grade top perimeter of trenches to prevent surface water run-off into excavation. 7. Excavating machinery and equipment shall be operated with care to prevent damages to


TRENCHING 02324 - 3

existing utilities. 8. Excavating for trenches, such as crossings or in an area where electrical or power cables

may be buried, shall be done cautiously by hand digging. Excavating machinery shall not be used in these areas.

9. Where trenches are to be dug in ballasted areas, carefully remove the ballast from the location and discard it before trenching. Spread a polyethylene sheet or other suitable tarpaulin over the adjacent ballast so as to deposit the excavated earth without contaminating the ballast. Material removed during the opening of a trench in the track area shall not be piled higher than the top of rail.

B. Sheeting and Bracing

1. Sheeting and bracing shall be required for the following conditions:

a. Excavation within the influence line of any foundation, road beds, or pipe line (a line with

one vertical to one horizontal slope downward from the bottom of the outside faces of any footing, cross tie or pipe).

b. Potential for ground movement which could cause settlement of any adjacent structures, road beds, pipeline or utilities.

c. Trenches in unsuitable, loose or soft material 6 inches or more in-depth, where protection of employees is required.

2. Sheeting and bracing shall be constructed in accordance with approved requirements. 3. Remove sheeting and bracing as progress continues. 4. For excavations deeper than 4 feet, Contractor must provide, at no cost to the Owner, design

calculations and drawings stamped by a Louisiana Registered Professional Civil Engineer for excavation support, at least 10 working days prior to planned installation.

C. Dewatering

1. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient pumping equipment, dams, drains, ditches, flumes,

wells, well points, and other means for excluding and removing water from trenches and other points, and shall provide, at his own expense, satisfactory drainage whenever needed in the excavation during the progress of the work and its completion for final inspection. The Contractor shall provide at least one (1) pump for each trench opened in wet ground and at the same time shall have one (1) pump in reserve. No structures or conduits shall be laid in water, and water shall not be allowed to flow over or raise upon any concrete, masonry or conduits until the work has been inspected and the mortar or concrete has properly set.

D. Backfilling 1. Prior to placement of backfill, remove water and other debris from the top of the concrete

ductbank. 2. Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth and compacted by means

of an approved mechanical or hand tamping equipment. Each lift to be compacted and tested in accordance with Section 312323. Care shall be taken to compact backfill material under the buried cable, conduit or other construction.



TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1

SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Soil treatment with termiticide.


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure process.


A. Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For termiticide.

1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.

B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products.

D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.




A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" to schedule application of termiticide products.


A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Termiticides:

a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor. b. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75. c. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC]. d. Syngenta; Demon TC.



2.2 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.

1. Slabs-on-Grade : Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.



2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be

penetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.



TIMBER PILES 02455 - 1

SECTION 02455 - TIMBER PILES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INLCUDES

A. This Section includes timber piles. The work required under this section shall include all labor, materials, equipment, shop drawings, testing, and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to furnishing, delivering and installation of treated timber piles as shown on the drawings.

B. The embedment and location of piling shall be as shown on the drawings, or as described in these

specifications. C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements. 3. Section 02222 – Excavating.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D-25 Round Timber Piles. B. ASTM D-1143 Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations. C. 2009 International Building Code (with City of New Orleans Amendments) hereinafter referred to as

IBC or NOBC.


A. The current rules and practices set forth in the NOBC shall govern this work, except as otherwise noted on the drawings, or as otherwise specified.

B. Substitutions or modifications will not be permitted. C. Responsibility for Errors - The Contractor alone shall be responsible for all errors of locating and for

the correct driving of the piles.


A. Install piles to defined load supporting capacity as indicated on the drawings or otherwise specified herein.

B. Pile load testing shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. C. Vibration monitoring shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. D. Pile driving work shall take place at a time agreeable with so as not to disrupt activity at neighboring

property. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and come to an agreement for a specific time allowed for pile driving.



E. Contractor is solely responsible for coordinating access into the site with Owner. Access may be limited by existing site features such as fences, trees, paving and other obstructions. Contractor is responsible for temporary removal, subsequent replacement and any damage to existing site features. Repair and replacement shall be to the Owner’s satisfaction at the Contractor’s expense with no additional payment. Equivalent or better materials and workmanship shall be used for all replacements.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for all incidental permits and utilities necessary for execution of work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Material: Submit pile material information including pile types, diameters and treatment. Submit

certification from supplier that materials meet specifications. Submit inspection reports developed by Test Laboratory verifying that piles intended for delivery for this project have been inspected at the supplier’s plant and meet specification requirements.

B. Schedule: Before work is started, the Contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule of all pile driving

operations that shall indicate the sequence of the work and the date and time of start and completion of each part. The schedule shall be submitted for review.

C. Equipment: Submit complete information and data pertaining to the pile driving equipment, including

certification of the hammer, and details of the capblock and driving head for review before any equipment is delivered to the site. All driving equipment shall be subject to the Engineer’s review. If at any time, in the Engineer’s opinion, the Contractor’s driving equipment may not perform its intended task adequately, it shall be rejected and may not be used on this project. In such case, the Contractor will then be required to change equipment and resubmit necessary information to the Engineer at no additional cost.

D. As-Built Drawings: Submit as-built drawing indicating the precise as-driven location of each pile

including the cut-off elevation of each in NAVD-88 datum. This information shall be developed by a surveyor hired and paid for by the Contractor. This final AutoCAD file (.dwg) shall be submitted to the Engineer. The background of the drawing shall be the survey previously developed by the project surveyor which will be provided to the Contractor.

E. Pile-to-Pile Connectors: Pile connector design is not anticipated for this project and therefore does not

have to be submitted to the City and the Engineer by the Contractor for approval. F. Reporting: The following reports shall be submitted by the Testing Laboratory.

1. Pile material inspection report 2. Pile driving equipment inspection report 3. Pile driving logs 4. Vibration monitoring reports 5. Pile load test results 6. As-Built drawing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Treated Timber Piles: Timber piles shall be treated Douglas Fir or treated Southern Yellow Pine conforming to all respects of

ASTM D25, treated according to the latest revision of AWPA Standard C-3 using AWPA Standard P-2 Creosote-Coal Tar to obtain a minimum net retention of 12 pounds of treatment per cubic foot.



Alternatively, piles may be treated with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) with a minimum net retention of 0.8 pounds per cubic foot. Piles shall have a minimum tip diameter and a minimum butt diameter as indicated, measured three feet from the butt, and be driven to length or tip elevation as indicated herein.

Type: Class 5 treated timber poles, ASTM D25 quality Embedment: 40 ft. below existing grade Minimum Tip Diameter: 6 inches Minimum Butt Diameter: 8 inches Design Capacity: 6 tons (compression)

B. Only poles bearing the physical marking of the Testing Laboratory as meeting project specifications shall

be delivered to the site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY

A. Protection of Property: The Contractor shall investigate the conditions of existing paving, structures, sewers, utilities, and other property on and adjacent to the work site and shall take suitable precautions to protect such property from damage which could result from the piling work. Should damage occur due to Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged work to restore it to its original condition, or better, without additional cost to the Owner, Developer, Architect or Engineer.

1. Documentation: Videotape and photograph existing conditions of structures, finishes, equipment,

and adjacent improvements and document all conditions that might be construed as damage resulting form pile driving operations. File photos and videotape with Engineer before starting pile driving.

B. Notification: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Testing Laboratory at least two (2) working

days prior to driving initial pile.

C. Regulatory Agency: Contractor shall comply with and provide all notifications in accordance with the Building Code.

3.2 PILE LOAD TESTING

A. An approved independent testing laboratory shall perform all inspection and logging of piles and vibration monitoring in connection with this work. Only those piles bearing the mark of the inspecting agency shall be considered as meeting the requirements of these specifications.

3.3 TESTING

A. A single Testing Laboratory shall perform all inspection, testing and monitoring in connection with this work. Only those piles bearing the mark of the inspecting agency shall be considered as meeting the requirements of these specifications.

B. Two (2) probe piles shall be driven where indicated on the plans to confirm the driving resistance. Probe

piles shall not be a part of the permanent foundation.



C. Two (2) test piles shall be driven where indicated on the plans, along with necessary reaction piles. The test piles and reaction piles shall not be a part of the permanent foundation. At least four reaction piles shall be driven at each test pile and shall be sized by the Testing Laboratory. Test piles shall meet all of the requirements as the permanent piles. Test piles shall be driven and may not be installed by vibratory means.

D. The test piles shall be loaded to two (2) times the design load, in one (1) ton per hour increments, and

then left in place for at least 48 hours, the last 24 of which shall be free from settlement. Failure is defined as that load which produces a settlement or movement of the tip equal to ¼”. The movement of the tip shall be determined by actual measurement. The pile shall then be cut off 24 inches below grade and abandoned. Testing shall not begin until a minimum of twenty-one (21) days after installation of the reaction beam system.

E. Contractor shall provide and drive all piles and all incidental materials and equipment, with the exception

of the hydraulic jack. Contractor shall also provide and install all safety devices, as required, to prevent unauthorized individuals from entering the test area. The furnishing and installing of the hydraulic jack and the actual load testing shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory.

F. Reaction system shall consist of a steel beam attached to reaction piles and arranged to permit

application of test load by hydraulic jacking between beam and test pile. Reaction system shall withstand a test load equal to 3 times the pile design load with a safety factor of two (2). Following the load test, reaction system shall be removed by the Contractor; reaction piles shall be cut off 24 inches below grade and abandoned in place.

G. The Testing Laboratory shall supply and calibrate jacks required for testing, shall apply the test load, and

shall prepare and issue a report of the test pile program, including the plotting of required curves.

H. Load Test Evaluation

1. The Testing Laboratory shall interpret the results of the testing and provide a consolidated, detailed report including all inspection reports, logs, test data, as-built drawings, incidental information and conclusions.

2. Conclusions shall include the Testing Laboratory’s opinion of the maximum allowable compressive load that shall be verified for design.

3. The consolidated report shall be sealed and signed by the Testing Laboratory’s Louisiana registered Professional Civil Engineer.

3.4 LAYOUT AND LOGGING

A. Driving Records Driving records shall be kept by an Independent Testing Laboratory, selected by the Contractor,

and submitted on forms satisfactory to the Engineer. Data recorded shall include the following: 1. Project name and number. 2. Name of piling contractor. 3. Date of driving. 4. Pile number and location. 5. Tip elevation. 6. Top elevation before cutoff. 7. Top elevation after cutoff. 8. Blow count. 9. Final penetration blows. 10. Hammer characteristics:

a. Make and model.



b. Energy rating.

11. Type cushion or capblock. 12. Rebound observed. 13. Unusual occurrences during driving. 14. Type of pile splice connector.

Submit reports to Engineer regularly (daily) during pile driving. The Engineer shall have access to reports and records at all times.

B. All piles shall be driven within +2 inches of the butt centerline dimensions indicated on the

drawings.

C. On completion of driving, the Contractor shall mark centerline location of each pile on the “as-built” drawings and submit to the Engineer.

D. All pile driving records shall be submitted to Engineer immediately upon completion of project in

one bound submittal (2 copies).

3.5 DRIVING

A. The pile driving equipment shall be of sufficient capacity to drive the piles to the elevations indicated on the drawings without damage to the piles. For Class 5 piles, the hammer shall develop at least 7,500 ft-lbs of energy per blow but no more than 12,000 ft-lbs of energy per blow. An air or steam hammer shall be used. Drop hammers may not be used. Acceptable driving hammer is a Vulcan No. 2 or equivalent. Hammer selection must be submitted to Engineer for approval.

B. If, in driving the piles, a resistance is met which exceeds the prescribed number of blows, the

Contractor shall contact the Engineer for instructions. C. Fixed leads shall be required on all rigs. D. Jetting shall be prohibited. Use of a vibratory hammer is prohibited, except as noted. E. Pre-drilling may be required for piles within 20 feet of existing structures and major utilities. Pre-

drilling shall be to a depth of 5 feet below grade. Pre-drilling in this case may be substituted with usage of a vibratory hammer, only for the first 5 feet of penetration. Pre-drilling bit shall be no larger than 75% of the pile width.

F. When the point of refusal is reached, care shall be taken to avoid damaging the pile by overdriving.

Refusal shall be defined as 15 blows per foot. G. Any pile driven too far out of line, driven below the cut off elevation, or so injured in driving or

straightening as to impair its structural value as a pile under the conditions of use shall be pulled and replaced at the discretion of the Engineer.

H. Rejected piles shall be pulled or left in place as is, as directed by the Engineer and Contractor shall

drive additional piles to replace them where directed by the Engineer without additional compensation.

I. All pile cutoffs shall be disposed of off-site at the Contractor’s expense. J. Structure Protection: Adequate provision shall be made by the Contractor for protection of adjacent

structures on property while piles are being driven.



K. An elevation shall be taken on each pile as soon as it has been driven, and elevations shall again be taken on all piles after completion of driving. This information shall be included in the Testing Laboratory’s consolidated report. Any pile found to have heaved shall be redriven to the original elevation, or to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

L. Piles shall be driven plumb and accurately into positions shown on the drawings. A maximum

variation not exceeding three (3) inches in not more than 3% of the total number of piles in a cluster will be accepted as fulfillment, providing limiting and controlling conditions make it impossible to maintain more accurately the spacing indicated on the plans. Should the variations from true center exceed the above limits, the pile in each cluster shall be plotted and the center of gravity of said cluster determined. Sufficient piles shall then be added to locations determined by the Engineer to shift the center of gravity of the cluster to the true center as determined by the superimposed loads. Contractor shall, at his own expense, drive such additional piling as may be required to compensate for or, to rectify conditions brought about by failure to compensate for or, to rectify conditions brought about by failure to preserve proper spacing, whether this defect is discovered before or after cutting-off.

M. Any piles driven too low to permit proper cut-off must be corrected without extra charge. Any pile

which is damaged, deflected or broken, or any pile which cannot be driven to proper tip elevation because of underground obstructions, shall be immediately removed and replaced with an acceptable substitute pile at the locations determined by the Engineer. In the event that such removal should prove impossible, the defective pile shall be abandoned and a suitable pile shall be driven close to the unacceptable pile, where the Engineer directs. Contractor shall not receive any extra compensation for the necessary corrective measures.

3.6 REPLACEMENT AND MISSING PILES

A. Without additional compensation, Contractor shall provide and install all omitted and missing piles,

and for any additional piles required due to encountering unknown obstructions or breakage of piles at whatever stage of work discovered.



WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02514 - 1

SECTION 02514 -WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work covered by this Section consists of furnishing and installing water distribution pipes and appurtenances, including, but not limited to, reaction blocking, testing, and disinfection.


1. Section 02222 – Excavating. 2. Section 02223 – Backfilling. 3. Section 02230 – Site Clearing. 4. Section 02240 – Dewatering. 5. Section 02250 – Excavation Support and Protection. 6. Section 02324 – Trenching.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Annual Book Standards.

1. ASTM D 2122, Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings.

2. ASTM F 477, Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 3. ASTM B42 Seamless Copper Pipe. 4. ASTM B68 Seamless Copper Tube. 5. ASTM B75 Seamless Copper Tube 6. ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 7. ASTM D2239 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside

Diameter. 8. ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 9. ASTM D2447 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside

Diameter. 10. ASTM D2466 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 11. ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 12. ASTM D2609 Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic pipe.

13. ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.

14. ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and120. 15. ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and

Fittings. 16. ASTM D2683 Socket-Type Polyethylene Fillings for Outside Diameter-Controlled

Polyethylene Pipe. 17. ASTM D2729 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards.

1. AWWA C104, Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for

Water. 2. AWWA C110, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for

Water and other Liquids.



3. AWWA C111, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

4. AWWA C151, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or other Liquids.

5. AWWA C153, Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 24 in. and 54 in. through 64 in., for Water Service.

6. AWWA C509, Standard for Resilient – Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 7. AWWA C550, Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 8. AWWA C600, Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances. 9. AWWA C651, Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. 10. AWWA C900, Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in.,

for Water Distribution.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for safe unloading, storage and care of material furnished by or to him until it has been incorporated into work.

B. Unload pipe, fittings, or valves by lifting with hoists or skidding to avoid damage.

1. Pipe shall not be unloaded by rolling or dropping off trucks. 2. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on ground.

C. Unload material at site of work, near place where it will be placed in trench. 1. Materials shall be placed for least interference with traffic. 2. Provide signs, lights, and barricades as necessary to protect public.

D. Handle material carefully to prevent breakage and to avoid damage to coatings and linings.

1. Keep interior of pipe, fittings, and valves, free of dirt or foreign matter at all times. 2. Do not place materials in drainage ways or ditches.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

All materials used and come into contact with drinking water during its distribution shall not adversely affect drinking water quality and public health and must be certified for conformance with American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation Standard 61 (ANSI/NSF Standard 61).

2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Shall conform to latest requirements of AWWA C151. B. Shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104 standard thickness.

1. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall have push-on compression type joints conforming to AWWA C111 or AWWA C153 (Latest Editions).

2. Minimum pressure class shall be 350 psi.



C. Restrained Joints – DIP

1. Restrained joints shall be “Fast-Grip Gasket” by ACIPCO or “Field-Lok Gasket” by U. S. Pipe.

2. Joint preparation and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Retainer Glands for Restraint – DIP

1. Retainer gland restraints shall be “Mega-Lug 1100 Series” by EBBA Iron Sales, or approved equal.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE (PVC)

A. 2" Diameter and Smaller

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe 2" diameter and smaller shall conform to requirements of ASTM D-2241.

2. Pipe shall be pressure Class 315 (SDR 13.5). 3. PVC plastic extrusion compound shall meet requirements of ASTM D-1784 for Class

12454-B (PVC 1120). 4. Pipe and couplings shall bear National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratories, Inc.,

seal of approval for potable water use.

B. 4” to 8” Diameter

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe 4” and 8” diameter shall conform to requirement of ASTM D1785 and D2665 (where applicable).

2. Pipe shall be pressure class 3.5 (SDR 13.5) 3. PVC plastic extrusion compound shall meet requirements of ASTM D-1784 for Class

12454-B (PVC 1120). 4. Pipe and couplings shall bear National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratories, Inc.,

seal of approval for potable water use.

2.4 CAST AND DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS

A. Fittings for ductile iron pipe and PVC pipe shall be cast or ductile iron and shall conform to requirements of AWWA C110 or AWWA C153 and shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104 standard thickness.

B. Joints shall conform to AWWA C111. C. Fittings shall be mechanical joint unless otherwise specified on Drawings. D. Gaskets for PVC pipe shall be duct tip transition type compatible with type of pipe used.

2.5 RESTRAINED JOINTS

A. Push-on application-Restrained joints shall be “Fast-Grip Gasket” by ACIPCO or “Field-Lok Gasket”by U. S. Pipe.

B. Retainer gland restraints shall be “Mega-Lug 1100 Series” by EBBA Iron Sales, or approved

equal.



C. Joint preparation and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.6 GATE VALVES

A. Shall conform to requirements of AWWA C509 for resilient seated gate valves, iron body, with bonded epoxy coating conforming to AWWA C550.

B. Shall be designed for 250 psi working pressure and 500 psi hydrostatic test pressure. C. Accepted manufacturers are Mueller, American Flow Control, and U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co. D. Shall be of iron body, bonded epoxy, and shall have non-rising bronze stem, and shall be

wrench operated. E. Valves shall open by turning counter-clockwise, and operating nuts shall be standard two

inches square. F. Suitable stem guides shall be provided, where required. G. Shall be furnished with mechanical joint suitable for connection to pipe into which it will be

installed for buried service.

H. Small Gate Valves: Valves smaller than 3 inches shall conform to level of quality and manufacturing standards established for valves 3 inches and larger by respective AWWA Standards.

I. Gate valves shall be installed at a maximum spacing of 1000 linear feet, and at a minimum of 3

valves per 3-way tees intersections, and at a minimum of 4 valves per 4-way crosses or intersections. Additional valves may be required at S&WB’s discretion.

2.7 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Pressure Reducing Valves shall be as manufactured by Ames Co., or approved equal, stainless steel. Some installation may require high and low flow set-ups.

B. All Reducing Valves and vaults shall be installed with the most current SCADA and telemetry. C. Precast vaults for each pressure reducing valve must be supplied and installed. The vault must

be sized for each application so as to allow ample working room in the vault. Contractor is to provide shop drawings of the proposed units for approval by Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference.

2.8 AIR RELEASE VALVES

A. Shall be cast iron body with stainless steel (ASTM A240) float and synthetic seat equal to Crispin PL 10, Type N.

B. Orifice size shall be as follows: MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE (PSI) 50 100 150 200 250 300 ORIFICE 5/16” 5/16” ¼” 3/16” 5/32” 1/8”



For general use A 3/16” orifice will be adequate. However, Contractor shall verify actual size with S&WB prior to installation.

2.9 AIR/VACUUM VALVES

A. Shall be cast iron body with stainless steel (ASTM A240) trim and float equal to Crispin AL20 or approved equivalent.

B. Orifice size shall be 2” diameter. C. Internal parts shall be stainless steel (ASTM A240) or bronze.

2.10 VALVE MARKERS

A. Shall be furnished with each gate valve and air release/vacuum valve installed as indicated on the drawings, with exception of fire hydrant valves.

B. Marker shall be reboundable, flexible post as per USA Blue Book the RHINO 3-RAIL marking

post, color blue, 66”, catalogue no. 70456. C. Label Decal shall be white with blue text, 2-7/8” X 14”, reading WARNING WATER VALVE.

2.11 VALVE BOXES AND COVERS

A. Shall be provided with valves. B. Shall be of adjustable screw type, of length required with a minimum 6" of adjustment allowed,

and installed as shown on standard details. C. Shaft shall be 5 inch diameter with base to be minimum of 8 inch diameter by 9-inch height

inside. D. Base size and extension piece shall be as required for each individual size of valve and depth. E. All valve boxes shall be installed with a “Debris Cap”. This device shall be manufactured by SW

Services, Inc., Phoenix, Arizona, or approved equal. F. In Lieu of the above standard valve box and debris cap, the Valve box shall be American Flow

Control “Trench Adaptor”. The box shall be an assembled unit composed of valve box, extension stem, and a self-centering alignment ring. Valve box shall be adjustable for variable depths.

2.12 TAPPING VALVES

A. Tapping sleeve shall be manufactured by FORD, all stainless tapping sleeve, with removable bolts and 360º gasket, Style FTSS.

B. Tapping machines and competent supervision shall be provided for making of taps. All taps

shall be made in the presence of the Sewerage & Water Board representative. C. Tapping sleeves shall be properly sized to fit existing pipe and shall be of split sleeve type with

ends suitable for connection into pipeline into which it will be installed.



D. Largest tap allowed shall be “size on size”. The new water main may be increased in size beyond the installed tapping sleeve and valve.

E. Valves furnished with sleeves shall conform to requirements herein above for gate valves,

except for modifications required to permit use of full size cutter through valves. F. Outlet of valves shall be mechanical joint for joining with water mains.

G. After tap is completed, the “cut out” section of pipe or “coupon” shall be tagged, labeled as to

date and location, and submitted to Sewerage and Water Board of New Orleans and the Engineer.

H. Tapping sleeves shall be pressure tested immediately after installation as per the testing

requirements of this section.

2.13 DETECTION TAPE AND WIRE

A. Detector marking tape shall be non-metallic and shall be installed minimum 2 feet above the pipe. Tape shall be highly visible and minimum 2 inches wide. Lettering shall read "Caution: Buried Water Line".

B. FOR PVC PIPE ONLY-Detection wire shall be size #12 AWG, installed the entire length of the

piping. Wire shall be installed minimum 2 feet above the pipe and properly connected to fittings and valves so line can be relocated with a pipe finder after burial.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES

A. Depth of Pipes

1. Shall be 48 inches (minimum) measured from finished grade to top of pipe unless otherwise specified.

2. Where obstructions are encountered, depth may be greater than 48 inches.

B. Valves

1. Shall be installed with stems vertical.

C. Pipe Curvatures

1. Maximum horizontal or vertical permissible deflection at joint shall be 5 degrees.

3.2 INSTALLING PIPE

A. General

1. Curbing must be installed prior to installing any waterlines. 2. Trenches must be dry. Pipe and appurtenances shall be installed only when trench

conditions are suitable



3. Proper implements, tools, and facilities shall be provided by Contractor for safe and convenient performance of the work.

4. Where water mains parallel or cross sanitary sewers, a minimum horizontal separation of ten (10') feet and minimum vertical separations of 18" must be provided. At crossings, one full length of water pipe must be located so that both joints are as far from the sewer as possible.

B. Installation

1. Lower pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants carefully into trench piece by piece by means of

derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment. 2. Prevent damage to water main materials and protective coatings and linings. 3. Do not drop or dump water line materials into trench. 4. Carefully examine pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects while suspended above

trench immediately before installation in final position.

a) Defective pipe or fittings shall be clearly marked and shall be removed from site.

5. Clean bell and spigot ends of each piece of pipe thoroughly before pipe is laid. 6. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe while it is being placed in line.

a) Provide protective covering for ends of pipe until connection is made to adjacent

pipe, if necessary.

b) No debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed in pipe during laying operations.

7. As each length of pipe is placed in trench, spigot end shall be centered in bell and pipe

forced home and brought to correct line and grade. a) Pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped around it.

b) Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering joint space.

8. Open ends of pipe shall be closed by watertight plug, or other means approved by S&WB, at times when pipe laying is not in progress.

a) If water is in trench, plug shall remain in place until trench is pumped completely

dry. Water shall not be allowed to run into pipe at any time during construction.

9. Lay pipe with bell ends facing in direction of laying.

a) Where pipe is laid on grade of 10 percent or greater, laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with bell ends of pipe upgrade.

3.3 CUTTING PIPE

Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in neat manner without damage to pipe or lining and so as to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe.

3.4 DETECTION OF NON-FERROUS PIPE

See part 2.13.



3.5 JOINTING

A. Jointing of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be made in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Mechanical Joints

1. Thoroughly clean outside of spigot and inside of bell prior to installation. 2. Clean gasket. 3. Tighten nuts with torque limiting wrench. 4. Nuts spaced 180 degrees apart shall be tightened alternately in order to produce equal

pressure.

C. Push-On Joints

1. Furnish and install adapters if required to join bells and spigots of different sizes. 2. thoroughly clean inside of bell and outside of spigot end prior to installation. 3. Insert and lubricate gasket using lubricant furnished or recommended by pipe

manufacturer. 4. Spigot end of pipe shall be entered into socket with care used to keep joint from

contacting ground. 5. Complete joint by forcing plain end to bottom of socket with forked tool or jacktype tool.

3.6 SETTING VALVES AND FITTINGS

A. Valves, fittings, plugs, and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in manner specified above for cleaning, laying and joining pipe.

B. Valves shall be set plumb and a valve box shall be provided for every valve.

1. Valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to valves and shall be centered and plumb

over wrench nut of valve, with box cover flush with surface of finished pavement or such other level as may be directed.

C. Backfill around valves shall be carefully tamped in 6 inch layers for full depth of trench with

valve box in place. D. Provide concrete pad at surface as indicated on standard details.

3.7 ANCHORAGE

A. Plugs, caps, tees, bends, and valves, unless otherwise specified, shall be provided with reaction blocking. Concrete reaction blocking shall conform with these specifications and the applicable standard details.

B. Concrete reaction blocking shall conform with these specifications and the applicable standard

details.

C. Reaction blocking shall be concrete, having a compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi after 28 days. "Sackcrete" shall not be used.

D. Blocking shall be placed between solid, unexcavated earth and fitting to be anchored; area of

bearing on pipe and on ground in each instance shall be that shown on drawings.



E. Blocking shall, unless otherwise shown or directed, be so placed that pipe and fitting joints will

be accessible for repair. F. Metal harness of tie rods or clamps of adequate strength to prevent movement may be used to

compliment concrete blocking if approved by S&WB. G. Steel rods or clamps shall be galvanized or bituminous coated.

3.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS

A. NO CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATERMAINS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE PRESENCE OF S&WB MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL AND/OR THE S&WB ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with the S&WB regarding connections to existing mains and apply

and pay for all required approvals, meters, and related work. C. Connection to existing mains shall be made at such time as to minimize disruption of water

service to public. D. Connections to existing mains shall be made using proper fittings and specials to suit actual

conditions. E. Existing pipes, which are cut or damaged by Contractor, shall be repaired, reconnected, and

returned to service in equal or better condition.

3.9 UTILITY CROSSINGS

A. Pipe shall be placed around, over, or under sewers, culverts, gas mains, telephone ducts, water mains, or other structures.

1. Do not pass pipe through any drainage pipe, culvert, sewer, or manhole. 2. Provide minimum of 48 inches under streambeds or ditches, unless approved by

Engineer in writing. 3. Provide minimum of 6 inch earth or sand cushion between proposed water line and any

other utility or structure or as indicated on drawings. 3.10 HYDROSTATIC TESTS

A. Pressure and leakage tests will be required on each section of line between valves and shall be conducted in accordance with AWWA C600 and or C605, and C900.

B. General Procedure

1. Furnish and install corporation stops at high points on line to release air as line is filled

with water. 2. Furnish suitable pump, connections, and necessary apparatus including means for

accurately measuring water introduced into line during testing. 3. Test pressure shall be 200 pounds per square inch (psi) for DIP for a minimum of 2

hours.

a) Test pressures shall be as directed by the Engineer.



b) Pressure shall not vary by more that 5 psi during test. 4. Concurrently with pressure tests, conduct leakage tests on pipe. The maximum allowable

leakage shall be based on the following formula:

L = S x D x (P^0.5) 133,200

Where L is the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the test length in feet, D is the pipe diameter in inches and P is the average test pressure in pounds per square inch.

5. Locate, remove, and replace any defective pipe, valves, fittings, or hydrants. 6. Repeat tests until results are satisfactory to S&WB, Department of Engineering and

Engineer. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer proof in writing, of pressure test results along with inspection report, which shall be signed at the time of inspection by the SWB representative.

3.11 DISINFECTION

A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances which have been exposed to contamination by construction shall be thoroughly cleaned, chlorinated, drained, and flushed in accordance with AWWA Specification C651.

B. Procedure

1. Flush line prior to disinfection. Flushing shall produce minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per

second in pipe. 2. Disinfect pipe using liquid chlorine or hypochlorite to produce a dosage of 50 mg/1 for a

24 hour contact period. 3. Open and close valves several times during disinfection period. 4. After 24 hour retention period, flush chlorinated water from line until chlorine

concentration of water leaving main is no higher than that generally prevailing in existing system, or less than 1.0 mg/1.

5. Disposal of the heavily chlorinated water shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard C651. The environment to which this water will be discharged shall be inspected. If there is any question that the water will damage the environment, a reducing agent shall be used to neutralize the chlorine.

6. Contractor shall have sample analyzed by a certified laboratory.

C. Repeat disinfection procedures until bacteriological analysis results are acceptable to S&WB, Department of Engineering and Engineer.



SITE SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 02530 - 1

SECTION 02530 - SITE SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL



1. Outside, underground sanitary sewer system, complete, ready for operation, including all gravity flow lines, pressure (force) lines, manholes, cleanouts, frames, covers, structures, appurtenances, and connections to new building and structure, service lines, existing sanitary sewer lines, and existing sanitary structures, and all other incidentals.


1. Section 02222 – Excavating. 2. Section 02223 – Backfilling. 3. Section 02230 – Site Clearing. 4. Section 02240 – Dewatering. 5. Section 02250 – Excavation Support and Protection. 6. Section 02324 – Trenching. 7. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01.

B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package:

1. Pipe, Fittings, and, Appurtenances. 2. Jointing Material. 3. Manhole and Structure Material. 4. Frames and Covers. 5. Steps and Ladders.

1.3 REFRENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A48/A48M-03 Gray Iron Castings

A536-84(2004) Ductile Iron Castings

A615/A615M-06 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

A625/A625M-03 Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single Reduced

A746-03 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe



C12-06 Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines

C76-05b/C76M-05b Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe

C139-05 Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes

C150-05 Portland Cement

C425-04 Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings

C478-06a/C478M-06a Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

C700-05 Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated

C828-03 Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines

C857-95(2001) Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

D698-00ae1 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)

D2321-05 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipes for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

D2412-02 Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel- Plate Loading

D2992-01 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings

D3034-04a Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

D3212-96a (2003) e1 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

D3261-03 Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing

D3350-05 Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials

D4101-05a. Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials

F477-02e1 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

F679-06 Poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings

F714-05 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter

F794-03 Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Ribbed Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter

F894-05 Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe



F949-03 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with Smooth Interior and Fittings

C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

M198-05 Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

D. Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association:

Uni-B-6-98 Recommended Practice Low Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe


A. Products Criteria:

1. Multiple Units: When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

2. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name, or identifiable trademark, including model number, securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark, including model number cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Sewerage & Water Board of New Orleans.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING:

A. Gravity Flow Lines (Pipe and Fittings):

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):

a. Pipe and Fittings, 4 to 15 inches in diameter, shall conform to ASTM D3034, SDR 35. Pipe and fittings shall have elastomeric gasket joints providing a watertight seal when tested in accordance with ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Solvent welded joints shall not be permitted.

b. Pipe and fittings, 18 to 36 inches in diameter, shall be solid wall or have a corrugated or ribbed exterior profile and a smooth interior. Pipe shall conform to the following:

1) Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F949 corrugated sewer pipe with a

smooth interior. The corrugated outer wall shall be fused to the smooth interwall at the corrugation valley. Pipe and fitting shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi at 5 percent deflection, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412. Corrugation shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe to allow gaskets to be installed on field cut sections of pipe without the requirement for special fittings.

2) Ribbed wall PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F794 ribbed sewer pipe with smooth interior pipe and fittings shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412, at 5



percent vertical deflection. Joints shall not leak at 25 feet of head under 5 percent deflection.

3) Solid wall pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM SDR 35 pipe and fittings shall gaskets conforming to ASTM F477, and shall be able to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of 50 psi.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP) for Sanitary Sewer: Shall conform to ASTM A746, thickness Class

51 unless otherwise shown or specified. Joints on pipe and fittings shall be push-on style and conform to AWWA C110 and AWWA C111, rated for 150 psi. Exterior coating shall be approximately 1 mil asphaltic coating as specified in ASTM A746. Interior lining shall be a catalyzed coal tar epoxy, having a minimum thickness of 24 mils, a permeability rating of 0.13 perms, direct impact rating of 100 in-lbs, an abrasion resistance of 20 liters of sand per mil, and dielectric strength of 250 volts per mil. Pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene encased with 8 mil polyethylene sheeting per AWWA C105. Color of polyethylene encasement shall be green.

3. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fittings 18 inches to 36 inches shall conform to ASTM F894. Pipe and fittings shall have a smooth interwall and profile exterior, and be Class 100. Joints shall be water tight elastomeric gaskets in accordance with ASTM D3212, or thermal welded joints.

B. Gravity flow lines with secondary containment (pipe and fittings):

1. Piping systems conveying hazardous materials shall be constructed with a watertight primary (carrier) pipe completely enclosed within a watertight secondary (containment) pipe.

2. Fiberglass Piping and Fittings: Shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2992 using a filament-winding process. Joints shall be adhesive bonded straight or tapered spigot and bells. Taper angles shall not be greater than 0.5 degrees. The pipe and fittings shall have an integral epoxy resin-rich reinforced liner not less than 0.020 inch for carrier pipes, and not less than 0.010 inch for containment pipe.

3. The carrier pipe shall be installed with manufactured spacers to maintain a minimum interstitial space of 0.75 inch between the carrier pipe and the containment pipe.

4. The piping shall be equipped with adequate monitoring ports to detect the presence of fluids within the containment pipe and for the extraction of fluids from the containment pipe.

2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL

A. Gravity Flow Lines:

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Gravity Use): Joints, ASTM D3212. Elastomeric gasket, ASTM F477.

B. Gravity Flow with Secondary Containment: Tapered or straight bell and spigot with adhesive bond. Completed joint shall be equal or greater than the pressure rating of the pipe.

2.3 MANHOLES AND VAULTS

A. See Section 02560 for site-built manholes.

B. Alternatively, manholes and vaults may be constructed of precast concrete segmental blocks, precast reinforced concrete rings or precast reinforced sections. The manholes and vaults shall be in accordance with Sewerage & Water Board Standard Details, and the following:



1. Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks: Blocks shall conform to ASTM C139 and shall not be less than 6 inches thick for manholes to a depth of 12 feet; not less than 8 inches thick for manholes deeper than 12 feet deep. Blocks shall be not less than 8 inches in length. Blocks shall be shaped so that joints seal and bond effectively with cement mortar. Parge structure interior and exterior with 1/2 inch of cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface.

2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Rings: Rings or sections shall have an inside diameter as indicated on the drawings, and shall be not less than 48 inches in diameter. Wall thickness shall conform to requirements of ASTM C76, except that lengths of the sections may be shorter as conditions require. Tops shall conform to ASTM C478. Top section shall be eccentric cone type. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover.

3. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Risers and Tops: Design, material and installation shall conform to requirements of ASTM C478. Top sections shall be eccentric. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover.

4. Flat top manhole tops shall be reinforced concrete as detailed on the drawings. 5. Vaults: Reinforced concrete, as indicated on the plans, or precast reinforced concrete.

Concrete for precast sections shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days, ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcing steel, rated for AASHTO HS20-44 loading with 30 percent impact, and conform to ASTM C857.

6. Mortar:

a. Precast Concrete Segmental Block Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement, l/4 part lime hydrate, and 3 parts sand.

b. Precast Reinforced Concrete Ring and Riser Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement and 2 parts sand. Water in mixture shall produce a stiff, workable mortar, but shall not exceed 21 L (5-l/2 gallons) per sack of cement.

7. Flexible sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed shape, sized to completely fill the joint between precast sections, and form permanently flexible watertight seal. The sealing compound shall be non-shrink and meet AASHTO M198.

8. Frames and covers shall be gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20-44 loading, have a studded pattern on the cover, and the words “SANITARY SEWER”. The studs and the lettering shall be raised 5/16 inch. The cover shall be a minimum of 24 inches in diameter and shall have four 3/4 inch vent holes and two lifting slots. The bearing surface of the frame and cover shall be machine finished. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to traffic.

9. Manhole steps shall be polypropylene plastic coated on a No. 4 deformed rebar conforming to ASTM C478, Polypropylene shall conform to ASTM D4101. Steps shall be a minimum of 16 inches wide and project a minimum of 7 inches away from the wall. The top surface of the step shall have a studded non-slip surface. Steps shall be placed at 12 inch centers.

10. Ladders, brackets and hardware shall be constructed of welded aluminum, rails shall be 3/8 inch by 2-1/2 inches spaced a minimum of 6 inches apart. Rungs shall be 1-3/8 inches in diameter and have a non-slip surface. Standoffs shall offset the ladder 7 inches from the wall. The ladder assembly shall be rated for a minimum of 500 pounds.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE

A. Miscellaneous concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. The cement shall be Type III conforming to ASTM C150. Concrete shall conform with Section 03300.



2.5 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 40 unless otherwise noted.

2.8 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Concrete coating for the interior of wet wells shall consist of an epoxy blended filler sealer, and a cross linked epoxy phenolic cured, resistant protective coating.

2.10 GATE VALVES: (NOT USED)

2.11 VALVE BOXES: (NOT USED)

2.12 CHECK VALVES: (NOT USED)

2.13 OIL AND GREASE INTERCEPTOR AND GREASE REMOVAL PIT

A. Shall be constructed of reinforced precast concrete or cast-in-place concrete of the shape and configuration indicated on the plans. Precast vaults shall be constructed in accordance with ASTM C857 and be rated for HS20-44 loading. The concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days, and reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60. Access to the trap shall be through 24 inches diameter manhole frame and cover or through hinged aluminum access manways.

B. Baffles shall be constructed of 1/4 inch mild carbon steel with 1/4 inch thermoplastic coating.

2.14 AIR RELEASE VALVE: (NOT USED)

2.15 CLEANOUT FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Frames and covers shall be gray iron casting conforming to ASTM C48. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20-44 wheel loading, have a studded pattern on its cover, vent holes, and lifting slots. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to vehicular traffic. The word “SEWER” shall be cast on the cover.

2.16 WARNING TAPE

A. Standard, 4 mil polyethylene 3 inch wide tape detectable type, green with black letters and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW”.”



PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 BUILDING SERVICE LINES

A. Install sanitary sewer service lines to point of connection outside of buildings where service is required and make connections. Coordinate the invert and location of the service line with the Contractor installing the building lines.

B. Connections of service line to building piping shall be made after the new sanitary sewer system has been constructed, tested, and accepted for operation. The Contractor shall install all temporary caps, plugs, and devices required for testing.

C. When building services have not been installed at the time when the sanitary sewer system is complete, provide temporary plugs or caps at the ends of all service lines. Mark the location and depth of the service lines with continuous warning tape placed 12 inches above service lines.

3.2 ABANDONED MANHOLES structures and piping:

A. Manholes and Structures Outside of Building Areas: Remove frame and cover, cut and remove the top of an elevation of 2 feet below finished grade. Fill the remaining portion with compacted gravel or crushed rock or concrete.

B. Manholes and Structures with Building Areas: Remove frame and cover and cut and remove the top to an elevation of 2 feet below grade, and completely fill the structure with lean concrete.

C. Piping under and within 5 feet of building areas shall be completely removed.

D. Piping outside of building areas shall be completely removed.

E. The Contractor shall comply with all OSHA confined space requirements while working within existing manholes and structures.

F. When the limit of the abandonment terminates in an existing manhole to remain, the flow line in the bench of the manhole to the abandoned line shall be filled with concrete and shaped to maintain the flowline of the lines to remain.

3.3 REGRADING

A. Raise or lower existing manholes and structures frames and covers, cleanout frames and covers and valve boxes in regraded areas to finish grade. Carefully remove, clean and salvage cast iron frames and covers. Adjust the elevation of the top of the manhole or structure as detailed on the drawings. Adjust the elevation of the cleanout pipe riser, and reinstall the cap or plug. Reset cast iron frame and cover, grouting below and around the frame. Install concrete collar around reset frame and cover as specified for new construction.

B. During periods when work is progressing on adjusting manholes or structures cover elevations, the Contractor shall install a temporary cover above the bench of the structure or manhole. The temporary cover shall be installed above the high flow elevation within the structure, and shall prevent debris from entering the wastewater stream.

C. The Contractor shall comply with all OSHA confined space requirements when working within existing structures.



3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PUBLIC LINES AND MANHOLES

A. Comply with all rules and regulations of the Sewerage and Water Board of New Orleans (S&WB). Contractor shall be responsible for submitting plans to S&WB, and any other agency, and obtaining all approvals.

B. The connection to Public facilities shall comply with the standard details and specifications of S&WB, except as specifically modified on the plans and specifications.

3.6 PIPE SEPARATION

A. Horizontal Separation - Water Mains and Sewers:

1. Existing and proposed water mains shall be at least 6 feet horizontally from any proposed sanitary sewer lines or sewer service connection.

2. Gravity flow mains and pressure (force) mains may be located closer than 6 feet to a water main when:

a. Local conditions prevent a lateral separation specified; and

b. The water main invert is at least 18 inches above the crown of the gravity sewer or 24 Inches above the crown of the pressure (force) main; and

c. The water main is in a separate trench separated by undisturbed earth.

3. When it is impossible to meet (1) or (2) above, both the water main and sanitary sewer main shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical joint ductile iron pipe. The pipe for the sanitary sewer main shall comply with the specifications for pressure (force) mains, and the water main material shall comply with Water System specification section. The sewer shall be pressure tested as specified for pressure (force) mains before backfilling.

B. Vertical Separation - Water Mains and Sewers at Crossings:

1. Water mains shall be separated from sewer mains so that the invert of the water main is a minimum of 24 inches above the crown of gravity flow sewer or 48 inches above the crown of pressure (force) mains. The vertical separation shall be maintained within 10 feet horizontally of the sewer and water crossing. When these vertical separations are met, no additional protection is required.

2. In no case shall pressure (force) sanitary main cross above, or within 24 inches of water lines.

3. When it is impossible to meet (1) above, the gravity flow sewer may be installed 18 inches above or 12 inches below the water main, provided that both the water main and sewer shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical ductile pipe. Pressure (Force) sewers may be installed 24 inches below the water line provided both the water line and sewer line are constructed of ductile iron pipe. The pipe for the sewer shall conform to the requirements for pressure sewers specified herein. Piping for the water main shall conform to Water System specification section.

4. The required vertical separation between the sewer and the water main shall extend on each side of the crossing until the perpendicular distance from the water main to the sewer line is at least 10 feet.



3.7 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Lay pipes true to line and grade. Gravity flow sewer shall be laid with bells facing upgrade. Pressure (force) mains shall have the bells facing the direction of flow.

B. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench or when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable for the work.

C. Support pipe on compacted bedding material. Excavate bell holes only large enough to properly make the joint.

D. Inspect pipes and fittings, for defects before installation. Defective materials shall be plainly marked and removed from the site. Cut pipe shall have smooth regular ends at right angles to axis of pipe.

E. Clean interior of all pipe thoroughly before installation. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed securely to prevent entrance of storm water, dirt or other substances.

F. Lower pipe into trench carefully and bring to proper line, grade, and joint. After jointing, interior of each pipe shall be thoroughly wiped or swabbed to remove any dirt, trash or excess jointing materials.

G. Do not lay sewer pipe in same trench with another pipe or other utility. Sanitary sewers shall cross at least 2 feet below water lines.

H. Do not walk on pipe in trenches until covered by layers of bedding or backfill material to a depth of 12 inches over the crown of the pipe

I. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above sewer pipe

J. Install gravity sewer line in accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following standards:

1. Ductile Iron Piping: AWWA C111 and C600. 2. Vitrified Clay Piping: ASTM C12. 3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: ASTM D2321. 4. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Piping: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations

with gaskets with fused joints.

K. Gravity Flow Lines with Secondary Containment:

1. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install all pipe centering devices to maintain shall be tested for leaks.

3.8 MANHOLES AND VAULTS:

A. General:

1. Circular Structures:

a. Precast concrete segmental blocks shall lay true and plumb. All horizontal and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar. Parge interior and exterior of



structure with 1/2 inch or cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface.

b. Precast reinforced concrete rings shall be installed true and plumb. The joints between rings and between rings and the base and top, shall be sealed with a preform flexible gasket material specifically manufactured for this type of application. Adjust the length of the rings so that the eccentric conical top section will be at the required elevation. Cutting the conical top section is not acceptable.

c. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops. Install as specified for precast reinforced concrete rings.

2. Rectangular Structures:

a. Reinforced concrete structures shall be installed in accordance with Division 3.

b. Precast concrete structures shall be placed on a 8 inch reinforced concrete pad, or be provided with a precast concrete base section. Structures provided with a base section shall be set on 8 inches thick aggregate base course compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. Set precast section true and plumb. Seal all joints with preform flexible gasket material.

3. Do not build structures when air temperature is 0 degrees C (32 degrees F), or below. 4. Invert channels shall be smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of

adjacent sewer section. Make changes in direction of flow with a smooth curve of as large a radius as size of structure will permit. Make changes in size and grade of channels gradually and evenly. Construct invert channels by one of the listed methods:

a. Forming directly in concrete base of structure.

b. Building up with brick and mortar.

5. Floor of structure outside the channels shall be smooth and slope toward channels not less than 1:12 (1-inch per foot) nor more than 1:6 (2 inches per foot). Bottom slab and benches shall be concrete.

6. The wall that support access rungs or ladder shall be 90 degrees vertical from the floor of structure to manhole cover.

7. Install steps and ladders per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Steps and ladders shall not move or flex when used. All loose steps and ladders shall be replaced by the Contractor.

8. Install manhole frames and covers on a mortar bed, and flush with the finish pavement. Frames and covers shall not move when subject to vehicular traffic. Install a concrete collar around the frame to protect the frame from moving until the adjacent pavement is placed. In unpaved areas, the rim elevation shall be 50 mm (2 inches) above the adjacent finish grade. Install a 200 mm (8 inches) thick, by 300 mm (12 inches) concrete collar around the perimeter of the frame. Slope the top of the collar away from the frame.

3.9 SEWER AND MANHOLE SUPPORTS, CONCRETE CRADLES

As required and shall not restrict access for future maintenance of the joints within the piping system.



3.10 OIL AND GREASE INTERCEPTOR AND GREASE REMOVAL PIT

A. Construct reinforced concrete as shown on the drawing, and in accordance with Section 03300. Install precast units as specified above.

B. Pipe and Fittings: Ductile iron, polylined, piping shall be used inside of trap, between trap and buildings, and between trap and manhole.

C. Manways and access manholes shall be set to finish grade providing adequate access to the unit. Slope pavement around the access-way to prevent stormwater from entering the unit.

D. Install baffles as indicated on the drawings.

3.11 CLEANOUTS

A. 6 inches in diameter and consisting of a ductile iron 45 degree fitting on end of run, or combination Y fitting and l/8 bend in the run with ductile iron pipe extension, water tight plug or cap and cast frame and cover flush with finished grade. Center-set cleanouts, located in unpaved areas, in a 12 by 12 by 6 inches thick concrete slab set flush with adjacent finished grade. Where cleanout is in force main, provide a blind flange top connection. The center of the flange shall be equipped with a 2 inches) base valve to allow the pressure in the line to be relieved prior to removal of the blind flange. Frames and covers for pressure (force) mains shall be 24 inches in diameter.

B. The top of the cleanout assembly shall be 2 inches below the bottom of the cover to prevent loads being transferred from the frame and cover to the piping.

3.16 INSPECTION OF SEWERS

Inspect and obtain the S&WB and Engineer's approval. Thoroughly flush out before inspection. Lamp test between structures and show full bore indicating sewer is true to line and grade. Lips at joints on the inside of gravity sewer lines are not acceptable.

3.17 TESTING OF SANITARY SEWERS

A. Gravity Sewers and Manholes:

1. Air Test: PVC Pipe, Uni-Bell Uni-B-6. Clean and isolate the section of sewer line to be tested. Plug or cap the ends of all branches, laterals, tees, wyes, and stubs to be included in the test to prevent air leakage. The line shall be pressurized to 4 psi and allowed to stabilize. After pressure stabilization, the pressure shall be dropped to 3.5 psi greater than the average back-pressure of any groundwater above the sewer. The minimum test time shall be as specified in Uni-Bell Uni-B-6.

2. Exfiltration Test:

a. Subject pipe to hydrostatic pressure produced by head of water at depth of 3 feet above invert of sewer at upper manhole under test. In areas where ground water exists, head of water shall be 3 feet above existing water table. Maintain head of water for one hour for full absorption by pipe body before testing. During one hour test period, measured maximum allowable rate of exfiltration for any section of sewer shall be 3.0 gallons per hour per 100 feet.



b. If measurements indicate exfiltration is greater than maximum allowable leakage, take additional measurements until leaks are located. Repair and retest.

3. Infiltration Test: If ground water level is greater than 3 feet above invert of the upper manhole, infiltration tests are acceptable. Allowable leakage for this test will be the same as for the exfiltration test.

B. Testing of Concrete Grease Pit or Oil/Water Separator: No leakage with the wet well completely filled with water for a duration of 4 hours.



SEWER AND DRAIN MANHOLES 02560 - 1

SECTION 02560 - SEWER AND DRAIN MANHOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes materials and operations required for the installation of sanitary sewer and storm drainage manholes.

B. Related Sections: Refer to the following sections for related work:

1. Section 02222 – Excavating 2. Section 02223 – Backfilling 3. Section 02230 – Site Clearing 4. Section 02514 – Water Distribution Systems 5. Section 02530 – Site Sanitary Sewer Systems 6. Section 02720 – Site Storm Drainage Systems 7. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete


The materials and practices comprising the work shall conform to this and other referenced standard specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cement shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cement for use in mortar shall conform to ASTM C91. 2. Portland cement for use in precast and cast-in-place concrete, and in masonry grout and

mortar shall conform to ASTM C150, Type II, IIA, or I-II.

B. Block, Brick, Precast Barrels, Steps, Frames & Covers:

1. Riser Sections and Tops: Precast reinforced concrete conforming to ASTM C478. Precast tops shall be either eccentric cone or flat slab type. Concrete for precast sections shall have 4000 psi 28-day strength.

2. Riser Joints: Rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C443, bituminous mastic gasket, or butyl rubber gasket.

3. Mortar: Type M, conforming to Sandia Standard Specifications "Concrete Masonry." 4. Brick: Grade MS, conforming to ASTM C32. 5. Steps: Steel reinforced polypropylene conforming to ASTM C478.

6. Frames and Covers: Gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48 Class 25C. Bearing surfaces shall be ground or machined, such that the cover shall



seat firmly onto the frame without rocking. Manhole frame and cover shall not weigh less than 325 pounds combined, and the cover shall not weigh less than 180 pounds. In sanitary sewer systems, the word "SEWER" shall be cast onto the top of the cover. In storm sewer systems, the word "DRAIN" shall be cast onto the top of the cover. Letters shall be not less than 1" in height. Frame and cover shall be constructed as detailed on the Standard Drawings or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION

A. General: Manholes shall be constructed at the locations and elevations indicated and as detailed on the Contract Drawings. Installed pipe invert elevations at manholes shall not vary by more than 0.05' from the invert elevations designated on the Contract Drawings.

B. Manhole Bases: Prior to manhole installations, prepare a subgrade soil foundation a minimum of 12" beneath the elevation of the bottom of the concrete manhole base and compact to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. Cast-in-place concrete for the base shall have 3000 psi 28-day strength.

C. Joints in precast riser sections and tops shall be made using gasket materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions.

D. Brick Manhole Walls:

1. Brick walls shall not be laid on a base until the base has been allowed to cure for at least 24 hours.

2. Brick shall be soaked or wetted with water prior to placing on a mortar bed or placement of mortar joints.

3. Brick shall be laid plumb, level and true in full beds of mortar with "push joints." All joints shall be completely filled with mortar. The brick wall shall be plastered inside and outside with a layer of mortar 1/2" thick.

4. Brick walls shall be built around adjoining sewer pipe sections. Steps shall be built into the wall as the work progresses.

5. Manholes greater than 18' in depth shall be constructed of precast concrete sections only.

E. Sewer pipe joints shall be located immediately outside the manhole barrel both upstream and downstream. Pipe sections built into manhole walls shall be reinforced with grout so that the manhole and adjoining pipe sections are monolithic.

F. Manhole Floors: Manhole floors shall be made of grout and the work shall be free of any rough corners or sudden changes in direction such that a steady uniform flow with a minimum of wave action will be provided. Changes in direction and grade will consist of the largest curve radius the manhole diameter will permit. Free vertical drop from any branch or service line shall not exceed one half the mainline pipe diameter measured from the mainline upstream invert.

G. Manhole steps shall be cast-in-place or driven into precast or site-drilled holes. Steps shall be installed not more than 16" apart vertically on the interior wall directly beneath the manhole cover according to ASTM C478.



H. Manhole frames and covers shall be installed as detailed and adjusted to required elevation by building up courses of manhole brick on full beds of mortar with "push joints" or by using precast concrete adjustment rings set in full beds of mortar.

I. Fill all lifting holes and other voids inside and outside with non-shrink grout. The inside of the manhole shall be cleaned of all loose mortar, framing materials and other debris.

J. Bituminous waterproof coating shall be applied to the exterior surface of the manhole. When designated on the Contract Drawings, the interior of the manhole shall be coated with a corrosion resistant material.

3.2 TESTING

A. The water exfiltration test shall consist of filling the entire manhole with water to the bottom of the frame elevation. A stabilization period of one hour will be allowed for absorption, after which the manhole shall be refilled as necessary before starting the test. The test period shall be two (2) hours, after which the manhole shall be refilled, measuring the necessary quantity of water. The allowable leakage shall be 0.25 gallons per foot diameter per vertical foot per day, and is represented by the following formula:

V = 0.25 DHT/24

where; V = Allowable loss in gallons D = Manhole diameter in feet H = Initial depth of water to invert in feet T = Duration of test in hours

B. Sanitary and storm sewer manholes shall be tested at random; however, not less than 20% of the total number of manholes identified in the contract documents shall be tested.

3.3 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENTS

A. The top elevation of all existing manholes that are to remain shall be adjusted to accommodate required finish grade or paving elevations.

B. Where required finished grade or paving elevations are higher than existing elevations

reinforced concrete shall be formed and poured to accommodate the required elevation and slope. Concrete at the walls of existing manhole body shall be at least 8” wide and reinforced with at least #5 bars @ 6”o.c. (vertically). Existing frame and grate shall be reinstalled and secured in place.

C. Where required finished grade or paving elevations are lower than existing elevations, the top

of existing manhole concrete/masonry body shall be chipped down to accommodate required elevation and slope and existing frame and grate shall be reinstalled and secured in place.

D. Pivoted Turnbuckle Manhole Risers (by American Highway Products Ltd, or approved equal)

shall be installed to accommodate required elevation and surface slope.



HOT WIRE SYSTEMS 02581 - 1

SECTION 02581 - HOT WIRE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot wire systems for animal enclosures.


1. Division 16 Sections for electrical power and connections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each hot wire system required. Include manufacturer's standard details, fabrication methods, and published recommendations for each component of the system required, and the following:

1. Roughing-in diagrams. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Parts lists.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power operator, signal, and control systems.

C. Maintenance Data: For power units to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division

1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing operators similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials as listed below:

1. 100 linear feet of stainless steel cable. 2. Two tension springs and turnbuckles. 3. 25 insulators.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hot wire equipment that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



1. Energizers:

a. Gallagher Power Fence, Inc., (800) 531-5908. b. Or approved equal.

2.2 HOT WIRE SYSTEM GENERAL

A. General: Review the location of all hot wire system installations with the Architect and Owner representative. Do not proceed without approval. Each animal exhibit to have an independent hot wire system. Hot wired exhibits are indicated on the plans.

B. Protection: Protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and

protect the work and materials of other trades from any damage related to the work of this Section.

C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements

necessary to restore to new unblemished condition and secure approval of the architect; at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.3 ENERGIZERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

D. Basis of Design: All model numbers listed are by Gallagher Power Fence for reference.

1. Energizers: SmartPower MBX2500 (G302404).

E. Battery: Provide 12 volt Optima Yellow Top automotive battery.

1. Battery holder: Fabricate wall mounted holder from 1" x 1" x 1/8" Stainless steel angle frame with support brackets to wall attachment. Attach to wall with four 1/4" diameter galvanized toggle bolts.

2.4 CABLE AND INSULATORS

F. Cable to be 12.5 ga., XL Aluminum Wire.

1. Tension springs: Light weight stainless steel tension springs, 4” long. 2. Turnbuckle: Stainless steel 1/4" x 6" turnbuckle. 3. Conduit / sleeves: PVC schedule 40 conduit size as required by installation.

G. Insulated cable for underground:

1. 12.5 ga. galvanized wire with extra heavy duty double insulation. Gallagher G627 heavy duty underground cable.

H. Insulators

1. 12" Chain Link Offset with Porcelain Insulator. Gallagher G653054.

I. Gates

1. Gate handle: Gallagher G639304. 2. Gate anchor: Gallagher G646104. 3. Tension spring Gallagher 290. 4. Cut off switch: Gallagher G608704.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install complete hot wire system as indicated on the drawings, as directed by the Owner on site and according to manufacturer's written instructions, including controls, and power units. The wire shall not touch any grounded object, including plants, posts or other structures. The Contractor shall obtain Architect’s approval for the rod locations prior to installation. The system must be operating for 48 hours prior to final approval.

1. Refer to Division 16 Sections for power connection.

B. Systems: Each hotwire system is to include an energizer, battery and holder and ground rods

(quantity based on manufacturer’s recommendations).

C. Gates: Install gates as per manufacturer’s direction, install buried insulated cable by pass under gate.

D. Exposed Cable: Each run (between attached ends) of cable shall have a tension spring and

turnbuckle. All ends to have crimped swage connections as follows:

1. Use only double barrel, black color, copper swage sleeves provided by the cable manufacturer and of a size specified by the manufacturer for the wire diameter they are to be used for.

2. For terminations, cable is to be passed through the terminal hardware aperture twice while crossed over, forming an overhand loop. Use two swage sleeves spaced 1/4 inch apart for each terminal connection.

3. For in-line connections, use three swage sleeves spaced 1/4 inch apart on parallel cable. 4. For tangential splices, use two swage sleeves spaced 1/4 inch apart. 5. Crimp all swage sleeves using a tool specified by the cable/sleeve manufacturer and

sized appropriately for the sleeves. 6. Apply crimps or swages to sleeves according to manufacturer’s specifications and in all

applications allow ends of cable to extend between 1/8 inch and 1/4 inch beyond the end of the swage sleeves.

D. See electrical plans for conduit installed from energizer location in nighthouse to exterior of

building, Contractor shall extend system from conduit to locations within exhibit as directed by Architect with insulated cable buried a minimum of 18”.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After completed installation readjust insulators, wire and controls for optimum operating conditions, safety, and to eliminate any conditions where the system is touching a grounded object.

3.3 SCHEDULE A. Install one hot wire system in each of the following exhibits:

1. Giraffe enclosure - mount energizer inside building, use offset insulators. END OF SECTION 02581


SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 02720 - 1

SECTION 02720 – SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Drains. 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Catch basins. 6. Stormwater inlets. 7. Pipe outlets.


1. Section 02222 – Excavating. 2. Section 02223 – Backfilling. 3. Section 02230 – Site Clearing. 4. Section 02240 – Dewatering. 5. Section 02250 – Excavation Support and Protection. 6. Section 02324 – Trenching. 7. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, and grates. 3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, design calculations, and concrete design-mix reports.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.

F. Field quality-control reports.




A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Drain Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for

gasketed joints. 2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.2 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Nonreinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14, Class 3, with bell-and-spigot ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets.

B. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.

1. Bell-and-spigot ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets. 2. Class III, Wall B.

2.3 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. 2. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.



3. For Fiberglass Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 5. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:

a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco Inc.

c. Logan Clay Pipe.

d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

e. NDS Inc.

f. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

3. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings:



a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.

b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

3. Description: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

E. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings:



a. Fernco Inc.

b. Logan Clay Pipe.

c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.



3. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:



a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

d. Tyler Pipe.

e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

f. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

3. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

4. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy Duty. 5. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

2.5 DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Area Drains:



a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

d. Tyler Pipe.

e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

f. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

3. Description: ASME A112.6.3 gray-iron round body with anchor flange and round secured grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated.



4. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy Duty.

2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Material: High-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Tube.

D. Color: Black.

2.7 MANHOLES

A. See Section 330512.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "DRAIN."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: 8 percent.



D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

2.9 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Site-Built Catch Basins: See Drawings.

B. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for joint sealants.

1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 2. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

3. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that match 24-inch- diameter frame and grate.

4. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 36 inches.

5. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

C. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading. Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 STORMWATER INLETS

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.

B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.

C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.

D. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards.

2.11 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.

B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control."



1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-3, screen opening 2 inches. 2. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches. 3. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-5, screen opening 5 inches.

C. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. FS-2, No. 4 screen opening, average-size graded stone.

D. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. A-1, 3-ton average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. 3. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 4. Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 5. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints.



2. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

3. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.5 DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.

1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains.

B. Embed drains in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.

D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.

E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.

F. Embed trench sections in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.



B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.8 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping as specified.

B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from

entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

C. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.



1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Unshielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints.

3.11 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to

within 12 inches of top with compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Section 02223.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Testing Laboratory shall inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.



b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Contractor shall test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.

c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.



CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02721 - 1

SECTION 02721 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Walkways. 2. Service areas.


1. Division 2 Section "Excavation" for subgrade preparation. 2. Division 2 Section "Backfilling" for grading, and subbase course. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants within concrete pavement and at

isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction. 4. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive.



D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.



C. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips.

E. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

G. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate as follows: 1. Class: 1N. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal. 3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

D. Water: ASTM C 94.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

E. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.



2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

1. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency.

C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi (24.1 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm).

a. Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Not more than 8 inches (200 mm) after adding admixture to plant- or site-verified, 2- to 3-inch (50- to 75-mm) slump.

D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.

E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2.5 to 4.5 percent.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not

continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete topping is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 25 feet (7.6 m), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below

finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.



4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.

5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

a. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

1. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.



G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations .

H. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

I. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished

concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.



C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (9 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch

(6 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13

mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length

of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm). 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.

B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.



4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to owner, Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

D. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.



HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1

SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Base course aggregates. 2. Patching asphalt. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 or LaDOTD Manual for definitions of terms.

B. LaDOTD: Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements as specified in the 2000 edition of the LaDOTD’s publication entitled “Standard Spec Manual (SSM). 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in

standard specifications do not apply to this Section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. VOC content for each pavement marking paint.

B. Job-Mix Designs: LaDOTD Certificated Superpave Wearing Course mix design.

C. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches(300 by 300 mm) minimum.

D. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

E. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by LaDOTD.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to LaDOTD for testing indicated.

C. Requirements: Comply with the LaDOTD’s publication entitled “2000 Standard Specs Manual (SSM).

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

2. Review condition of existing pavement and preparatory work. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during

installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.5 deg C). 2. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.5 deg C) at time

of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Base Course Aggregate: Recycled Portland cement concrete shall comply with SSM Section 1003.03(e).



C. Asphalt Pavement Aggregate: Comply with SSM Section 1003.01 & 1003.06. Use as much recycled Portland cement concrete and reclaimed asphaltic pavement in mix as possible.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1, PG 70-22m.

B. Asphalt: Comply with SSM Section 1002.01.

C. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt comply with SSM Section 504.

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Paving Geotextile: Comply with SSM Section 1019.03 , resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by LaDOTD; designed according to procedures in SSM and complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: Provide LaDOTD approved base appropriate to the conditions on this project.

3. Surface Course: Superpave Wearing Course, LA Standard Specification for Roads and Bridges, 2000 edition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches(300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.



3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of existing asphalt repairs.

3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F(121 deg C). 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat. 5. Comply with SSM Section 401 and 502.

B. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses. 3. Comply with SSM Section 502.6.

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools. 2. Comply with SSM Section 502.08

B. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

C. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.



D. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

E. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

F. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus 1/2 inch(12 mm), no minus. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch(6 mm), no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot(3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch(6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch(3 mm).


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to AASHTO T 168.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd.(836 sq. m) or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.



b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.9 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.



FENCES AND GATES 02821 - 1

SECTION 02821 - FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Chain-Link Fences: Industrial. 2. Gates: Motor operated, horizontal slide. 3. Hoofstock fencing. 4. Wood fencing and gates.


1. Division 2 Section "Excavation" for site excavation, fill, and backfill where chain-link fences and gates are located.

2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood to be used on wood fencing. 3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls,

limit and disconnect switches, and safety features and for system disconnect switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates.

1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 3. Hoofstock fence. 4. Gates and hardware. 5. Gate operators, including operating instructions. 6. Accessories: Screening fabric.. 7. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of fences, gates, posts, rails, tension wires, details of extended posts, extension arms, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage, attachment, bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances.

1. Gate Operator: Show locations and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring and access-control features.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts or 6-inch(150-mm) lengths of actual units showing the full range of colors available for components with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, operator, and gate, signed by product manufacturer.

1. Strength test results for framing according to ASTM F 1043.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Maintenance Data: For the following to include in maintenance manuals:

1. Polymer finishes. 2. Gate operator.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed chain-link fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for chain-link fences and gates, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. UL Standard: Provide gate operators that comply with UL 325.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. General: Height indicated on Drawings. Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements indicated below:

1. Steel Wire Fabric: Metal and Polymer-coated wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch(3.76 mm), 9 gauge wire before coating.



a. Mesh Size: 2-1/8 inches(54 mm). b. Weight of Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq.

ft.(610 g/sq. m) with zinc coating applied before weaving. c. Polymer Coating: ASTM F 668, Class 2b over metallic-coated steel wire.

1) Color: Black, complying with ASTM F 934.

d. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.

2. Selvage: Twisted top and knuckled bottom.

2.2 HOOFSTOCK FENCE FABRIC

A. General: Height indicated on Drawings. Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of fabric.

1. Steel Wire Fabric: Metal high tensile wire with fixed knot to lock wires in place, Class 3

galvanizing. 2. Product – Bekaert, Solidlock 12,5 Game Fence, 2096 – 12 or equal.

2.3 INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING

A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round pipe, and the following:

1. Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40. 2. Fence Height: 6 feet(1.83 m) or 8 feet(2.44 m) as noted on plans. 3. Strength Requirement: Heavy industrial according to ASTM F 1043. 4. Post Diameter and Thickness: According to ASTM F 1043.

a. Top, center and bottom Rail: 1.66 inches(42 mm). b. Line Post: 2.375 inches(60 mm)]. c. End, Corner and Pull Post: 3.5 by 1.5 inches(89 by 38 mm). d. Swing Gate Post: 4-inch(102-mm) diameter, 8.65-lb/ft.(12.88-kg/m). e. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post:

1) Openings Wider Than 12 Feet(3.7 m): Steel post, 4-inch(102-mm)

diameter, and 8.65-lb/ft.(12.88-kg/m) weight. 2) Guide posts for Class 1 horizontal-slide gates equal the gate post height, 1

size smaller, but weight is not less than 3.11 lb/ft.(4.63 kg/m); installed adjacent to gate post to permit gate to slide in space between.

5. Coating for Steel Framing:

a. Metallic Coating:

1) Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft.(0.61-kg/sq. m) average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft.(1.22-kg/sq. m) zinc coating per ASTM A 653/A 653M.

b. Polymer coating over metallic coating.



2.4 TENSION WIRE

A. General: Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:

1. Location: Extended along bottom of fence fabric.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch-(4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817, ASTM A 824, and the following:

1. Metallic Coating: Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot-dip process, with the following minimum coating weight: a. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.

2.5 INDUSTRIAL SWING GATES

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for single and double swing gate types.

1. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083 for materials and protective coatings.

B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following:

1. Gate Fabric Height: Same as adjacent fence height. 2. Leaf Width: As indicated. 3. Frame Members:

a. Tubular Steel: 2.375 inches(60 mm) round.

C. Frame Corner Construction:

1. Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch-(7.9-mm-) diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet(1.52 m) wide or wider].

D. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end members above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame 12 inches(300 mm) as required to attach barbed wire assemblies.

E. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, center gate stops and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet(1.52 m) wide. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.

1. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of malleable metal

mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center, 3/4 inch diameter drop rod or plunger bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Set mushroom plate in 12" x 12"x 8" deep concrete footing.

2. For wood covered gates: Latch for Wood Gates: Lokk Latch Pro; D & D Technologies (800) 716 – 0888, re key to as directed by Owner.

3. For non-AZA chainlink gates: Latch for Gates: Lokk Latch Round Post Gravity Latch; D & D Technologies (800) 716 – 0888, re key to as directed by Owner.

4. Hinges: Provide heavy duty tamper resistant pivot hinges that allow 210 deg gate swing with a maximum 2” gap between gate and post.



2.6 INDUSTRIAL HORIZONTAL-SLIDE GATES

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 1184 for single slide gate types. 1. Classification: Type II Cantilever Slide, Class 2 with internal roller assemblies. 2. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1184 for materials and

protective coatings.

B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 1184 and the following:

1. Gate Fabric Height: Same as adjacent fence. 2. Gate Opening Width: As indicated. 3. Frame Members:

a. Tubular Steel: 2.375 inches(60 mm) round.

4. Bracing Members:

a. Tubular Steel 2.375 inches(60 mm) round.

C. Frame Corner Construction:

1. Welded frame.

D. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end members above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame 12 inches(300 mm) as required to attach barbed wire assemblies.

E. Roller Guards: As required per ASTM F 1184 for Type II, Class 1 gates.

F. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hangers, roller assemblies and stops fabricated from galvanized steel.

G. When located in AZA fence maintain a maximum 2” gap on bottom and two vertical sides. Gate to include three strands of barbed wire on top.

2.7 FITTINGS

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.

B. Post and Line Caps: Provide for each post.

1. Line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.

C. Rail and Brace Ends: Attach rails securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post.

D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following:

1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches(152 mm) long.

2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails in the fence line-to-line posts.



E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.

F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches(50 mm) shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.

G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.

H. Barbed Wire Arms: Pressed steel or cast iron, with clips, slots, or other means for attaching strands of barbed wire, integral with post cap; for each post, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Line posts with arms that accommodate top rail. 2. Corner arms at fence corner posts, unless extended posts are indicated. 3. Type I, single slanted arm.

I. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.

1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following:

a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch-(3.76-mm-) diameter wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.

2. Lashing Cable: 0.190-inch-diameter, type 304 stainless steel cable.

J. Finish:

1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft.(366 g /sq. m) zinc.

2.8 GATE OPERATORS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, weight, and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for Project conditions, with remote-control stations, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; coordinate electrical requirements with building electrical system.

1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator.

2. Provide operator with UL approval. 3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic feature. 4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening, permitting

universal installation.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG-1 and the following:

1. Voltage: 208-220 V.



2. Horsepower: 3/4. 3. Enclosure: Totally enclosed. 4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F(40 deg C) and at altitude of

3300 feet(1005 m) above sea level. 5. Service Factor: 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. 6. Phase: One.

D. Gate Operators: Concrete base/pad mounted and as follows:

1. Mechanical Slide Gate Operators:

a. Duty: Heavy duty, commercial/industrial. b. Gate Speed: Minimum 60 feet(18.2 m) per minute. c. Maximum Gate Weight: 800 lb(363 kg). d. Frequency of Use: 10 cycles per hour. e. Drive Type: Enclosed worm gear reducers, roller-chain drive.

E. Remote Controls: Electric controls separated from gate and motor and drive mechanism, with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure for pedestal mounting, and with space for additional optional equipment. Provide the following remote-control device(s), each gate shall have both types of controllers:

1. Digital Keypad Entry Unit: Multiple-programmable, code capability of not less than 500 possible individual codes, consisting of 4-digit codes.

a. Features: Capable of monitoring and auditing gate activity. b. Face-lighted unit with metal-keyed keypad fully visible at night.

2. Radio Control: Digital system consisting of code-compatible universal receiver for each gate, located where indicated, with remote antenna with coaxial cable and mounting brackets designed to operate gates. Provide 6 programmable transmitter(s) with multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of not less than 1000 codes per channel configured for the following functions:

a. Transmitters: Three-button operated, with open and close function. Each transmitter to have limited range so the gates can only be opened when in close proximity, coordinate range limits with Owner. Transmitters must be heavy duty industrial grade construction.

b. Channel Settings: Ten independent channel settings controlling separate receivers for operating all gates from each transmitter.

3. Vehicle Presence Detector: System including automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing and presence detector designed to hold gate open until traffic clears. Provide emitter/receiver detector with adjustable detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of a vehicle in gate pathway when infrared beam in zone pattern is interrupted, and to emit a signal activating the gate operator.

F. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop gate at fully retracted and fully extended positions.

G. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick-disconnect release of operator drive system of the following type of mechanism, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Design system so control circuit power is disconnected during manual operation.



H. Operating Features:

1. Digital Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting, changing, and adjusting control features with capability for monitoring and auditing gate activity. Provide unit that is isolated from voltage spikes and surges.

2. System Integration: With controlling circuit board capable of accepting any type of input from external devices.

3. Master/Slave Capability: Control stations designed and wired for gate pair operation. 4. Automatic Closing Timer: With adjustable time delay before closing. 5. Reversal Time Delay: Designed to protect gate system from shock load on reversal in

both directions. 6. Maximum Run Timer: Designed to prevent damage to gate system by shutting down

system if normal time to open gate is exceeded.

2.9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Materials: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, and potable water[ for ready-mixed concrete complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M].[ Measure, batch, and mix Project-site-mixed concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M.]

1. Concrete Mixes: Normal-weight concrete air entrained with not less than 3000-psi(20.7- MPa) compressive strength (28 days), 3-inch(75-mm) slump, and 1-inch(25-mm) maximum size aggregate.

B. Materials: Dry-packaged concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387 for normal-weight concrete mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.10 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

2.11 POLYMER FINISHES

A. PVC Fencing:

1. Where fence is called out to be PVC coated on the plans. Entire fence including fabric, frame, fittings and accessories and gates shall be PVC coated. Barbed wire and con-crete do not require a coating.

B. Supplemental Color Coating: In addition to specified metallic coatings for steel, provide fence components with polymer coating.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Tension Wire: PVC-coated wire complying with ASTM F 1664, Class 2b.



D. Metallic-Coated Steel Barbed Wire: PVC-coated wire complying with ASTM F 1665, Class 2b.

E. Metallic-Coated Steel Framing and Fittings: Comply with ASTM F 626 and ASTM F 1043 for polymer coating applied to exterior surfaces and, except inside cap shapes, to exposed interior surfaces.

1. Polymer Coating: Not less than 10-mil-(0.254-mm-) thick PVC finish.

F. Color: Black, complying with ASTM F 934.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by Architect.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet(152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.


A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified.

1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.

3.4 FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.

B. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts 14” diameter for line posts and 18” diameter for corner and gate posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches(50 mm) to allow covering with surface

material.



C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 30 degrees or more.

D. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet(3 m) o.c.

E. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.

1. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 6 feet(1.83 m) or higher, on fences with top rail and at 2/3 fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.

F. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-(3.05-mm-) diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches(610 mm) o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. 1. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches(150 mm) of bottom of fabric

and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.

G. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.

H. Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts.

I. Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of perimeter fencing and exhibit side of exhibit fencing of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch(25.4 mm) between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.

J. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches(380 mm) o.c.

K. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at 1 end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.

1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches(300 mm) o.c. and to braces at 24 inches(610 mm) o.c.

L. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.

M. Privacy Screening: Install screening in where indicated, securely locked in place.

3.5 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-



resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.6 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned and true to fence line and grade.

B. Excavation for Support Posts and Concrete Bases/Pads: Hand-excavate holes for bases/pads, in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate-operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.

C. Concrete Bases/Pads: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, depth not less than 12 inches(300 mm), dimensioned and reinforced according to gate-operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings.

D. Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions for grounding of electric-powered motors, controls, and other devices.

Retain first paragraph and subparagraphs below if fence other than that enclosing electrical distribution equipment is to be groundedWOOD FENCING AND GATES

A. Wood Fencing and Gates: Galvanized chain-link fence posts and framing with wood boards and nailers, see details. Install boards with (2) 1-3/4” long no. 10 stainless steel screws at each nailer

3.8 FENCE LASHING

A. Lash were called out on the drawings.

B. Lashing: Lace cable through every other opening in the fence material and around support at all ends and edges of fabric, including gates. Ends of cables to be swaged as specified.

C. Swage Changing of Cable:

1. Use only double barrel, copper swage sleeves provided by the cable manufacturer and of a size specified by the manufacturer for the wire diameter they are to be used for.

2. For terminations, cable is to be passes through the hardware aperture twice while crossed over, forming an overhand loop. Use two swage sleeves spaced 1/4 inch apart for each terminal.

3. For in-line connections, use three swage sleeves spaced 1/4 inch apart on parallel cable. 4. For tangential splices, use two swage sleeves spaced 1/4 inch apart. 5. Crimp all swage sleeves using a tool specified by the cable/ sleeve manufacturer and

sized appropriately for the sleeves used.

6. Apply crimps or swages to sleeves according to manufacturer=s specification and in all

applications allow ends of cable to extend between 1/8 inch and 1/4 inch beyond the end of swage sleeves.



3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Automatic Gate Operator: Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Adjust operators, controls, safety devices, and limit switches. 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

C. Lubricate hardware, gate operator, and other moving parts.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."



LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 1

SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Hydroseeding.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 2 Section "Backfilling" for filling and backfilling, and rough grading.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

F. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.



B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.

D. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:



1. Seeded Turf: 30 days from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon).

a. Hulled if planting when soil temperatures are above 65 deg. b. Un-hulled if planting when soil temperatures are below 65 deg.

2. Shade: Fescue

3. Winter Rye (Lolium multiflorum).

a. Mix winter rye with un-hulled when soil temperatures are below 65 deg.

2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch(12.5-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

B. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

2.4 MULCHES

A. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.



B. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil

moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches(100 mm) Remove stones larger than 1 inch(25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 4 inches(100 mm). Apply soil amendments and

fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches(100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. Unless existing tree roots are present, then do not disturb, top dress with 2” of planting soil.

3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch(25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.



D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch(13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two-step process. Apply first slurry coat

at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 500-lb/acre(5.2-kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch (hydromulching) at a rate of 1000 lb/acre(10.4 kg/92.9 sq. m).

3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches(100 mm).

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch(25 mm) per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF



A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft.(0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches(125 by 125 mm).

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or

properly incidental to placing of cast-in-place concrete slabs, building members, and MEP equipment pads as described herein or as shown on the Drawings, including but not limited to:

1. Concrete mix designs. 2. Installation of items to be built-in formwork or embedded in concrete but furnished by

other trades, including metal anchors, anchor slots, reglets, hangers, supports, ties, inserts, bolts, corner guards, and sleeves.

3. Cast-in-place concrete, with formwork, under slab vapor barrier, reinforcing, accessories, appurtenances, finishing and curing required to complete concrete work.

4. Grouting under structural steel base plates. 5. Foundation for columns, walls, and slabs on grade. 6. Curbs, equipment pads, walks, and pre-moulded expansions joints.

B. Examine the drawings for Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical work. These subcontractors

shall furnish and set sleeves or box forms required for openings. General Contractor shall use care in placing reinforcement and pouring concrete so as not to displace such sleeves or boxes.

1. All slots, chases, recesses, or openings required, which are not formed by sleeves or

boxes shall be provided. When the work of other contractors is completed, the annulus space (excess part of the openings) shall be completely closed with concrete.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements 2. Section 04100 – Mortar and Masonry Grout 3. Section 04320 – Unit Masonry System 4. Section 05120 - Structural Steel Framing 5. Electrical and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for sleeves, conduit, and other

items embedded in concrete. 6. The terms Testing Firm, Inspection Firm, Testing Laboratory or any combination of these

words shall refer to the firm hired and paid for by the Owner.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 1 Sections applicable to the Work of this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Where standards or requirements of this Section are in conflict with those noted on the Contract Drawings, or the Building Code, the more stringent requirements shall govern. Bring all conflicts and discrepancies to the attention of the Architect and do not start work until such conflicts and discrepancies are clarified. Failure to do so will not relieve the General Contractor from performing the Work correctly at no additional expense to the Owner.



B. Testing Laboratory Services:

1. Test results shall meet or exceed established standards. A technician from the Testing

Laboratory must be present during all operations.

C. Evaluation and Acceptance:

1. Codes and Standards: The Work described in this Section, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or herein specified, shall be governed by the latest editions of the following codes or specifications approved by authorities having jurisdiction. a. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1) TP 23, “Proposed Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly

Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying”

b. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1) 211.1, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete” 2) 214, “Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of

Concrete” 3) 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings” 4) 302, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” 5) 304, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and

Placing Concrete” 6) 305, “Hot Weather Concreting” 7) 306, “Cold Weather Concreting” 8) 309, “Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete” 9) 311, “ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection” 10) 315, “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete

Structures” 11) 318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete” 12) 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork” 13) Keep one copy of “Manual of Concrete Practice” at job site at all times.

c. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1) A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2) A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,

Standard Quality 3) A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products 4) A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for

Concrete Reinforcement 5) A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement 6) A704, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for

Concrete Reinforcement 7) C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate 8) C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and

Sawed Beams of Concrete 9) C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mix Concrete 10) C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 11) C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement



12) C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 13) C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures 14) C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete 15) C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 16) C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements 17) C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete 18) C979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete 19) C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Non-Shrink) 20) C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete 21) E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 22) E1643, Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used

in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs 23) E1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs 24) F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive

Resilient Flooring

d. American Welding Society (AWS) 1) D1.4 Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel

e. Federal Specification (FS)

1) FF-S-325 2) QQ-Z-325C

f. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

1) “Reinforced Concrete – A Manual of Standard Practice” 2) “Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars” 3) “Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports”

D. Source Quality Control:

1. Concrete production facilities shall meet the requirement for certification by the National

Ready Mixed Concrete Association. All ready mix concrete trucks proposed for use on the project shall meet the requirements of NRMCA, Certification of Ready Mix Concrete Production Facilities.

2. Concrete batchers shall be completely interlocked semi-automatic or automatic batchers, as defined by the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau.

3. Concrete batchers shall have graphic, digital, or photographic recorders, which shall register both empty balance and total weight (or volume of water or admixture) of each batched material, time to the nearest minute, date, identification of batch, and numerical count of each batch. Copies of the record shall be furnished to the Inspection and Testing Laboratory.

4. The Inspection and Testing Laboratory shall provide concrete batch plant inspection as follows:

a. Provide a qualified inspector with necessary equipment and apparatus to inspect

weighing and batching of controlled concrete at batch plant on a random basis, approximately once daily as the concrete is being placed on this project.



b. Make certain that materials and batch equipment used are in accordance with requirements of Specifications.

c. Check for adjustment in batch weights to compensate for variations in moisture content.

d. Submit certification of weights used in loads of acceptable concrete which has been batched during plant inspection time.

E. Concrete Mix Design Criteria:

1. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.3, and Proportioning on

the basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures. 2. Submit the proposed mix designs for each concrete mix type proposed. 3. Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall be in

accordance with ACI 318. 4. If trial mixes are used as the basis for the proposed mix design, mold and cure test

cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. Do not place concrete on project until laboratory reports and results of confirmation cylinder tests have been evaluated by the Inspection and Testing Laboratory and results indicate that proposed mixes will develop required strengths.

5. Inspection and Testing Laboratory shall furnish a written evaluation of each proposed concrete mix design and each evaluation shall be submitted by the General Contractor.

6. Check mix designs and revise if necessary wherever changes are made in aggregates or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of concrete. Water content shall be the minimum to produce workable mix. The water content shall be verified in the field by use of the Microwave Test.

F. Pre-Pour Observations

1. The Engineer shall be notified at least 48 working hours prior to the Contractors scheduled concrete placement so that Engineer will have the opportunity to make pre-pour observations. Contractor assumes all liability and risk for failure to do so.

2. When proper notification has been make. Engineer will conduct pre-pour observations between 2 and 12 hours prior to schedule concrete placement. Prior to observation, the following minimum requirements shall be complete: a. Formwork in-place and secured.

b. All reinforcement work in-place, tied, properly supported with chairs. (no brick or block)

c. Anchor bolts and associated templates in-place and secured.

d. Excavation void of water.

e. All trash and debris removed.

f. Pre-pour inspection has been completed by Inspection an Testing Firm.

3. In such case a pre-pour observation is canceled due to any reason other than weather, after the Engineer’s representative has left the office, Contractor shall reimburse Engineer for the wasted trip. In such case that pre-pour observation reveals that the Contractor has significant items incomplete and was not truly ready, Contractor shall reimburse Engineer for the wasted trip.



4. Contractor shall schedule operations such that concrete placement does not result in more than the following number of Engineer’s pre-pour observations: a. Pile caps = 1 per 10 pile caps

b. Grade beams = 1 per 200 lin. Ft.

c. Ground Floor Slab = 1 per 5,000 sq. ft.

d. Elevated slabs = 1 per 4,000 sq. ft.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix designs, including confirmation cylinder test results, in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.3, Proportioning on the basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures. Submit mix designs to Inspection and Testing Laboratory for evaluation a minimum of 14 days prior to placing concrete. Key requirements:

1. Combined aggregate gradation. 2. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water. 3. Type, color and dosage of integral coloring compounds, where applicable. 4. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 5. Any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or

finishing techniques to achieve finished product. 6. Exact locations and/or building components where the concrete will be placed.

B. Complete test data for trial mixes or a complete summary of previous project test results for mix

design based on standard deviation analysis must be included. C. Provide duplicate delivery tickets for each load of ready-mix concrete delivered to site, in

accordance with ASTM C94. Show batch weights on each ticket. D. Provide mill test reports on an as-used basis for each type and brand of cementitious material

used. E. Provide certification from the Inspection Firm indicating underslab vapor retarder compliance

with specification requirements. F. Provide product data for each accessories item specified but necessarily not listed above which

are required for a complete installation, including, but not limited to reinforcing, chairs, admixtures, stains and color pigments, grouts, sealers, vapor retarders and barriers, water stops, epoxy adhesives, curing compounds and anchors.

G. Provide Shop Drawings for all reinforcing steel. Show bending diagrams, splicing and laps of

rods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcement and accessories. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. Mix concrete a minimum of 70 revolutions of transit mix drum at mixing speed. A minimum of 40 revolutions shall be at the production plant.

B. Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15 minutes.



C. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant.

D. Store bagged cement on platforms off ground. Protect stored cement against the elements. Handle and store fine and coarse aggregate separately in manner to prevent intrusion of foreign material or segregation of the material. Protect all reinforcement until used. Do not use any hardened cement.

E. Mild steel reinforcement at the time of placement of concrete shall be clean and free of all loose

dirt, form oil, and other coatings affecting bond. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Hot Weather Concreting:

1. Follow ACI 301 and ACI 305. 2. Provide water-reducing retarding admixture conforming to ASTM C494, Type D when

necessary to retard initial set. The admixture shall be dispensed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Maximum concrete temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at time of placement.

a. Concrete with temperatures above 90 degrees F shall be placed only if a high range water reducer (superplasticizer) is added to the mix as directed by the Testing Laboratory to maintain the specified slump during placement.

B. Cold Weather Concreting: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength

which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. Follow ACI 301 and ACI 306. 2. When ambient temperature at site is below 45 degrees F or is expected to fall to that

temperature within ensuing 24 hours, heat water and/or aggregate prior to adding to mix so that temperature of concrete will be between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F at time of placement.

3. Maintain temperature of deposited concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for minimum of seven (7) days after placing.

4. Add the specified non-corrosive accelerator for all floor concrete placed at air temperatures below 50 degrees F.

5. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature is forecasted to be below 35 degrees F at anytime within 7 days after concrete placement.

C. Temperature Changes: Maintain changes in concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, but

in no case exceed change of 5 degrees F per hour or 25 degrees F in any 24 hour period. D. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 48 hours without precautions to prevent

exposure of concrete and workmen to exhaust gasses containing carbon dioxide and/or carbon monoxide.

E. Admixtures intended to accelerate hardening of concrete or produce higher than normal

strength at early periods will not be permitted unless approved by the Project Manager. The use of calcium chloride is specifically prohibited.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Refer to Section 01310 – Project Management and Coordination



1.9 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers named within this Section are approved for use on the Project for the product for which they are specified. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing the product specified and meet or exceed the specifications for that product. Substitution of products must be in accordance with the Contract.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Formwork:

1. General: General Contractor may use any of the following formwork materials as long as material meets the following and will not stain, or impart any undesirable texture, i.e. wood grain, where such texture would be objectionable in an exposed location. a. Wood Forms:

1) Plywood: PS 1, Douglas Fir or Spruce species. 2) Medium Density Overlay (MDO): One (1) side grade; sound undamaged

sheets with clean, true edges. 3) Lumber: Southern Yellow Pine species; No. 2 grade, with grade stamp

clearly visible.

b. Pre-Fabricated Forms:

1) Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gauge matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

2) Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

c. Form Liner: Any material recommended by manufacturer to impart finish which will

exhibit the finish or design characteristics, i.e. smooth, textured, ribbed, etc. detailed by the Architect for exposed locations as shown or required and capable of being stripped from complex designs without damaging the finish or design. Form liner shall be as manufactured by Symons Corporation, Greenstreak, Inc. or Project Manager approved equal.

d. Self-expanding corkboard expansion joint fillers should conform to ASTM D1752 for exterior work. Joint fillers shall extend full depth of slab or joint and be of thickness and lengths indicated on drawings.

e. At interior grade beams and at interior face of perimeter grade beams of slabs, earth-forms shall be allowed.

B. Metal Reinforcement:

1. Bars:



a. General: Conform to ACI 315, latest edition.

b. Comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60.

c. Number 3 bars comply with ASTM A615, Grade 40

2. Welded Steel Wire Fabric (Mesh): Not permitted in structural concrete, unless approved by Structural Engineer

C. Concrete, General:

1. Ready-mixed concrete, ASTM C94 2. Comply with ACI 318. 3. Concrete must be reviewed by the Testing Firm and Engineer through design mix and

cylinder test of testing laboratory. 4. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer, use one (1) brand of cement throughout the

work where finished surface will be exposed to view. 5. Strength: Refer to Paragraph 2.3, A.

D. Concrete Materials:

1. Cement:

a. Portland Cement, Type I, conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150.

b. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be 8 percent to 18 percent for large top size aggregates (1-1/2 in.) or 8 percent to 22 percent for smaller top size aggregates (1 in. or 3/4 in.) retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100.

2. Fly ash: No more than 20% of total cement content.

E. Aggregate:

1. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33; clean, hard, durable, uncoated, natural and manufactured

sand, free of silt, loam or clay. 2. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33; hard, durable, uncoated, crushed stone; gradation in

accordance with Size No. 467 for piers and concrete footings and Size No. 67 for all other concrete. Maximum aggregate size in accordance with ACI 318.

3. Grading shall be in accordance with “Standard Method for Fine Analysis of Sieve and Coarse Aggregates” (ASTM C136).

F. Water: ASTM C94, Paragraph 4.1.3; potable, clean and free from oil, acid and injurious amount

of vegetable matter, alkalies, and other impurities.

G. Admixtures:

1. Cement-dispersing, water-reducing types. Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A or D, and shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as determined by the Inspection and Testing Laboratory. Admixture shall not discolor concrete or in any way affect the appearance of the concrete.



a. High-range water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C494, Type F or G shall be used as required and shall be one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal:

1) Eucon 37 (Type F), Eucon 537 (Type G) by The Euclid Chemical Company 2) Rheobuild 1000 (Type F), Rheobuild 716 (Type G) by Master Builders 3) Sikament 300 (Type F), Sikament 86 (Type G) by Sika Chemical Corp. 4) WRDA-19 (Type F), Daracem 100 (Type G) by W.R. Grace

2. An air-entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C260 shall be used as required on the

Drawings and shall be one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal: a. Air-Mix or AEA-92 by The Euclid Chemical Company

b. Sika Aer by Sika Corporation

c. MB-VR or MB-AE by Master Builders

3. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.

4. Certification: Written conformance to the above-mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of admixtures will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Project Manager, the Architect and Structural Engineer.

5. See Section 033050 for crystalline waterproofing admixture requirements for Type II concrete mixes.

H. Non-Shrink Cement Grout:

1. The non-shrink grout shall be a factory pre-mixed grout and shall conform to ASTM

C1107, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).” In addition, the grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent bearing under a 4 foot x 4 foot base plate. Provide one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal:

a. NS Grout by The Euclid Chemical Company

b. Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.

c. Horn Non-Corrosive Non-Shrink Grout by Tamms Industries

d. Duragrout by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

e. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders

f. SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.

g. Sonogrout 10K by Sonneborn

h. 588 Grout by W. R. Meadows, Inc.

i. US SPEC GP Grout by US Mix Products Company

2. High Flow Grout: Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required, use high flow grout. The factory pre-mixed grout shall conform to ASTM C1107, “Standard Specification for Packages Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).” In addition, the



grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent bearing under a 18 inch x 36 inch base plate. Provide one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal:

a. Hi-Flow Grout by The Euclid Chemical Company

b. Crystex by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

c. Masterflow 928 by Master Builders

d. CG-86 Grout by W. R. Meadows, Inc.

e. US SPEC MP Grout by US Mix Products Company

I. Non-Oxidizing Metallic Hardener:

1. Non-Oxidizing Metallic Floor Hardener: The specified non-oxidizing metallic floor hardener shall be formulated, processed and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturer’s owned and controlled factory. The hardener shall be a mixture of specially processed non-rusting aggregate, selected portland cement and necessary plasticizing agents. Product shall be Diamond-Plate by The Euclid Chemical Company or Project Manager approved equal.

J. Evaporation Retardant:

1. Evaporation Retardant shall be a thin, continuous film which prevents rapid moisture loss

from the concrete surface. For use when concrete operations must be performed in direct sun, wind, high temperatures, or for relative humidity. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal: a. Eucobar by The Euclid Chemical Company

b. Confilm by Master Builders

c. Evapre by W. R. Meadows, Inc.

d. US SPEC Monofilm ER by US Mix Products Company.

e. E-Con by L& M Construction Chemicals

K Sealer/Densifier: Provide “Euco Diamond Hard” by The Euclid Chemical Company, “Sealhard” by L&M Construction Chemicals, or equal by Master Builders, Sika Corp., Sonneborn, US SPEC, or Project Manager approved equal.

L. Chemical Hardener/Dustproofer: Provide “Surfhard” by The Euclid Chemical Company,

“Chemhard” by L&M Construction Chemicals, or equal by Master Builders, Sika Corp., Sonneborn, US SPEC, or Project Manager approved equal.

M. Curing Compound: dissipating resin type, which chemically breaks down after approximately

eight (8) weeks. Membrane forming compound shall meet ASTM C309, Types 1 and 1D Class B, water based, VOC/AIM Compliant. Provide “Kurez DR VOX” by The Euclid Chemical Company, “Cure R” by L&M Construction Chemicals, “1100 Clear” by W. R. Meadows, Inc., US SPEC “Maxcure Resin Clear” by US Mix Products Company, or equal by Master Builders, Sika Corp., BASF, or Project Manager approved equal.



N. Curing and Sealing Compound: high solids acrylic copolymer emulsion blend. Membrane forming compound shall meet ASTM C1315, Type 1 Class B. Provide “Super Rez-Seal” by The Euclid Chemical Company, “Dress & Seal” by L&M Construction Chemicals, “VOCOMP 25 1315” by W. R. Meadows, Inc., US SPEC “CS-25-1315” by US Mix Products Company, or equal by Master Builders, Sika Corp., BASF, or Project Manager approved equal.

O. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881, two (2) component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive

compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal:

1. Euco #452 Epoxy System or Euco #620 Epoxy System by The Euclid Chemical

Company 2. Sikadur Hi-Mod by Sika Corp. 3. Rezi-Weld 1000 by W. R. Meadows, Inc. 4. US SPEC Maxibond 2500 by US Mix Products Company. 5. Epobond by L& M Construction Chemicals.

P. Underslab Vapor Retarders and Barriers:

1. Vapor Retarder Membrane:

a. Requirements:

1) Class: ASTM E1745, Class A. 2) Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E1745, less than 0.010 perms maximum. 3) Tensile Strength: ASTM E154 (Section 9, Average), 45.0 pounds per inch,

minimum. 4) Puncture Resistance: ASTM D1709 (Method B), 2400 grams, minimum. 5) Thickness: 15 mils minimum.

b. Provide compatible seam taping and pipe boots or sealing mastic in accordance

with manufacturer’s requirements.

c. Provide proof of compliance to Project Manager at time of delivery of materials.

d. Provide the following under entire slab, unless noted otherwise:

1) Stego Industries, LLC “Stego-Wrap 15-mil”, or approved equal

2. Below Grade Waterproofing: Provide below grade waterproofing at vertical walls below grade and beneath base slab in accordance with Section 033050.

Q. Miscellaneous Structural Metals Associated with Structural Concrete:

1. Structural steel pieces, including miscellaneous structural metals placed in concrete,

exposed to weather, in permanent contact with soil, or accessible to salt intrusion shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

2. Structural steel pieces embedded in concrete shall conform to ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

3. Welding of inserts, anchors and other steel pieces used in conjunction with structural concrete shall conform to AWS Dl.4.

4. Welding of reinforcing steel used in conjunction with structural concrete shall conform to AWS Dl.4.

5. Headed stud anchors shall conform to ASTM A108, minimum tensile strength 60,000 PSI.

6. Concrete expansion anchors shall be wedge-type anchors, meeting the requirements of FS FF-S-325, Group 11, Type 4, Class 1, plated in accordance with FS QQ-Z-325C,



Type 11, Class 3. Size and location shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Products shall be by Hilti Corp., Powers Fasteners, Inc. or Project Manager approved equal.

R. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories:

1. Form ties: Adjustable length and type which will not leave holes larger than 1 inch in

diameter in face of concrete. Ties shall be such that when forms are removed, no metal will be within 1 inch of the finished concrete surface. The holes must be patched.

2. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages, Fasteners: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

3. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture.

4. Chairs, Bolsters, and Spacers: Heavy-duty steel sized to support all reinforcing steel to proper height and use sand cushion pads beneath to prevent chairs/bolsters/spacers from sinking into fill below slab. Brick, block, or plastic chairs shall not be used.

5. Waterstops (except for use in concrete walls): a. Ribbed flat 3/16 inch by six (6) inch with 1/8 inch ribs, rated for 75 foot of head

pressure. Provide factory made corner fittings weld splices with thermostatically controlled heating iron. Style No. 782 by Greenstreak, Inc., or Project Manager approved equal.

b. General Contractor’s Material Option: Specially formulated preformed joint sealant that provides a lasting, watertight bond to both fresh and cured concrete surfaces. Synko-Flex Preformed Plastic Adhesive Waterstop and Synko-Flex Primer manufactured by Synko-Flex Products, Division of Henry Company, Houston, Texas; (713) 671-9502 or Project Manager approved equal.

6. Waterstops for use in concrete wall joints and pipe penetrations in concrete walls or

slabs: See Section 031513. 7. Carton Void Forms: If shown or required, shall be wax impregnated cardboard box

shaped, with 1/8 inch thick tempered hardboard for top plane. 8. Corners: Chamfer, wood strip type; one (1) inch x one (1) inch size; maximum possible

lengths. 9. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gauge thick, foam filled, release tape sealed

slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. 10. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gauge thick, longest possible lengths, with

alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

11. Bonding Agent: Acrylic latex emulsion type as recommended for bonding new concrete to old concrete.

12. Integral Color Pigment (If shown or required): Mineral oxide, lightfast, lime-proof, water-resistant type conforming to ASTM C979. Color(s) shall be as selected by Project Manager from manufacturer’s standard color line. Provide one (1) of the following or Project Manager approved equal: a. ChemSystems, Inc.

b. Davis Colors

c. New Riverside Ochre Co., Inc.

d. L.M. Scofield Company

13. Color Stain (If shown or required): A chemically reactive stain, designed for adding variegated color to new or old concrete. Color(s) shall be as selected from



manufacturer’s standard color line. Provide Lithochrome Chemstain by L.M. Scofield Company or Project Manager approved equal.

14. Joint Sealants: Refer to Section 079200, Building Sealants 2.3 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Strength: Concrete is classified and specified by Type and compressive strength days. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, strengths shall be as follows:

1. All concrete including grade beams, walls, footings, slabs, and pads: at least 5 1/2 sacks

of cement, compressive strength of (f’c) of 4,000 psi at 28 days age, normal weight. 2. Strength recommendations on Structural Drawings supersede when they are greater

than specified here. The stricter provision shall apply. B. Concrete permanently exposed to freezing and thawing shall contain an air-entraining

admixture to produce 4.5 percent - 7.5 percent of air by volume of concrete.

C. Proportions: Proportions of cement, aggregate, admixture and water to attain required plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.3, Proportioning on the basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures. Do not make changes in proportions without submitting proposed changes to Inspection and Testing Laboratory for evaluation.

1. Trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies suitable for the work shall be made

based on ACI 211. 1, using at least three (3) different water-cement ratios which will produce a range of strengths encompassing those required for this project.

2. Trial mixes shall be designed to produce a slump within 3/4 inch of the maximum permitted, and for air-entrained concrete, within 0.5 percent of maximum allowable air content. The temperature of concrete used in trial batches shall not exceed the maximum temperature specified.

3. For each water-cement ratio, at least three confirmation compression test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C192. Confirmation cylinders shall be tested at seven (7) and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39.

4. From the results of the 28 day confirmation tests, a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between the water-cement ratio and compressive strengths. From this curve, the water-cement ratio to be used in the concrete shall be selected to produce the average strength required.

5. The cement content and mixture proportions to be used shall be such that this water-cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is the maximum permitted. Control in the field shall be based upon maintenance of proper cement, water content, slump and air content.

6. Mix designs furnished by the concrete supplier, shall be based on the standard deviation analysis of previous test records meeting the requirements of Section 5.3.1 - Standard deviation of ACI 318. These mixes will be accepted in lieu of trial mixtures described in paragraphs above.

a. Temperature of concrete in test data shall be within 5 degrees F of maximum

temperature specified for this project.

b. Strengths indicated in test data shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.3.

c. The specified strength of concrete used in supporting test data shall vary no more than 500 PSI plus or minus from that specified for this project.



d. The Testing Laboratory shall keep a strength and standard deviation record of all concrete for the duration of the project as specified in this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Inserts: Give the various trades and subcontractors ample notification and opportunity to furnish all anchors, nailers, pipes, conduits, boxes, inserts, thimbles, sleeves, frame vents, wires, supports, or other items required to be built into the concrete by the provisions of the Drawings or of the Specification governing the work of such trades and subcontractors, or as it may be necessary for the proper execution of their work. Obtain suitable templates or instructions for the installation of such items which are required to be placed in the forms.

B. Install under-slab vapor barrier as instructed by manufacturer in accordance with ASTM E1643.

Penetrations shall be sealed to maintain integrity of barrier. Tape around all openings and seal all penetrations as instructed by the barrier manufacturer. Grade stakes shall not be driven through the vapor barrier. Avoid punctures during reinforcement and concrete placement.

C. Slump:

1. Concrete not containing a high range water reducing admixture shall not be placed when

its plasticity, as measured by slump test, is outside the following limits: a. Footings: 6 inches maximum, 4 inches minimum

b. All other Structural Concrete: 5 inches maximum, 3 inches minimum

c. Pavement: 4 inches maximum. Coordinate slump with requirements in Section 02721, Cement Concrete Pavement.

d. Slump drop not to exceed 2 inches when pumped.

2. Concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture shall not be placed when its plasticity, as measured by slump test, is outside the following limits: a. Prior to addition high range water reducer: 3 inches maximum, 2 inches minimum.

b. After addition of high range water reducer: 9 inches maximum.

D. Classes or Types of Concrete and Usage:

Type Locations f’c Special Additives Color Weight I Slabs, Footings,

Pedestals 4,000 psi As indicated herein Normal Normal



II CMU Wall Fill (grout)

2,500 psi As required Normal 115 pcf to 125 pcf

E. Mixing:

1. Transit-mixed concrete conforming to the requirements of ASTM C94 and ACI 304 shall

be used in lieu of concrete mixed at the job site. Concrete shall not be transported or used in any case after a period in excess of 90 minutes has elapsed after the introduction of water into the mixer.

2. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump of concrete is prohibited. Add water only at the direction of the Testing Laboratory. No water shall be added which increases the water cement ratio of the concrete in excess of the water cement ratio indicated on the approved mix design. At the direction of the Inspection and Testing Laboratory the addition of high range water reducing admixture may be used to retemper concrete.

3. The agency supplying transit-mixed concrete shall have a plant of sufficient capacity and adequate transportation facilities, to assure continuous delivery at the rate required. The frequency of deliveries to the site of the work must be such as to provide for placing the concrete continuously throughout any one (1) pour.

F. Conveying Concrete: Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods

which will prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. Concrete to be conveyed by pumping shall be submitted to the Inspection and Testing Laboratory for evaluation for each class of concrete specified before being used. Test cylinders for pumped concrete shall be taken at the discharge end of the pumping equipment.

G. Equipment for cutting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size

and design as to assure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation of the materials. The use of gravity-flow or aluminum chutes or conveyors for transporting concrete horizontally will not be permitted.

H. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: if not specifically noted, install all materials and

accessories per manufacturer’s instructions as if noted here in full. I. Extend underslab vapor barrier continuously under entire slab, slab turn downs, vertical face of

grade beams and footings to completely protect concrete adjacent to earth. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643.

1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete

placement. 2. Lap vapor barrier over footings and/or seal to foundation walls. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape. 4. Seal all penetrations (with pipe boots) per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent

utilities. 6. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6

inches and taping all sides with tape. J. Bars shall be supported on chairs or spacers on metal hangers, accurately placed and securely

fastened to steel reinforcement in place. No wood or clay brick will be permitted inside forms. K. All reinforcing shall be set in place, spaced, and rigidly and securely tied or wired at all splices

and at all crossing points and intersections.



L. Minimum center to center distance between parallel bars shall be in accordance with the details on the drawings. Where not shown, the clear spacing shall be 1-1/2 times the bar diameter but never less than 1-1/2 inches.

M. Lap of splices where shown otherwise and noted on the drawings shall be a minimum of 32 bar

diameters but never less than 12 inches. N. Except where shown otherwise on the drawings, minimum concrete coverage for reinforcing

steel shall be:

1. 3 inches…where concrete is placed against earth 2. 1-1/2 inches…over column ties 3. 1-1/2 inches…for #5 and smaller bars in formed walls 4. 2 inches…for all bars larger than #5 in formed walls 5. 1 inch…for #11 and smaller bars in suspended slabs 6. 1-1/2 inches…for all bars larger than #11 in suspended slabs

3.2 CONCRETE CONTROL AND TESTING

A. Inspection and Testing laboratory services shall be in accordance with Section 014000, Quality Requirements.

B. Should the strength of concrete fall below the minimum, then additional tests, including load

tests, may be required. These tests, if required, shall be made at the General Contractor's expense and shall be in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACI 318. If tests do not meet the applicable requirements, then the structure, or any part of the structure, shall be removed and replaced at the General Contractor's expense. Alternatively, Engineer may elect to invoke paragraph E. below.

C. Any concrete testing requested by the General Contractor for early formwork or shoring

removal, etc., shall be at the General Contractor's expense.

D. Do not permit placement of concrete having a measured slump outside limits given on Drawings or Specifications, except when approved by Engineer.

E. If Engineer elects to accept concrete with reduced strength or concrete does not meet other requirements, the Contractor shall provide a cost credit to the project based on the following calculation

A x B [1-(C/D)²] + E= F

Where:

A= yards of concrete used in the entire element or group which the sample represents. (For

example if the sample represents 50 cubic yards of poured concrete, then A=50). B= $120/cy (This is the established concrete cost.) C= Actual result (For example, 3500 psi) D= Required result (For example, 400 psi) E= $1000 (This is the pre-established investigative cost borne by the Design Team per

incident.) F= Total Cost Reduction credit to the Owner

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE



A. Place concrete in reasonably uniform layers, approximately horizontal, and not more than 18 inches deep, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. The piling up of concrete in the forms in such a manner as to cause the separation or loss of any of its ingredients will not be permitted. Concrete which has partially set or hardened shall not, under any circumstances, be deposited in the work. All slabs shall be placed for full thickness in one operation without change in proportions, screeded to proper elevation, and floated. Dusting of surfaces with cement is prohibited.

B. Place concrete in the forms as nearly in its final position as is practical to avoid rehandling.

Exercise special care to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement with concrete. Remove any hardened or partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on the forms or reinforcement before the work proceeds. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the respective member of section, except as hereinafter specified.

C. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than five (5) feet. Where longer

drops are necessary, use a chute, tremie, or other acceptable conveyance to assist the concrete into place without separation. Do not pour directly into any excavations where water is standing.

D. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate same by means of mechanical

vibrators and suitable hand tools, so manipulated as to work the mixture well into all parts and corners of the forms, and entirely around the reinforcement and inserts. Mechanical vibrators shall maintain frequencies in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 309. Table 5.1.4, and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the job site during all concrete placing operations.

E. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete

which has partially or entirely set, the surface of the latter shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter, scum and laitance. The

specified or an Project Manager approved bonding agent or epoxy adhesive shall be used. F. Construction Joints: Except as otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings, each concrete

member shall be considered as a single unit of operation, and all concrete for the same shall be placed continuously in order that such unit will be monolithic in construction. Should construction joints prove to be absolutely unavoidable, same shall be located at or near the midpoints of spans. Additional construction joints shall not be made under any circumstances without prior review by the Project Manager.

G. Protect all freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water, etc. Do not allow the

concrete to dry out from the time it is deposited in the forms until the expiration of the curing period.

H. Imperfect or damaged work, or any material damaged or determined to be defective before

final completion and acceptance of the entire job, shall be satisfactorily replaced at the General Contractor's expense and shall be in conformity with all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a manner as not to impair the appearance or strength of the structure in any way.

I. Cleaning: Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings and any

rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in clean and perfect condition, satisfactory to the Project Manager. Sweep with an ordinary broom and remove all mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, mud, etc.

3.4 FLOOR AND SLAB FINISHES



A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor

topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated.

1. After placing slabs, surface shall be leveled to an FF 18 - FL 15 tolerance. Slope surfaces

uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other

finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until

ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Surface shall achieve an FF 30 - FL 20 tolerance.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system.

1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and to a FF35/ FL30 tolerance (FL17 for elevated slabs). Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and

ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Project Manager before application. A sample panel is required.

E. Liquid Densifier/Sealer: Apply liquid densifier/sealer on exposed interior floors subject to vehicular abrasion and as indicated on the Drawings. Compound shall be mechanically scrubbed into the surface in strict accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and just prior to completion of construction.

F. Non-Oxidizing Metallic Floor Hardener: All slabs, in the loading dock area, or other areas

noted on the Drawings, shall receive an application of the non-oxidizing, metallic floor hardener applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to produce a smooth dense finish.

3.5 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Refer to Structural Drawings for column base plates and other structural grouting requirements. B. Non-shrink grout shall be mixed only in such quantities as are needed for immediate use. No

retempering shall be permitted and materials which have been mixed for a period exceeding 30 minutes shall in no case be used upon any portion of the work.

C. Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required use the specified high flow grout.

This grout shall be used for all base plates larger than ten (10) square feet.



D. For every 1/3 cubic yards of grout placed, grout strength shall be tested with a set of cubes as

follows:

1. A set of cubes shall consist of three cubes to be tested seven (7) days, and three (3) cubes to be tested at 28 days.

2. Test cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with ASTM C1107, Section 12.5, with the exception that the grout should be restrained from expansion by a top plate.

3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. All concrete shall be kept continuously moist and above 50 degrees F for seven days. When high early strength concrete is used this temperature requirement may be lowered to three (3) days.

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.

1. Provide specified curing compound to exposed interior slabs. This curing compound

must be dissipating or easily removed in the cleaning process prior to the application of any liquid densifier/ sealer.

C. Forms and shoring shall remain in place for at least 4 days after pouring concrete. No loads form materials, equipment, or permanent structure shall be placed on new concrete until at least 7 days after concrete placement and at least 75% of required 28-day compressive strength has been achieved.

3.7 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Imperfect or damaged work, or any material damaged or determined to be defective before

final completion and acceptance of the entire job, shall be satisfactorily replaced at the General Contractor’s expense and shall be in conformity with all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a manner as not to impair the appearance or strength of the structure in any way.

3.8 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish

resulting therefrom, shall be removed from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in clean and perfect condition, satisfactory to the Project Manager. Sweep with an ordinary broom and remove all mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, mud, etc.

3.9 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS A. With prior approval of the Project Manager, as to method and procedure, all repairs of defective

areas shall conform to ACI 301, Section 5.3.7, using the polymer repair mortars and/or epoxy adhesives furnished by The Euclid Chemical Company,

Sika Chemical Corp., or Project Manager approved equal.



3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

A. Inspection and Testing Laboratory services shall be in accordance with Section 014000, Quality Requirements.



MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04100 - 1

SECTION 04100 – MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Colored mortar and grout for masonry. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Quality Requirements: Section 01400.

B. Unit Masonry System: Section 04320 - Installation of mortar and grout. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. D. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. E. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. F. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. G. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. H. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. I. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. J. IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) - Recommended Practices and

Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include design mix, indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is

to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements

of ASTM C270. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.



1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign

matter. 1.7 ENVIORNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) or

maximum 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against

dampness, freezing and free of foreign matter. C. Masonry Cement: NOT PERMITTED

D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type SA

F. Calcium Chloride: NOT PERMITTED

2.2 MORTAR COLOR A. Mortar Color: As selected by RTA from samples submitted by the Contractor. Color range to be

“blonde” or “beige” to match brick color. 2.3 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar For Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the proportion

specification. 2.4 MORTOR AND GROUT MIXING



A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for

immediate use. B. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM A76. C. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. D. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and

coloration. E. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. F. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. Do not re-temper

mortar after two hours of mixing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. After inspection of concrete grout spaces by Engineer, plug cleanout holes with masonry units.

Brace against wet grout pressure. B. Install mortar and grout in accordance with Section 04320. C. Work grout into cores to eliminate voids. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.



UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Concrete brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.


1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit

masonry.

C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:



1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Reinforcing bars. 5. Joint reinforcement. 6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.

2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.




A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches(600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F(4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from



specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi(13.1 MPa.

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2500 psi(17.3 MPa).

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.

2.4 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide masonry lintels complying with requirements below.

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch(6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent

passing the No. 16(1.18-mm) sieve.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.



1. Products:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.

G. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60(Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch(4.8-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch(3.8-mm) diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches(407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet(3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.188-inch-(4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch(16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches(50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches(100 mm) wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches(50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal.



2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

B. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2(ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch(3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

1. Products:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.



2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For all masonry, use Type S.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches(200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M and a compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at

Contractor's expense.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch(12 mm). Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch(3 mm).

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch(3 mm).

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch(100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.



C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches(600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch(16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch(13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches(406 mm) o.c.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.



D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:

1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch(10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch(10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.7 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches(610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Provide precast concrete lintels where shown.

D. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches(200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches(1520 mm).


A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.



1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at

Contractor's expense.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft.(465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

D. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780.

E. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019 .

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05120 - 1

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in connection with or incidental to furnishing, fabricating, delivering, and erecting structural steel complete, as described in this Section, shown on Drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom, including, but not limited to:

1. Structural steel columns, girders, beams, and angles 2. Angle frames for openings in floors and roofs 3. Steel plates and miscellaneous deck support angles 4. Connections and component parts 5. Qualification of welders employed on the Project 6. Galvanizing of items 7. Shop prime coat painting and field touch-up painting 8. Grouting of base plates 9. Temporary bracing of construction 10. Fabrication/erection inspection and testing

B. Extent of structural steel work is shown on the Structural Drawings, including schedules, notes

and details to show sizes and locations of members, typical connections and types of steel required.

C. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete the structural steel work,

regardless of whether such parts and members are definitely shown or specified, and furnish all such gussets, plates, bolts, nuts, washers, welds, etc. as may be required for the proper assembly of all items. Include miscellaneous deck support angles as required for the proper support of metal floor deck around columns, gussets, openings and obstructions, and proper support of metal roof deck around openings, obstructions, and where required.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Installation of anchor bolts 2. Section 09910 - Painting: Finish painting of exposed structural steel.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. A 6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling

2. A 36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 3. A 53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded

and Seamless 4. A 108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished



5. A 123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

6. A 153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 7. A 307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 6000 psi Tensile 8. A 325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength 9. A 490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi (1035

Mpa) Tensile Strength 10. A 500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 11. A 578, Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and

Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications 12. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy

Coated (Galvanealled) by the Hot-Dip Process 13. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings 14. A897, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for

Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on each surface 15. A 992, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes 16. F 1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts

B. American Institute for Steel Construction (AISC)

1. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 2. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,

latest edition 3. Specifications for Structural Joints Using A 490 Bolts, approved by the Research Council

on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation 4. Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 5. Structural Welding Guide, AWS D1.1

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. Standards

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. D1.1 Structural Welding Code

E. Corps of Engineers (CE)

1. CRD-C 621

F. Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI)

1. Handbook on Bolt, Nut, and Rivet Standards

G. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

1. Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice 2. Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems Specifications




A. All standards referenced in this Section shall apply, as applicable to the work, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between the RFP Documents, a referenced standard, and the Building Code, the more stringent requirement shall govern.

B. All welds shall be inspected and tested in accordance with AWS D1.1. C. Testing Laboratory Services for Verification of Quality: Refer to Section 01 45 23, Testing and

Inspecting Services. D. All materials, fabrication procedures and field are subject to verification inspection and testing

by the General Contractor’s testing laboratory, in both shop and field. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the General Contractor of his responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.

E. Testing firm shall perform ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify the adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply.

F. Qualifications for Welding Work: General Contractor shall be responsible for qualifying welding

operators employed on the Project in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure. Provide certification to the Project Manager that the welder’s have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests in the previous 12 months. Retesting and recertification of welders, if required, is the General Contractor’s responsibility.

G. Qualifications for Welding Procedures: General Contractor shall provide the testing laboratory

with welding procedures which are to be used in executing this work. Welding procedures shall be qualified prior to use in accordance with AWS D1.1, Part B.

H. Comply with provisions of referenced codes, specifications, and standards, in addition to the

Building Code. I. Fabricator’s Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in the fabrication of structural steel for buildings with minimum of

five (5) years experience and currently certified by AISC Quality Certification Program for fabrication of Category I or higher structures. An otherwise qualified fabricator who is not a member of the AISC Quality Certification Program will be accepted if satisfactory evidence of qualifications is submitted prior to award of Contract. For non-certified fabricators, General Contractor shall submit a resume describing plant size, equipment quality control procedures and personnel, and experience on comparable work in the last three (3) years.

1.5 DESIGN

A. Connections: Shall be designed in accordance with the requirements on the Structural Drawings.

B. Fabricator shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrications, and for correct fitting of

structural steel members.

C. The Steel Fabricator shall design all connections not pre-designed on the drawings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS



A. Product Data: Submit producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions,

including laboratory test reports and other data, to show compliance with Specifications for the following products:

1. Structural steel primer and touch-up paint. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

B. Mill Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s mill analysis, for record, showing compliance with

Design Standards for the following products:

1. Structural steel (each type) 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit design calculations for the connections designed by the Fabricator, prior to or

with the shop drawings. Calculations shall bear the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer. Shop drawings containing connections for which calculations have not been received will be returned unchecked as an incomplete submittal. Design Calculations will be retained for the Project Manager’s file, and will not be approved or returned. Design calculations shall include the following: a. All structural steel beam connections not specifically detailed on the Structural

Drawings shall be designed by the Fabricator, under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer. Connections shall be designed to resist the forces specified on the Structural Drawings and shall be shown in detail on the shop drawings.

b. Wind Brace Connections: Provide calculations for each different wind brace

connection used and detailed on the shop drawings. Each connection calculation shall identify the location or locations for which the connection applies by indicating the following:

1) the wind brace mark(s) from the Structural Drawings; 2) the piece mark(s) from the shop drawings; 3) the member size, and 4) the design loading(s)

2. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a Registered Professional

Engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, erection plans, details, procedures, and diagrams showing sequence of erection. Include details of cuts, connections, camber holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Shop drawings shall not be produced by using reproductions of Bid Documents.

a. Structural steel members for which shop drawings have not been reviewed shall

not be fabricated. Omission from shop drawings of any materials required by the Contract Documents shall not relieve the General Contractor of his responsibility for furnishing and installing such materials, even though such shop drawings may have been reviewed and returned.

b. Substitutions: Submit substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and the reasons therefore, along with shop drawings for approval. Submitted substitutions must be clearly identified and noted as such. Approved substitutions, modifications, and necessary changes in related portions of the work shall be



coordinated by the fabricator and shall be accomplished at no additional expense to the Owner.

D. Setting Drawings and Templates: Submit setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages installed by other trades. E. Certifications:

1. Submit evidence of current AISC plant certification. Refer Fabricator’s Qualifications

under Quality Control. 2. Submit welder’s certification to the testing laboratory and the Project Manager. Refer

Qualifications for Welding Work under Quality Control. 3. Submit proof of welding equipment calibration.

F. All welding equipment shall be in such condition as to enable personnel to follow required

procedure required results. All welding machines used on this project shall be calibrated on no less than an annual basis. Proof of welding machine calibration shall be provided by the contractor. Such proof shall at least include the machine equipment data, brand, model number, serial number, photograph of the specific machine, and written proof from a certified testing agency that the machine has been calibrated within 12 months of current use.

G. The shop drawing development process is fluid. No additional payment shall be related to RFI’s submitted for clarification or additional information or for revisions to or resubmittal of shop drawings as may be required.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time so as to not delay that work.

B. Deliver packaged materials in the manufacturer’s original unopened packaging, store and

handle steel joists in accordance with SJI recommendations. Protect packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other means of support. Protect steel members from corrosion and deterioration.

D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed at no additional expense to Owner.

E. Support cambered members during shipment and handling in a manner which will not result in

loss of camber. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate erection of structural steel with work of other trades. B. Do not install columns which have anchor bolts in concrete, until concrete members have

attained their 28 day compressive strength.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE



A. Refer to Section 01310 – Project Management and Coordination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Specifications are based on the named product(s) and manufacturer(s). Except where specifically stated as no substitutions, other products must be by a manufacturer having a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing product(s) meeting or exceeding the Specifications, comply with requirements of this Section, and Division 1 requirements for substitutions in order to be considered.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes.

B. Steel:

1. Wide Flange (W) Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992 (50 ksi yield). 2. Other Rolled Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (36 ksi yield). 3. Cold Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade C (50,000 psi yield). 4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 501, Type E or S, Grade C.

C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:

1. Bolts: Anchor bolts and erection bolts shall conform to ASTM F1554 Grade A, and to the

requirements for regular hexagon bolts and nuts of ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2. 2. High-strength bolts for connections shall conform to ASTM A 490. Bolts that shall be

galvanized shall conform to ASTM A325. Dimensions of bolt heads and nuts shall conform to requirements for heavy hexagon nuts of ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2.

3. Washers: Circular washers shall be flat and smooth, shall conform to requirements of Type A washers in ANSI B23.1. Beveled washers for “S” shapes and channels shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in thickness, and shall be smooth. Washers for use with high-strength bolts shall be hardened.

4. Tension Control Bolts: May be used in lieu of conventional high-strength bolts. Bolts shall be furnished by one of the following: a. LeJeune Bolt Company, Lakeville, Minnesota

b. Lohr Structural Fasteners, Inc., P. O. Box 1387, Humble, Texas.

c. Or approved equal

5. Drilled Anchor Bolts: Shall be one of the following: a. Wej-it Bolt, Wej-it Corporation, Tulsa, Oklahoma

b. Kwik Bolt, Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, Oklahoma



c. Trubolt, Ramset Fastening Systems, Paris, Kentucky

d. Or approved equal

D. Welding Electrodes: Shall conform to the requirements and specifications of AWS. Use E70 electrodes. For high-strength, low-alloy steel, provide electrodes, welding rods, and filler metals equal in strength and compatible in appearance with parent metal joined.

E. Shear Studs: Shall be shear connectors with proper ferrules and accessories, especially

designed to create composite deck action between concrete deck and the supporting beam. Steel for studs shall conform to ASTM A108, Grades 1015-1020, with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. Studs shall be of uniform diameter, heads shall be concentric and normal to shaft and the weld end shall be chamfered, welds shall be solid flux.

F. Primer and Touch-Up Paint:

1. For Standard Shop Coat: Red oxide primer, meeting the requirements of SSPC-Paint

25. Refer to items below which shall not receive paint/primer. Zinc Chromate not permitted.

2. For Architecturally Exposed Steel Members: First coat Tnemec-Zinc 90-97 and second coat Tnemec Series 66, Hi-Build Epoxoline; or PPG No. 97-670 Zinc Primer with second coat of PPG No. 97-130 HB Epoxy; or approved equal; in color selected by the Project Manager.

3. For Field Touch-Up: Same paint as specified for shop primer coat. 4. Galvanizing: When galvanized steel is required, conform to the following:

a. Steel: Provide zinc-coating to conform to ASTM A 123.

b. Threaded Products: Provide zinc-coating to conform to ASTM A 153, Class C.

c. Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coating to conform to ASTM A 897.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound or Galvilite manufactured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA; Galvax Zinc-rich Cold Galvanizing Coating manufactured by Alvin Products, Inc., Lawerence, MA; or paint complying with military specification MILP-21035A, Type I or II. Apply repair paint in accordance with ASTM A780.

H. Slide Bearings: (not used)

I. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:

1. Type: Premixed, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, ASTM C1107. 2. Applicable Standards: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 621, with the following exceptions:

a. Provide a maximum initial set time of 1 hour at 73.4F (+ 5F) and 50% RH.

b. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 8,000 psi when placed at fluid consistency.

c. Expansion shall not be formed by gas liberation.

3. Approved Manufacturers: Design Standards are based on first named manufacturer. Other approved manufacturers must meet or exceed this standard.

a. "Supreme", Gifford-Hill & Company, Inc., Dallas, Texas 75247 (214) 258-7000.



b. "Masterflow 713", Master Builders Division of Martin Marietta, Cleveland, Ohio 44122 (216) 831-5500.

c. “Saurenisen F-100”, Sauereisen Cements Co. Pittsburgh Pennsylvania 15238 (412) 963-0303.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:

1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings.

2. Provide camber in members where indicated. Specified camber applies as at jobsite, just prior to erection, lying down flat so that member weight has no effect. General Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent or compensate for camber loss during shipment. Measured camber in members up to 50 feet-0 inches long shall be within a tolerance of minus 1/2 inch to plus zero from the amount specified. For members greater than 50 feet-0 inches long, both positive and negative tolerance may increase 1/8 inch for every 10 feet-0 inches of length in excess of 50 feet-0 inches. Members with a field measured camber outside of the specified tolerance shall be returned to the shop.

3. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

4. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

5. Splicing of structural steel members is prohibited without prior approval of Structural Engineer and Project Manager. Any member having a splice not shown or detailed on approved shop drawings will be rejected.

6. Plates shall be free of gross internal discontinuities such as ruptures and delaminations. Plates shall comply with ASTM A 578, Level 1.

7. Mill Tolerances: Comply with ASTM A 6. 8. Fabrication Tolerances: Comply with AISC Code of Standard Practice.

B. Connections:

1. Weld or bolt shop connections as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are

indicated. Provide specified threaded fasteners for all principle bolted connections. Holes for bolted connections shall be drilled or punched at right angles to member. The slope of surfaces under the bolt head and nut shall not exceed 1:20. Provide beveled washers where slopes exceed 1:20. Bolt holes shall have a diameter not greater than 1/16 inch larger than the nominal bolt diameter. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Provide washers over all slotted holes in an outer ply.

3. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC, “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”, approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation.

4. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axis without warp. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds designed to develop the full strength of member. No combination of bolts and welds shall be used for stress transmission at the same face of any connections.



5. Clean completed welds prior to inspection. Slag shall be removed from all completed welds and the weld and adjacent base metal shall be cleaned by brushing or other suitable means. Tightly adherent splatter remaining after the cleaning operation is acceptable unless its removal is required for the purpose of nondestructive testing.

6. For high-strength, low-alloy steels, follow welding procedures recommended by steel producer for exposed and concealed connections.

7. Base Plates: Hole sizes for anchor bolts may be oversized to facilitate erection as follows:

a. Bolts 3/4 inch to 7/8 inch Diameter: 1/4 inch oversize

b. Bolts 1 inch to 2 inches Diameter: 3/8 inch oversize

c. Bolts over 2 inches Diameter: 1/2 inch oversize Use oversize or plate washers under nut at all oversized holes in base plates.

Washers must be large enough to cover the entire hole. Washer thickness shall be at least 1/8 of bolt diameter.

C. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Shop weld shear connectors, shaped as shown, to beams and girders in composite construction which do not support metal deck. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Installation of Shear Connectors: Shear studs shall be automatically end welded in the

shop in accordance with Article 31 of the AWS Structural Welding Code and the specifications of the shear stud manufacturer. After installation, each ceramic ferrule shall be removed prior to placement of concrete. Adequate welding power must be available for studs being welded.

2. All areas to which studs are to be attached shall be cleaned of all rust, oil, grease, and paint. When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in obtaining proper welds, it shall be removed by grinding or sand blasting.

D. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing

and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

E. Galvanized (Zinc-Coating): All structural steel pieces, exposed to weather or moisture, in

permanent contact with soil, or accessible to salt intrusion shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Exterior exposed steel columns and beams. 2. Exterior non-conditioned exposed steel under cover. 3. Masonry shelf angles. 4. Exterior exposed railings. 5. Miscellaneous structural metals placed in concrete. 6. Items shown on Drawings or required.

F. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: All exposed structural steel shall be straight and true.

Select or straighten members to meet permissible variations of ASTM A6, subject to tolerances of AISC Code of Standard Practice, Chapter 10. Exposed surfaces shall be smooth, free of embedded scale, trademarks, roll imperfection marks, and other irregularities. Fill depressions of whatever kind with weld metal of the same composition as the parent metal. Grind welds and raised marks smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.



2.4 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop paint structural steel, those members or portions of members except as follows:

1. to receive a galvanized coating, 2. to be embedded in concrete or mortar, 3. surfaces which are to be welded, 4. to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, and 5. specifically noted as not shop prime painted

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted.

Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, splatter, and slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC recommendations as follows:

1. For exposed steel in conditioned spaces: SP-3, “Power Tool Cleaning”. 2. For exterior exposed steel: SP-6, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”.

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and a rate to provide following dry film thickness. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. For Standard Shop Coat: Apply specified primer to 2.0 mils. 2. For Architecturally Exposed Steel Members: Apply first coat specified primer to 3.5 mils

and second coat specified primer to 4 to 6 mils.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify General Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

3.2 PRE-DETAILING MEETING

A. Pre-Detailing Meeting/Conference: General Contractor shall schedule and hold a pre-detailing/pre-fabrication meeting to coordinate specifications and shop drawing issues prior to the first shop drawing submittal. Attendees that must be notified and present shall include the contractor’s project manager, the detailer, the fabricator, the erector, the structural engineer, the architect, the owner’s representative, and the testing agency. The contractor shall develop a customized agenda and submit one week prior to the meeting to allow all parties to prepare. Adhere to the following timing for scheduling the meeting:

1. All parties have had the contract documents long enough to become familiar with the project and its typical details.

2. The Detailer/Fabricator has a preliminary schedule of submittals and fabrication planned. 3. The Erector has a preliminary plan of erection and sequence for the job. 4. Meeting must take place at least 2 weeks prior to the first scheduled submittal of shop

drawings.



B. Pre-Detailing Meeting Sample Agenda I. General Contractor Coordination of Steel Framing

a. Path of communication/paper trail. Discuss conditions of direct contact between Fabricator and Engineer with Architect and Contractor copied.

b. Identify current version of documents and make sure everyone is working from them. This includes all bidding addenda (sketches and written items).

c. Routing of shop drawings. 1.) One unofficial advance bootleg copy directly to Structural Engineer is

acceptable. 2.) Contractor’s processing/review time must be included in overall schedule. 3.) Design team’s review time is no less than 2 weeks. However, on smaller

submittals, time may be reduced at discretion of Structural Engineer when previous notice is given.

d. Identify Contractor’s schedule for field measuring and exploratory work to verify dimensions prior to shop drawing development.

e. Identify date of ordering mechanical equipment, pre-engineered stairs, skylights, etc. and when cut sheets will be available. 1.) Determine strategy for opening frames and other components requiring

coordination with other trades. 2.) Assign an individual in employ of Contractor to be accountable for collecting

and distributing this information. f. Identify process for issuing changes, revisions and future packages to drawings.

II. Design Team Input on Coordination

a. Establish regular meeting/conference call schedule of ongoing communication is required. Establish deadlines/process to address unresolved issues.

b. Design overview and statement of intent. c. Review of completeness of drawings – progress. d. Define those areas to be revised, value engineered or completed later. e. Review of unique or complex details. f. Review of critical tolerances. g. Expectations of Quality Control Inspector. Scheduling of shop inspections is of

particular importance.

III. Detailing, Submittals and Project Planning a. Design/detailing/connection standards for the project. b. Number of copies of shop drawing prints. c. Schedule for detailing and release dates. d. Identification of critical schedule dates for shop drawing reviews by Engineer of

Record. Distribute schedule with detailer release and approval is required. 1.) Define which submittals are critical and give Engineer one-week notice

of day shops will be delivered. 2.) Do not request a quick turnaround on every submittal.

e. Identify connection design submittal requirements. f. Identify all delegated design elements (engineered, detailed, and designed by

contractor) such as metal stairs, handrails, pre-fabricated assemblies, etc. g. Review erection scheme, sequence and scheduling. General Contractor shall

coordinate scheduling and access. h. Shop drawings must address OSHA requirements. i. No additional compensation to Contractor, Detailer, or Fabricator will be

considered for shop drawing revisions. IV. Nonconformance/Fit Up/Quality Control/Erection Conditions

a. Identify and introduce separate individuals who will be performing observations and inspections on the part of the Contractor, Owner, Structural Engineer, Architect, and Testing Firm.



b. Define Contractor’s main and backup supervision for inspection. c. Identify location of discrepancy lists in job site trailer. d. Review extent and quantity of testing. For example: - Bolt types sizes, alignment, tightness, washers, etc. - Welding sizes and quality - Concrete embedments (flushness, - Steel finishes - Check member sizes, elevations, placement, levelness e. Identify methods for resolving disputes between Fabricator, Erector and Testing

Agency. f. Define pre-approved fixes and identify limits of applicability. g. Identify procedures, form and information required to submit non-conformance

requests or deviations. Contractor shall include proposal sketches. h. Identify Erector’s method of stability of the structure during erection.

V. Details/Questions on Construction Documents (The following list is also a basic

guideline for checking by the Detailer prior to submitting shop drawings for review.) a. Identify any missing or conflicting grid dimensions. b. Identify any undimensioned members (“equally spaced, 6’-0”o.c. maximum,

coordinate location with”). c. Identify edge of slab/edge of deck dimensions not shown. d. Identify top of steel elevation where not shown. e. Clarify extent and location of section cuts. Clarify what happens at transition of

two details. f. Request missing criteria for connection design (reaction, brace forces or

connection concept). g. Request alternate connection details. h. Request alternate column splice locations and details. i. Identify framing conditions which conflict with connection types shown or

specified. j. Tie down mechanical equipment support, roof opening frames, deck support, etc.

Where not enough information is available, establish schedule and contacts to resolve.

k. Identify finish on exposed steel and special prep/painting requirements. l. Present initial layouts for typical bay outriggers, kickers and other secondary

framing for Engineer’s approval. VI. Actions As A Result of the Meeting

a. How and when will changes and decisions made in the meeting be distributed to the team?

b. Minutes will be taken and distributed by the General Contractor. c. Create an action list for all unresolved communication. Assign accountability for

each item. Assign an administrator for the action list. d. General Contractor shall execute and ensure coordination of mechanical,

electrical, and plumbing in a timely manner in order to avoid field conflicts and address required reinforcement around floor and roof openings

3.3 ERECTION

A. General: Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing:



1. Provide adequate shoring and bracing to safely withstand all loads to which the structure may be subjected during the construction process, including wind loads, dead loads, construction material, and equipment loads. Such bracing shall remain in place as long as required for safety.

2. As the erection progresses, make a sufficient number of permanent welded or bolted connections to withstand erection stresses and maintain stability.

3. The design of temporary shoring and bracing shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and platforms, as necessary, to effectively

complete the work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel

to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors in accurate locations. Refer to Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Section 042000, Unit Masonry for anchor bolt installation requirements in masonry.

E. Field Assembly:

1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. 2. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening members together. 3. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces before assembly which will be in a permanent

contact, before assembly. 4. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and

alignment. 5. Level and plumb individual members to structure within tolerances defined by AISC Code

for Standard Practice, unless closer tolerances are required for proper fitting of adjoining or enclosing materials, in which case the most stringent shall apply.

6. Set horizontal members with their natural camber (or specified camber) up. 7. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on final shop drawing. 8. Where parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly, as a result in errors in fabrication or

of deformation due to handling or transportation, such condition shall be immediately reported, along with proposed method of correction. The straightening of bends or warps shall be performed by approved methods. Bent or damaged heat-treated parts will be rejected.

9. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts and weld connection continuously.

10. Do not use gas-cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing, except on secondary members, which are not under stress. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance.

F. Erection Bolts:

1. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and

grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 2. On non-exposed welded construction, erection bolts shall be tightened securely and left

in place, or if removed, the holes shall be filled with plug welds.

G. Bolted Connections:

1. High-strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with AISC, “Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”.



2. ASTM F1554 bolts and high-strength (ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 490) bolts noted to be “snug-tight” shall be tightened using a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench, bringing the plies into snug contact.

3. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled. All joint surfaces shall be free of burrs, dirt and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the parts.

4. Hardened washers shall be placed over slotted holes in an outer ply. Hardened beveled washers shall be used where outer face of bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to bolt axis.

H. Field Welding:

1. Comply with AWS D1.1 and AISC Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings. Pay

particular attention to surface preparation, preheating, sequence, and continuity of welds. 2. Where heavy shapes are to be welded, comply with all special requirements contained in

the AISC Specifications and AWS D1.1.

3. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

I. Unfair Holes:

1. Do not enlarge holes in members, by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary

bracing members. 2. Ream holes that require enlarging to admit bolts.

J. Gas Cutting:

1. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural

framing 2. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress. 3. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

K. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:

1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen

to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on

wedges, or other adjustable devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to placing grout.

4. Mix and place grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Place grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids

remain. 6. Finish exposed grout surfaces. 7. Protect installed materials, and allow grout to cure in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

L. Field Touch-Up Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint.

2. Apply paint to exposed areas with same materials as used for shop painting. 3. Apply by brush or spray, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 mils for each

coat.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean up all debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping the area clean and neat at all times.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cage door hardware. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in

other Sections. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 6. Metal bollards.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry.

3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 4. Division 5 Section "Gratings." 5. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors. 6. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction" for timber connectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout. 3. Animal cage system hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.



2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Wire mesh: Flat, top weave, plain steel, ASTM A510.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

G. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593(ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 1(A1).

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3(ASME B18.6.7M).

G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1(ASME B18.2.3.8M).

H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1(ASME B18.22M).

J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1(ASME B18.21.2M).

K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.



L. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1(A1) stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593(ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Special Coating Primer: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Special Coating section.

C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Products:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.



B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch(1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches(3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch(150-mm) embedment and 2-inch(50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches(200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches(600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated and all exterior locations and the interior of all night houses and animal areas.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where not galvanized.



2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication in all exterior locations and interior of Tropics building.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer where not galvanized.

2.8 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim in all night house and animal buildings.

D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim, where not galvanized with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 ANIMAL CAGING SYSTEMS

A. General: Fabricate units of materials, sizes and configurations indicated. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates and bars of profiles shown. Provide brackets and fittings for installation.

B. Galvanize animal caging system in all locations. Do not galvanize stainless steel members.

2.11 CAGE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide hardware as indicated on the drawings. Install hardware as detailed and as per manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Manufacturers

1. Richard Wilcox (708)897-6951

2. Schaefer & Wichard



Available at any West Marine (800)538-0775

3. Or approved equal.

2.12 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-(6.4-mm-) thick steel plate.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch-(6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches(200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch(19 mm) larger than OD of bollard.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.15 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.



C. Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.



B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete . Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch(3 mm) toward bollard.

B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



GRATINGS 05530 - 1

SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings and handrails. 2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating gratings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, handrails, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


GRATINGS 05530 - 2


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings and Handrails:

a. Creative Pultrusions, Inc. b. Enduro Systems Inc.; Composite Products Division. c. Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. d. Fisher & Ludlow. e. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. f. Seasafe, Inc. g. Strongwell.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593(ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 2(A4).

C. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or chemical anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Anchors in all Locations: Alloy Group 2(A4) stainless-steel bolts complying

with ASTM F 593(ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating and handrails sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch(1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.


GRATINGS 05530 - 3

2.4 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS

A. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Gratings: Bar gratings made by placing glass-fiber strands that have been saturated with thermosetting plastic resin in molds in alternating directions to form interlocking bars without voids and with a high resin content.

1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-) square mesh, thickness as required to comply with structural performance requirements .

2. Resin: Polyester.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

3. Color: Gray. 4. Traffic Surface: Plain, meniscus.

B. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.

2.5 GRATING FRAMES, HANDRAILS AND SUPPORTS

A. Frames, and Supports for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings: Fabricate from glass-fiber-reinforced plastic shapes of sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, use shapes made from same resin as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete with integral anchors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings and handrails. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

3.2 INSTALLING GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS AND HANDRAILS

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings. Use stainless-steel anchor clips and hold-down devices for bolted connections.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Utility shelving. 5. Plywood backing panels. 6. Termite shields.


1. Section 06160 - Sheathing. 2. Section 06173 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.



5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors.


A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.



2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Disodium borate where acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing within 18-inches of grade, including interior framing.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic

spaces, and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Plywood backing panels.



2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.

B. Species, Grade and Design Values: Southern Yellow Pine No. 1 (minimum), unless noted otherwise.

2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Boise Cascade Corporation.

b. Georgia-Pacific.

c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.

d. Weyerhaeuser Company.

B. Design Values: As indicated of the Structural drawings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Utility shelving.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Southern pine; SPIB.

C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Southern Yellow Pine, Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NeLMA or NLGA.

D. For non-loud bearing concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades:

1. Southern Yellow Pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, No. 2 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.



F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.8 SHEET METALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat. 3. Thickness: 22 gauge.

2.9 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.



2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS


1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 4. KC Metals Products, Inc. 5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 7. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

D. Joist Hangers: Simpson Strongtie or approved equal. See plans.

E. Top Flange Hangers: Simpson Strongtie or approved equal. See plans.

F. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick (but not less than indicated on Structural drawings), length to suit joist size and spacing.

G. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.

H. Joist Ties: Simpson Strongtie or approved equal. See plans.

I. Rafter and Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick (but not less than indicated on Structural drawings). Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.

J. Floor-to-Floor Ties: (Not Used)

K. Hold-Downs: (Not Used)

L. Wall Bracing: (Not Used)


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.



C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in stud spaces and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness.

2. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated on the Structural drawings



K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

L. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Not Used.

3.4 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Not Used.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



SHEATHING 06160 - 1

SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Roof sheathing. 2. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.


1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: for plywood backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Building wrap.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."


SHEATHING 06160 - 2


A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Plywood: DOC PS 1, Group 2, Grade A.

B. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Disodium borate where acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.

2.4 WALL SHEATHING

A. Not Used.


SHEATHING 06160 - 3

2.5 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Type, span rating and thickness as indicated on the Structural drawings. Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT

A. Not Used.

2.7 FASTENERS


1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.



D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

2.8 WEATHER-RESISTANT BUILDING WRAP

A. Not Used.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01, ASTM D3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing system consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either a system manufactured or recommended by the building wrap manufacturer or one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705 system. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor V40

Weather Barrier system. c. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. d. Protecto Wrap Company; PS-45.

C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate.


SHEATHING 06160 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as, unless otherwise indicated on the Structural drawings, by complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 3. Table R602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3 (2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated on the Structural drawings.

C. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT BUILDING WRAP INSTALLATION

A. Not Used.

3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with Drawings and manufacturers written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.


SHEATHING 06160 - 5

2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure

that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.



SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06175 - 1

SECTION 06175 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood truss bracing. 3. Metal truss accessories.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.

B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc.

C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated on the Drawings. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:

a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Louisiana. Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.

1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required.

2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss

members due to design loads. 4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal

connector plates. 5. Show splice details and bearing details.



6. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm.

D. Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer, professional engineer and fabricator.

E. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Metal-plate connectors. 2. Metal truss accessories.


A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single manufacturer.

D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the latest editions of the following publications:

1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal

Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."


A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."



1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

B. Grade and Species: For truss chord and web members, provide dimension lumber of any species, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."

C. Minimum Chord Size For Roof Trusses: 2 by 6 inches nominal for both top and bottom chords.

D. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Division 06 Section Rough Carpentry.

2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES


1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. 3. CompuTrus, Inc. 4. Eagle Metal Products. 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc. 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 7. Robbins Engineering, Inc. 8. TEE-LOK Corporation; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 9. Truswal Systems Corporation.

B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.



C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

2.3 FASTENERS




D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.4 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES


1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

D. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/2 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick (but not less than indicated on Structural drawings). Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both sides of truss, inside face of top plates, and both sides of stud below.

E. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing walls, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick (but not less than indicated on Structural drawings). Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection.

F. Floor Truss Hangers: Not Used.

G. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches wide by 1 inch deep by 0.040 inch thick, made to fit between 2 adjacent trusses and accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.

B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.

C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.

1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.

D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.

2.6 Provide materials in compliance with the following requirements

A. Recycled Content: Subject to performance requirements, provide materials manufactured with post-consumer and / or pre-consumer recycled content to the maximum extent available.

B. Regional Materials: Subject to performance requirements, provide materials and / or products

that have been extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of the project site to the maximum extent available.

C. All Paints and Coatings used shall comply with the following criteria:

1. Architectural paints, coatings and primers must not exceed the VOC content limits established in Green Seal Standards GS-11.

2. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints must not exceed the VOC content limits established in Green Seal Standards GS-03.

3. Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains and shellacs must not exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings.

D. Adhesives and Sealants used shall comply with the requirements of the latest editions and

addenda of the following reference standards: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168 and Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36.

E. Certified Wood: Provide wood-based materials and products which are certified in accordance

with the Forest Stewardship Council’s (FSC) Principles and Criteria, such that 100% (by cost) of all wood building products used in the project are certified wood.

1. All wood-based materials and products permanently installed in the project must be

included in calculation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.



B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.

C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.

D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.

E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.

F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.

G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.

H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.

1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry. “ 2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor

trusses at centers indicated.

I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.

J. Do not cut or remove truss members.

K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

1. Do not alter trusses in field.

3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.



GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06180 - 1

SECTION 06180 – GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes structural glued laminated timber elements.

B. Structural glued laminated (glulam) timber is defined to include wood members fabricated from 1 inch or 2 inch nominal thickness lumber, glued face-to-face to a depth of four or more laminations.

1. Provide connectors, anchors, and accessories necessary to interconnect and secure glulam members to building structure.

C. The types of structural glued laminated units specified include the following:

1. Straight beams, including girders and purlins, and cambered members. 2. Curved or arched structural members (curved glue lines). 3. Columns, including posts and standards. 4. Prefabricated trusses with chords of glued laminated timber.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division Specification Sections.

B. Product data including specifications and installation instructions covering lumber, adhesives, fabrication process, accessories and protection.

1. Submit certification indicating glued laminated timbers comply with requirements of ANSI/AITC A190.1.

C. Samples approximately 2’ x 0" long, full width and depth, showing range of variation expected in appearance of structural glued laminated units, including any specified treatment. Samples will be reviewed for color, pattern and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is exclusive responsibility of Contractor.

D. Shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire structural system. Show large-scale details of connections, connectors, and other accessories indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in required work. Shop drawings shall be prepared under the supervision of a professional engineer licensed in the state where the material is manufactured.

E. Where indicated on the drawings, final design of the glued laminated structural units shall be provided by the manufacturer. Provide complete design calculations prepared by a professional engineer, experienced in the design of the type of glued laminated timber used in this project, licensed in the state where the material is manufactured.




A. Standards: Manufacturing shall comply with ANSI/AITC A 190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber." Design shall comply with AITC 117-2004 “Standard Specification for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber of Softwood Species”.

B. Manufacturer Qualification: Provide factory-glued structural units, produced by an AITC-licensed firm qualified to apply the AITC Quality Inspected mark.

1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Boise

b. Georgia Pacific

c. Anthony

2. Other manufacturer will not be considered for approval unless product information is submitted by Contractor prior to bidding.

C. Factory-mark each piece of glued laminated structural units with AITC Quality Inspected mark.

1. Place AITC mark on timber surfaces which will not be exposed in completed Work.

D. Installer: Firm that has demonstrated competence specializing in installing glued laminated timber for at least 5 years.

E. Manufacturer: Firm that has at least 5 years continuous operation and is licensed by AITC or APA-EWS.


A. General: Comply with provisions of AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage, and Erection".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS

A. Lumber: Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1 and applicable lumber association standards cited therein for grades required to achieve glulam requirements for design values, appearance, fabrication limitations, and species.

B. Stress Values for Beams, Purlins, and Arches: Glued laminated members to be sized by manufacturer except as shown on drawings. Laminating combinations to be determined by manufacturer.

C. Lumber Species: Douglas Fir / Larch (no mixed species allowed) with moisture content average of 12%, maximum of 15%. Where wet use is indicated use decay resistant Alaska Yellow Cedar.

D. Adhesive: ANSI/AITC A190.1, wet-use type.



E. End Sealer: Manufacturers standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer, effective in retarding transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts.

F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturers standard, translucent, penetrating wood sealer, that will not interfere with application of wood stain and transparent finish, or paint finish.

1. Refer to Division 9 Sections for required field-applied finishes.

G. Connectors, Anchors, and Accessories: Provide fabricated steel ASTM A 36 shapes, plates, and bars, welded into assemblies of types and sizes indicated. Provide steel bolts, lag bolts, nails, and other standard fasteners as required for installation.

1. Indoor Assemblies: Finish fabricated assemblies with rust-inhibitive primer. 2. Outdoor Assemblies: This is considered wet-use finish area. Finish fabricated assemblies

with hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153), including bolts and other fasteners. 3. All fabricated assemblies exposed to view shall be coated additionally with 2 coats of

black enamel, high gloss. Apply primer and/or prepare galvanized surfaces prior to applying enamel.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Comply with ANSI/IAITC A190. 1 in providing units indicated; where dimensions are not completely documented, provide manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes required to fulfill indicated performances.

1. Shop-fabricate for connections and connecting hardware to greatest extent feasible, including drilling of bolt holes.

B. Appearance Grade: For all members exposed to view, provide Premium appearance grade units complying with AITC 110. Provide industrial grade appearance for all other members.

C. Camber: The required camber for fabricating each member as determined by the manufacturer, and may be either circular or parabolic, at manufacturer’s option.

D. Curved (Arched) Members: Fabricate each lamination in circular curvature radius indicated on drawings. Adjust radius to account for dead load since radius indicated on drawings is the final load condition.

E. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end-cutting each member to final length, and after wood treatment, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces.

F. Seal Coat: After fabricating and end-coat sealing, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for treated wood where treatment has included a water repellent.

G. Factory Finish: Apply two coats of manufacturers standard semi transparent oil base stain, color as selected by the architect from manufacturers standard colors. Hand apply stain to ensure consistent finish.

H. Factory Applied Protection: Individually wrap glued laminated timbers with manufacturer’s standard water-resistant, plastic coated paper. Wrapping shall remain on members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from other trades. Slit the underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside wrapping.



2.3 GLUED LAMINATED DECKING

A. General: Provide glued laminated wood decking, sized as indicated, with following characteristics:

1. Face Species: Southern Pine. 2. Face Grade: Decorative. 3. Face Surface: Smooth sanded. 4. Edge Pattern: Standard V. 5. Factory Finish: Apply two coats of manufacturers standard semi transparent oil base

stain, color as selected by architect from manufacturers standard colors. Hand apply stain to ensure consistent finish.

6. Factory Applied Protection: Provide bundle wrapping of decking units.

2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

A. General: All members exposed to view or outdoors shall be pressure treated with Type C pentachlorophenol to at least a retention of 0.6 pcf per A WPA specification C28.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide and install complete assemblies in addition to all miscellaneous steel connectors, anchors, and accessories whether or not implied or directly specified.

B. Plan and execute erection procedures so that close fit and neat appearance of joints and structure as a whole will not be impaired. When hoisting members into place, use padded or nonmarring slings, and protect corners with wood blocking.

C. Adequately brace members as they are placed to maintain safe position until full stability is provided. Install members true and plumb with uniform close fittings.

D. Cutting: Avoid cutting glulam members during erection. Except for fastener drilling and other minor cutting, coat cuts with end sealer.

E. Handle and temporarily support members to prevent visible surface damage.

F. Do not remove wrapping on individually wrapped members until it will serve no useful purpose, including protection from weather, soiling and damage from work of other trades. However, exposing portions of members to sunlight can cause non uniform "UV" staining. Fully covering or fully exposing members will help minimize non-uniform staining.

1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 9. Retain wrapping wherever it can serve as a painting shield.

G. Apply bead of nonstructural joint sealant under each tongue and groove at outside wall supports for an airtight seal.

H. Nail decking to supports according to AITC recommendations. Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking prior to applying finished roofing.



I. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection and removing wrappings, or replace damaged members as directed where damage is beyond acceptable repair.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. General: Control heating and ventilating to avoid damage to or deterioration of glulam work.



EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1

SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Fiber-Cement.


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product and process indicated and incorporated into items of exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and

reinforcement specified in other Sections.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fiber-Cement Products:

1. James Hardie Building Products. 2. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

1. Trim and Soffit: Solid fiber-cement trim, soffit and accessories complying with ASTM C1186, Grade II, Type A.

2. Pattern and size as noted in the drawings. 3. Thickness: 7/16-inch nominal for width up to 11-1/2 inch (Harditrim). 4. Thickness: 5/16-inch nominal for width over 11-1/2 inch (Hardipanel). 5. Texture: Smooth.

2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with AWPA N1 using the following preservative for woodwork items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative treatment:

B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) and the following:

1. Preservative Chemicals: See Section “Heavy Timber Construction” for requirements.

C. Extent of Treatment: Treat all exterior architectural woodwork by pressure process.



2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative treated kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Nails: stainless steel.

C. Screws: stainless steel.

1. Provide self-drilling screws for metal framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.

D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent.

B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch(19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm).

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch(19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch(3 mm).

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

D. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built.

C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions or as drawn. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm).

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches(900 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm).

G. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed.

H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; replace woodwork where not possible to repair. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.


INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1


SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For plywood, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Plastic laminates.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following:



1. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type .

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION



A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, MDF, OSB and particle board shall not be used.

C. Plastic Lumber for trim and paneling: 4/4” Royal Wood, Precision Composites, Inc.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Laminart. c. Pioneer Plastics Corp. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 5 inches(127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches(62 mm) deep, and 5/16 inches(8 mm) in diameter.

E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.



H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Hardware at all locations - Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch(19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch(1.5 mm).

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch(19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch(3 mm). 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16

inch(1.5 mm).

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets.

B. Grade: Custom.



C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 3. Edges: HGS.

E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories:

a. Solid colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm).

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.



1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch(3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches(400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch(25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips OR toggle bolts or expansion anchors as required through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish as required.

Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.



2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses as shown on the drawings.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Rmax, Inc.

2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Install board insulation on wood substrates by mechanical attachment,

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1

SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal roof panels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed flashings and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies.

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system.


A. General Performance: Metal roof panels accessory materials shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 137 Pa (2.86 lbf/sq. ft.).

C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

D. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panel underlayment and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.



1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C (120 deg F), ambient; 100 deg C (180 deg F), material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1:10 (1-1/2 inches per 12 inches):

a. Flashing and trim.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Move metal panels from Owners storage warehouse unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal roof panels with flashing, trim, and construction of decks, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Installer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Weathertight Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet.

B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 13 mm (1/2 inch) wide and 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 0.76 to 1.0 mm (30 to 40 mils) thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 116 deg C (240 deg F); ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 29 deg C (20 deg F);

ASTM D 1970. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.

b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.




A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 0.4-mm (15-mil) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

C. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

D. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.

E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply over entire roof under metal roof panels, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 150 mm (6 inches) staggered 600 mm (24 inches) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 90 mm (3-1/2 inches). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

C. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.4 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof. Comply with installation requirements in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

1. Erect insulation and hold in place with furring members spaced 610 mm (24 inches) o.c. Securely attach furring members to roof deck at truss locations, ovoid screwing through roof deck at non truss locations because the underside of the deck will remain exposed. Space screws at truss spacing, 600 mm (24 inches) o.c.

3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated.

1. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement.

B. Install metal roof panels as follows:

1. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Locate and space fastenings using existing holes, additional fasteners may be added to

meet performance requirements. 3. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of

all openings. 4. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. Caps will be formed by

contractor from new 20 ga. galvanized material. When installation is finished use brown latex paint diluted 10:1 and a garden sprayer to randomly spray paint on new metal to “blend” with old metal. Provide sample for architect review before beginning application.

5. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.

C. Fasteners:

1. Steel Roof Panels: Use galvanized-steel fasteners.



D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m (10 feet) with no joints allowed within 600 mm (24 inches) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm (1 inch) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m (1/4 inch in 20 feet) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 3-mm (1/8-inch) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.



METAL FLASHING SHEET AND TRIM 07620 - 1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:

1. Exposed trim and fasciae. 2. Metal flashing.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as part of masonry work.

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. 3. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with

roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work.


A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.

B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone: 1. Wind Zone 1: Wind pressures of 21 to 30 psf (1.00 to 1.44 kPa).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.

C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details.

D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected.



1. 8-inch- (200-mm-) square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.

2. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish.

E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 REGLETS

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

D. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.

E. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style 1b.

F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.



G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.


A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

D. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

F. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.

H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.

B. Exposed Trim and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.

C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:


D. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material:




E. Eave Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:


F. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:


G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. (1.6 mm thick), hard tempered.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.

D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant.

1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.



F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.

2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

I. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.

J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.



JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Construction joints in modular building systems. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and

louvers. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Other joints as indicated.

3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry concrete walls and

partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. f. Other joints as indicated.

4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint

fillers and gaskets. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.




A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods.



D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F(5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:



1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and color matched in some areas.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; 898. b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).



3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, galvanized steel and ceramic tile.

F. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II-SG. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c SL. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL 2.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: ceramic tile.

G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant :

1. Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco; Vulkem 931.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick and wood.

2.4 EPOXY SEALANTS

A. Two-part modified epoxy sealant:

B. Products:

1. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp.; Prison-Loc 30.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.



B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F(minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.



2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.



F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to tooled joints.

H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet(300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet(300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.

4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.



5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in modular building systems..

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry.


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints between different materials listed above.


E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.



1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions.


G. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior control, expansion, and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of concrete flooring.

1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

H. Joint-Sealant Application: All areas accessible to zoo animals.

1. Joint Sealant: Two part modified epoxy sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



CUSTOM STEEL DOORS 08114 - 1

SECTION 08114 - CUSTOM STEEL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Custom hollow-metal steel doors.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for building anchors into and grouting custom steel frames in masonry construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Stainless-Steel Frames" for custom hollow-metal door frames manufactured from stainless steel.

3. Division 8 Sections for door hardware for custom steel doors. 4. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting custom steel doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of custom steel door and stainless-steel frame specified.

B. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of custom steel doors and stainless-steel frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 4. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 5. Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of custom steel door and stainless-steel frame.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain custom steel doors and stainless-steel frames through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-(100-mm-) high, wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.

1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch(6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating custom steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 2. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 3. Deronde Products, IncFleming Door Products Ltd.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 4. Habersham Metal Products Company. 5. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 6. LaForce. 7. National Custom Hollow Metal Doors & Frames. 8. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 9. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 10. Therma-Tru Corp.; HMF Division.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60(Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60(ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.

D. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

2.3 CUSTOM STEEL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than 1-3/4 inches(44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces.

1. Design: Flush panel.

B. Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from minimum 0.093-inch-(2.3-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet.

C. Interior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from minimum 0.093-inch-(2.3-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior door face sheet requirements.

D. Core Construction: Fabricate doors with core indicated. Provide thermal-resistance-rated cores. 1. Laminated Foam-Plastic Core: Fastened to face sheets with waterproof adhesive.

a. Polystyrene or polyisocyanurate board, as standard with manufacturer.

E. Top and Bottom Channels: Minimum 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-) thick, steel channel spot welded, not more than 6 inches(152 mm) o.c., to face sheets. 1. Top and bottom edges of doors closed with closing channels of same material and

thickness as face sheets; welded so webs of channels are flush with door edges.

F. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes:

1. Hinges: Minimum 0.167 inch(4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) wide by 6 inches(152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.



2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.093 inch(2.3 mm) thick.

3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch(1.7 mm) thick.

2.4 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch(0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with custom steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch(16 mm) high, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch(0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate custom steel doors and stainless-steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Custom Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI A250.4, Level A.

1. Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Single-Acting Doors: Bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3 mm in 50 mm). 3. Edges: Door face sheets joined at vertical edges by continuous weld extending full

height of door; with edges ground and polished, providing smooth, flush surfaces with no visible seams.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare custom steel doors to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Locate door hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,

"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."

D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or frame.

2. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.



2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish custom steel door and frames after assembly.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils(0.018 mm).

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of custom steel doors. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install custom steel doors plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Custom Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances indicated below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch(3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). b. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch(9.5 mm).



c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch(19 mm).


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work including custom steel doors that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Clean grout and other bonding material off custom steel doors immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

D. Galvannealed Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES 08130 - 1

SECTION 08130 - STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for moderately corrosive applications: 1. Stainless-steel, hollow-metal frames.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for building anchors into and grouting stainless-steel frames in masonry construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Custom Steel Doors" for custom hollow-metal doors to be used with stainless steel frames.

3. Division 8 Sections for door hardware for custom steel doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Indicated as the specified thicknesses for which over- and under-thickness tolerances apply, according to ASTM A 480/A 480M.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of stainless-steel frame specified.

B. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of stainless-steel frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles. 2. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 5. Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Oversize Construction Certification: For stainless-steel assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies; include statement that doors comply with requirements of design, materials, and construction but have not been subjected to fire test.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of stainless-steel door and frame.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain custom steel doors and stainless-steel frames through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test according to UBC Standard 7-2. After 5 minutes into the test, the

neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches(1000 mm) or less above the sill.

2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-protection-rated door assemblies except for size.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-(100-mm-) high, wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.

1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch(6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating stainless-steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. American Steel Products Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.



3. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 4. Deronde Products, Inc. 5. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 6. Habersham Metal Products Company. 7. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 8. National Custom Hollow Metal Doors & Frames. 9. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 10. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 11. Therma-Tru Corp.; HMF Division.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, austenitic stainless steel, Type indicated.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A60(ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.

E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of 4 inches(102 mm) for stainless-steel door frames built into concrete or masonry, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES

A. General: Fabricate frames of construction indicated, with faces of corners mitered and contact edges closed tight.

1. Frames for Doors: Welded. 2. Frames: Fabricated from 0.093-inch-(2.3-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.

B. Material: Fabricate frames from stainless-steel sheet, Type as follows: 1. Frames for all Applications: Type 304.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from stainless steel or steel, as indicated in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article, to comply with the following minimum sizes:



1. Hinges: Minimum 0.167 inch(4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/4 inches(32 mm) wide by 10 inches(254 mm) long, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.

2. Strikes , Hold-Open Arms, and Closers: Minimum 0.093 inch(2.3 mm) thick. 3. Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.093 inch(2.3 mm) thick.

D. Head Reinforcement: Minimum 0.093-inch-(2.3-mm-) thick, steel channel or angle stiffener.

E. Jamb Anchors: Formed from material indicated in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article.

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.053 inch(1.3 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches(50 mm) wide by 10 inches(250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch(4.0 mm) thick.

F. Floor Anchors: Formed from material indicated in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article, not less than 0.067 inch(1.7 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate stainless-steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Stainless-Steel Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same thickness metal as frames. 1. Frames for All Applications: Fabricate frames with internal components, including

anchors, plaster guards, and hardware reinforcements, from Type 304 stainless-steel sheet.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches(457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches(813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 mm) in height. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches(2286 to 2438 mm) in height.

5. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches(1219 mm) wide, provide continuous head reinforcement for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.



C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless-steel frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Locate door hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,

"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."

D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings such that each

lite is capable of being removed independently.


A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

1. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. a. Grain for Frame Jambs: Vertical (long dimension of jamb). b. Grain for Frame Heads: Vertical.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish stainless-steel doors and frames after assembly.

D. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.

E. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stainless-steel frames.

1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of stainless-steel door-frame connections before frame installation.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.

B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace stainless-steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install stainless-steel frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Stainless-Steel Frames: Install stainless-steel frames for doors and other openings, of size and profile indicated.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,

field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and

plaster containing antifreezing agents.

2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Install grout in lifts and take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust stainless-steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:



a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with stainless-steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches(230 mm) o.c., and not more than 2 inches(50 mm) o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work including stainless-steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Clean grout and other bonding material off stainless-steel doors and frames immediately after installation.

C. Stainless-Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainless steel and polish to match undamaged finish.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1

SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of electric-motor operated overhead coiling doors: 1. Insulated service doors.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and

accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.


A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components:

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 15 lbf/sq. ft.(960 Pa), acting inward and outward.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following:

1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for units with factory-applied finishes.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.




A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. 2. Atlas Door; Div. of Clopay Building Products Company, Inc. 3. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 4. Metro Door. 5. Overhead Door Corp. 6. Raynor. 7. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 8. Windsor Door, a MAGNATRAX Corporation.

1.8 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS) sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.

a. Minimum Base-Metal (Uncoated) Thickness: 0.0209 inch(0.55 mm). b. Flat profile slats.

2. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces.

3. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat.

B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch(38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.



1.9 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Fabricate hoods for steel doors of minimum 0.028-inch-(0.7-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90(Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

2. Shape: Round. 3. Exterior-Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying joint

sealant.

B. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch-(3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to head of opening. 1. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch-(3-mm-) thick

seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

C. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

1.10 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft.(2.5 mm/m) of span under full load.

C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

1.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.

E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.

F. Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft-type door operator unit consisting of electric motor, worm-gear running-in-oil drive, and chain and sprocket secondary drive.

G. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps(0.2 m/s) and not more than 1 fps(0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. 2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building

electrical system. 4. Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motor, fitted with plugged drain, and

controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated.

H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

1. Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type,

NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

I. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

1.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

1.13 GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES

A. Factory galvanized Finish:



PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.

2.2 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

2.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."



DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 08710 -DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or builder’s hardware that are

required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Hinges. 2. Lock cylinders and keys. 3. Lock and latch sets. 4. Bolts. 5. Push/pull units. 6. Closers. 7. Overhead holders. 8. Miscellaneous door control devices. 9. Door trim units. 10. Protection plates. 11. Weatherstripping 12. Thresholds.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 8 Section "Custom Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with hollow

metal frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Stainless Steel Frames" for silencers integral with hollow metal

frames.

D. Work Included: All labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete work specified herein:

1. Furnish:

a. All finishing hardware as shown or specified and as obviously necessary to complete the building in accordance with the intent of the general drawings and details.

b. Any revision of hardware which may be necessary to conform with the details.

2. Conformance with exit code and Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.



B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper

size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where

acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation

of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years of documented experience.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing

facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project with a minimum of five years documented experience, the supplier shall employ full time, an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC), a member of the Society of AHC in good standing, who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final

instructions in writing.

C. Comply with the Requirements of the State Fire and Exit Code: Exit devices shall be furnished at all locations required by codes and NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and RS40, even though hardware of other functions may have been listed in schedule of hardware furnished by hardware supplier.

D. Comply with ANSI Standards: A115 Series and ANSI 156 Series.



1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware

supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer

until each is satisfied that count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).

E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control

handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed.

1. Hinges - Butts Stanley, Hager, McKinney 2. Locksets Best 3. Panic devices Sargent, Von Duprin, Precision, Dorma 4. Door closers Sargent, Corbin-Russwin, Dorma 5. Overhead Door Holders Sargent, Glynn-Johnson, Rixson 6. Flush Bolts Trimco, Ives, Rockwood 7. Push/Pull, kickplates Trimco, Trego, Rockwood 8. Thresholds, Weatherstrip National Guard, Pemko, Zero 9. Door stops Ives, Tremco, Rockwood 10. Cylinders / Keying Best 11. Other manufacturers may be considered provided they are approved, based on Division

1, Section “Product Requirements”.

2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:

1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one

manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one



manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.

B. Hardware listed shall be for each leaf on pairs of doors

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Hardware supplier shall make his own schedule. He shall carefully examine the plans and furnish hardware to conform with hands, bevels, door thickness and widths. Closers, stops, holders, kickplates, etc. shall be of the proper size for the particular door width to which they are applied.

2. All hardware for use in connection with metal frames shall be made to template and furnished with the proper size machine screws. All necessary template drawings for cutouts shall be furnished the fabricator of the metal doors, metal frames and wood doors without charge. Templates are to be used by fabricator in making cut-outs to receive the hardware specified.

3. All hardware shall be wrapped, packed in individual packages with all necessary screws and bolts marked for the opening to which they apply. Careful consideration shall be given to the furnishing of proper screws, so as to give best results.

4. Hardware supplier shall, after approval of schedule, furnish other subcontractors or suppliers with necessary templates as required.

5. Hardware shall be received in the hardware supplier's warehouse for checking and consolidation prior to delivery to job site. No hardware shall be shipped directly from the manufacturer to job site.

6. The name of a certain brand, make, manufacturer or definite specification is utilized only to denote the quality standard of product desired and the bidder is not restricted to the specific brand, make, manufacturer or definite specification named. The specific brand, make, manufacturer or definite specification named in used only to convey to prospective bidders the general style, type, character and quality of the product desired. Equivalent products will be acceptable if preapproved by the Architect.

B. Keying: Locks and cylinders shall be Best removable core key system. Furnish Best

removable 7 pin cores grand master-keyed to Owner’s existing system with a new master key for this project. Furnish construction cores to be used during construction. Replace with final cores at Substantial Completion. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required, either new or integrated with Owner’s system. Keys shall be nickel silver only.

Furnish three (3) change keys for each lock, five (5) master keys for each master key. Furnish ten (10) keys for the temporary construction cylinder cores. Deliver all keys to Owner or Owner’s representative and obtain a written receipt.

C. Butts: Size of hinges to be 4 1/2 high for 1-3/4" doors up to 36" wide; 37" to 48" doors to have 5

inch high butts, width of the butts to be determined by the trim condition affecting the throw. Doors up to 5' high shall have one pair of butts; doors over 5' high but less than 90" shall have one and one-half pair butts; over 90" but less than 120" to have two pair butts. All exterior doors opening out to have non-removable pins. All doors with closers shall have ball bearing butts. Dutch doors to have two pair butts.

D. Flush Bolts and Dust Proof Strikes: For the inactive leaf of pairs of doors not having other

locking arrangements. Furnish two bolts 458 at non-labeled doors and 559 x 357 for metal label doors or 556 x 356 for wood label doors. Furnish 458-6" flush bolt for Dutch doors.

E. Door Silencer: Provide silencers to all interior doors except door with weatherstripping.

Provide three (3) for each single door and four (4) for each pair of doors.



F. Door Closers: Closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action. Closers shall have separate adjustments for latch speed, general speed and back check. Parallel arms drop brackets and transom brackets shall be furnished as required. All closures to be mounted on the interior side of the door.

G. Door not specifically mentioned shall have hardware of equal quality, design and function as

required by intended use and conditions in keeping with codes and NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and RS40.

H. Finishes:

1. As noted in hardware schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.

1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"

by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant

complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."

F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

G. During construction, use construction cores in all cylinder locations. At time of Substantial

Completion, replace all construction cores with cores keyed as per Owner’s instruction. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy

of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or



area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and

hardware finishes.

D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latch sets and lock sets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:

1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of

doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the

maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials,

or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the

performance of the hardware. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Hardware Set 1

3 - Butts CB1960 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 32D 1 - Lockset 45H7TA3H 630 1 - Door closer 281 PSH EN 1 - Drip strip 16A AL 1 - Threshold 513 AL 1 - Door Bottom 312V AL 1 - Set weatherstripping 160SA AL

Hardware Set 2

6 - Butts CB1960 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 32D 1 - Lockset 45H7TA3H 630 1 - Door closer 281 PSH EN 1 - Overhead door holder 594H 32D 2 – Flush bolts 458 – 12” 32D 1 - Threshold 513 AL 1 - Drip strip 16A AL 1 - Door Bottom 312V AL 1 - Set weatherstripping 160SA AL

Hardware Set 3

3 - Butts CB1960 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 32D 1 - Lockset 45H7L3H 630 1 - Door closer 281 PSH EN



Hardware Set 4

6 - Butts CB1960 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 32D 1 - Lockset 45H7L3H 630 1 - Door closer 281 PSH EN 1 - Overhead door holder 594H 32D 2 – Flush bolts 458 – 12” 32D



GLAZING 08800 - 1

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters or inches according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

D. Animal Barn Glazing: Glazing shall always be tempered and laminated in thicknesses noted on drawings. Minimum 2 pieces of 6 mm tempered glass


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:


GLAZING 08800 - 2

a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated, but not less than wind loads

applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads."

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

1) Load Duration: 3 seconds.

c. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F(67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F(100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-(300-mm-) square Samples for glass and of 12-inch-(300-mm-) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

1. Each type of laminated glass with colored interlayer.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For installers.

F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Requirements: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. Owner may hire an independent inspector to observe installation of waterproofing sealants.


GLAZING 08800 - 3

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

C. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period.

1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than [eight] <Insert number> pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.

F. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft.(0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft.(0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."


GLAZING 08800 - 4


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F(4.4 deg C).

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated.


GLAZING 08800 - 5

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-

strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.

C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following:

1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.

a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's

standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.

2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 5. Any material indicated above.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.


GLAZING 08800 - 6

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants :

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 3) Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic). 4) GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. 5) Pecora Corporation; 864. 6) Pecora Corporation; 890. 7) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641. 8) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. 9) Tremco; Spectrem 3.

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 100/50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.

1) Use O Glazing Substrates: aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel and wood.

2. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 795.

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.

1) Use O Glazing Substrates: galvanized steel, stainless steel and concrete.


GLAZING 08800 - 7

f. Applications: Public side of glazing at underwater viewing building. Water side of water holding glazing if contractor assumes responsibility for its use, in writing, acknowledging that the manufacturer’s literature does not recommend 795 for under water exposure.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.


GLAZING 08800 - 8

2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm minimum thickness.

2.9 LAMINATED-GLASS UNITS

A. Heat-Treated Laminated-Glass Units:

1. Kind LT, consisting of multiple lites of fully tempered float glass. 2. All Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 3. Plastic Interlayer:

a. Thickness: 0.090 inch(2.29 mm). b. Interlayer Color: Clear.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge


GLAZING 08800 - 9

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches(1270 mm) as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch(3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.


GLAZING 08800 - 10

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


GLAZING 08800 - 11

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 1

SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures. d. Interior galvanized and stainless steel.

2. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass.

3. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts.



4. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of structural metal. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.

D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F(7 and 35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal.(3.8 L) or 1

case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: Match Architect's samples.

2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Exterior Fiber-reinforced Cement Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Acrylic Masonry Sealer No. 066: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils(0.018 mm).

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm).

B. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm).



2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm).

C. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm).

2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm).

2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils(0.028 mm).

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm).

B. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).



2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm).

2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm).

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).

3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm).

4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.



B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be

painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. c. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall

construction occurs on back side.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.



E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.



F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket

material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.



3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels: Provide the following finish systems over exterior, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels:

1. Semi-gloss Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic paint.

B. Smooth Wood: Provide the following finish systems over smooth wood trim, and other smooth exterior wood surfaces:

1. Most manufacturers recommend two finish coats over a primer over open-grain and unpainted wood semi-gloss Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic paint.

C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items.

1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.

3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:

1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces.



FLOOR SEALER 09934 - 1

SECTION 09934 - FLOOR SEALER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Surface preparation. 2. Application of floor sealer.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for coordination with concrete curing. 2. General painting is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data, including manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application

instructions for each sealer material proposed for use.

1. List each material and cross-reference the specific system and application. Identify each sealer material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Certification by the sealer manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).


A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's name and stock number. 3. Date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Handling instructions and precautions.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum

ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue.

1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary

precautionary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are adequately protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying sealer.




A. Apply sealer only when the temperature of surfaces to be sealed and surrounding air temperatures are between 40 deg F (4 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Do not apply sealer in rain, fog or mist; when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at

temperatures less than 5 F deg (3 C deg) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions.

1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified

before proceeding with or continuing with the coating operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Advanced Floor Products. 2. The Bomanite Company.

2.2 FLOOR SEALER

A. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality sealer material of the various types specified. Material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Advanced Floor Products: Retro Plate 99. 2. The Bomanite Company: Con-Shield.


A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sealer is to be applied for conformance with requirements for sealer application. Surfaces to be sealed must be thoroughly dry before sealers are applied.

1. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of application will be construed as the applicator's acceptance of surfaces and

conditions.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, and similar items in place that are not to be sealed, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and sealing.



1. Following completion of sealing operations, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled

in the trades involved.

B. Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean and dry before beginning work.

1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry.

C. Mixing: Mix and prepare sealers according to manufacturer's directions. Stir thoroughly before

applying sealer and frequently during application to maintain consistency.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Minimum Spreading Rate: Apply sealer at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to ensure proper penetration of material.

1. Do not apply sealer on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make certain that each coat

is dry and hard before the succeeding coat is applied.

B. Apply sealer evenly by spraying.

1. Spraying: Use conventional spraying equipment. Ensure that an adequate amount of sealer is applied by flooding the surface. Backbrush immediately after each section is coated.

2. Follow Manufacturers direction for application, agitation, soak in time and excess material removal. If the sealer is not left on the floor long enough optimum results will not be achieved. If the sealer is left on the floor too long it will form an unacceptable white residue on the surface.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from the site.

1. After completing sealing work, clean adjacent surfaces. Remove spattered sealer by

proper methods using care not to scratch or otherwise damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether sealed or not, against damage from sealer. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, damaged items as acceptable to the Architect.

1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly sealed finishes. After completing sealing

work, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 2. At the completion of the work of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

sealed surfaces. END OF SECTION 09934


ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 09963 - 1

SECTION 09963 - ELASTOMERIC COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to exterior surfaces.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.


A. Provide elastomeric coatings that comply with performance requirements specified in MPI 113.

B. Provide elastomeric coating systems with the following properties as determined by test methods indicated:

1. Elongation: Not less than 100 percent with a tensile strength of 200 psi(1379 kPa) and not less than 88 percent recovery after 1 hour and 90 percent recovery after 24 hours when tested according to ASTM D 2370 using parameters established by MPI 113.

2. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, peeling, blistering, chalking, or visual deterioration after 1000 hours when tested according to procedures in ASTM G 155.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: No crack formation when tested according to ASTM D 1737.

4. Moisture-Vapor Transmission: Not less than 2.0 perms(115 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) according to ASTM D 1653.

5. Wind-Driven Rain Resistance: No water penetration according to procedures in FS TT-C-555.

6. Minimum Solids Content by Volume: Not less than 45 percent.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each elastomeric coating system specified. Include crack fillers, block fillers, and primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.



3. Certification by elastomeric coating manufacturer that products supplied comply with local VOC regulations.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips indicating colors selected.

C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.

3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete Unit Masonry: 4-by-8-inch(100-by-200-mm)rectangular Samples of

concrete masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each color and texture.

D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.

E. Material Certificates: For each elastomeric coating material, signed by manufacturers.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying elastomeric coating systems similar in material and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers andother undercoat materials from same manufacturer as finish coats.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 4. Thinning instructions (if permitted). 5. Application instructions. 6. Color name and number. 7. Handling instructions and precautions. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect elastomeric coating materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.




A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C), unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before starting or continuing coating operation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Elastomeric Coating Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, water penetration through the coating.

B. Warranty Period for Elastomeric Coatings: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra elastomeric coating materials from same production run as materials applied and in quantities described below. Package materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with 2 gal.(7.5 L) of each color of elastomeric coating materials applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated in other Part 2 articles.

B. Manufacturers Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. (Sonneborn). 2. Sto Concrete Restoration; Sto Finish Systems Division (Sto). 3. Tamms Industries, Inc. (Tamms). 4. Thoro, Div of ChemRex, Inc. (Thoro).

2.2 ELASTOMERIC COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, elastomeric finish-coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality elastomeric coating materials that are factory formulated, comply with requirements in FS TT-C-555, and are recommended by manufacturer for the application indicated. Material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance of proposed substitutions.

C. Colors and Textures: Custom match Architect's samples.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS

A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated, high-performance latex block fillers. 1. Sonneborn; Colorflex Block Filler #749: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than

1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 2. Sto; Flexible Coating CR212 Thinned 1:5 with 1 Gal.(3.8 L) of Water per Each 5

Gal.(19 L) of CR212: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils(0.254 mm). 3. Tamms; H/P Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 4. Thoro; Thoro Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033

mm).

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated, alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex primer. 1. Sonneborn; primer not required. 2. Sto; Flexible Coating CR212 Thinned 1:5 with 1 Gal.(3.8 L) of Water per Each 5

Gal.(19 L) of CR212: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils(0.254 mm). 3. Tamms; H/P Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 4. Thoro; primer not required.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC FINISH-COAT MATERIALS

A. Textured Elastomeric Finish: Textured, factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating.

1. Sonneborn; Sonocoat Flextex Textured Elastomeric Coating: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 8.0 mils(0.020 mm). 2. Sto; Flexible Coating CR235: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10

mils(0.254 mm). 3. Tamms; Tammolastic Textured Elastomeric Decorative and Protective Coating: Applied

at a dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils(0.254 mm). 4. Thoro; Thorocoat Waterproof Elastomeric Coating: Applied at a dry film thickness of not

less than 8.0 mils(0.020 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for coating application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.

1. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of coating application will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surface conditions.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using coatings specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled in trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coating systems. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for particular substrate conditions and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare brick, concrete, concrete unit masonry, stucco, and

similar surfaces to receive elastomeric coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, release agents, grease, oils, and similar impediments to good adhesion by water blasting followed by a clear water rinse.

a. Remove mildew and neutralize surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions before patching materials are applied.

b. Roughen as required to remove glaze. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer.

c. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve concrete curing, use mechanical methods for surface preparation.

d. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.



D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare materials according to coating manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying elastomeric coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. If surface film forms, do not stir film into material. If necessary, remove film and strain coating material before using.

3. If manufacturer permits thinning, use only thinners recommended by manufacturer, and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in coating schedule. 2. Do not paint over conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film, such as

dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, and scuffed surfaces. 3. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.

B. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. Number of coats and film thickness required are same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer.

2. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until coating film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

D. Application Procedures: Apply elastomeric coatings by brush, roller, or spray according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for material being applied. 2. Rollers: Use professional-quality quick-release rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile

sheep's wool covers with a 1- to 1-1/4-inch(25.4- to 31.8-mm) nap as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.



E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment, building up film thickness of two coats in one pass.

F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

G. Prime Coats: If recommended by manufacturer, apply a primer to material being coated before applying finish coats.

H. Brush Application: Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.

I. Roller Application: Keep cover wet at all times; do not dry roll. Work in sections. Lay on required amount of material, working material into grooves and rough areas; then level material, working it into surface.

J. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by manufacturer's written instructions and authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work not complying with specified requirements.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during coating operations:

1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner:

a. Elongation. b. Accelerated weathering. c. Low-temperature flexibility. d. Moisture-vapor transmission. e. Wind-driven rain resistance. f. Minimum solids content by volume.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show materials being used do not comply with requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible.



3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

1. After completing coating work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods, being careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades from damage whether being coated or not. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating as approved by Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.

1. After construction activities of other trades are complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete: Provide the following elastomeric coating systems over exterior concrete surfaces:

1. Medium Textured Elastomeric Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer if required by manufacturer.

a. Primer: Concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Textured elastomeric finish.

B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following elastomeric coating systems over exterior concrete unit masonry surfaces:

1. Medium Textured Elastomeric Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a concrete unit masonry block filler.

a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Textured elastomeric finish.



VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1

SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Porcelain enamel markerboards. 2. Plastic-impregnated cork tackboards.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated. Include motor capacities and individual panel weights for sliding chalkboard and markerboard units.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of visual display board required.

1. Include dimensioned elevations. Show location of joints between individual panels where unit dimensions exceed maximum panel length.

2. Include sections of typical trim members. 3. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and textures available for the following:

D. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display boards through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements before preparation of Shop Drawings and before fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating chalkboards without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special porcelain enamel chalkboard warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Porcelain Enamel Chalkboard Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace porcelain enamel chalkboards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within the specified warranty period, provided the manufacturer's written instructions for handling, installation, protection, and maintenance have been followed.

1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: a. Carolina Chalkboard Co. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. c. Greensteel, Inc. d. Newline Products, Inc. (NPI).

2. Tackboards: a. Carolina Chalkboard Co. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. c. Greensteel, Inc. d. Newline Products, Inc. (NPI).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards and Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure-laminated, porcelain enamel chalkboards of 3-ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing.

1. Face Sheet: 0.024-inch(0.61-mm) enameling grade steel especially processed for temperatures used in coating porcelain on steel. Coat exposed face and edges with a 3-coat process consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with a 2-coat process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F(649 deg C). a. Cover Coat: Provide manufacturer's standard, light-colored, special writing surface

with gloss finish intended for use with erasable dry markers.



2. Core: 1/2-inch-(12.4-mm-) thick, tempered hardboard core material. 3. Backing Sheet: 0.015-inch-(0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum-sheet backing. 4. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant, thermoplastic-type

adhesive.

B. Plastic-Impregnated Cork Tackboards: Seamless sheet, 1/2-inch-(12.4-mm-) thick, ground natural cork compressed with a resinous binder with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout, laminated to burlap backing. Provide color and texture as scheduled or as selected from manufacturer's standards.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch-(1.57-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum alloy, size and shape as indicated, to suit type of installation. Provide straight, single-length units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 1. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, box-type, aluminum chalktray with

slanted front and cast-aluminum end closures for each chalkboard.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive.

B. Assembly: Provide factory-assembled chalkboard and tackboard units, unless field-assembled units are required.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between chalkboards and tackboards.

2.5 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine wall surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation of visual display boards.

1. Surfaces to receive chalkboards or markerboards shall be free of dirt, scaling paint, and projections or depressions that would affect smooth, finished surfaces of chalkboards or markerboards.

2. Surfaces to receive tackboards shall be dry and free of substances that would impair the bond between tackboards and substrate.

3. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment.

B. Install units in locations indicated and at mounting heights required by the owner and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.


A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly.

B. Clean units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 SCHEDUAL

1. Install one 30” tall x 24” wide markerboard and one 30” tall x 24” wide tackboard in each nighthouse.



FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1

SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Portable fire extinguishers.

a. Portable fire extinguishers.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Signs" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and

cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




1. Portable Fire Extinguishers:

a. Amerex Corporation. b. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. c. J.L. Industries, Inc. d. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co. e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Fire-Protection Cabinet Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.

B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to wall surface.

2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. a. Application Process: Vinyl letters. b. Lettering Color: Black. c. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.


3.2 INSTALLATION



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.

B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to structure square and plumb.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. FE Bracket mounted.



ZOO EQUIPMENT 11161 - 1

SECTION 11161 - ZOO EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hayrack. 2. Giraffe hay feeder. 3. Animal squeeze (huggers).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, furnished specialties, accessories, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Maintenance Data: For zoo equipment to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.


A. Store and handle scales in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage.

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.



1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabrication of equipment without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each type of zoo equipment is based on the

product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product, submit product for approval prior substitution.

2.2 HAYRACK

A. Product: Manger and hayrack model C05710N. 1. Supplier:

a. NASCO Farm & Ranch Supplies. 901 Janesville Ave. Fort Atkinson. WI 53538 (920) 563-2446.

b. Or approved equal.

2.3 GIRAFFE HAY FEEDER

A. Product: Giraffe hay/grain feeder.

1. Manufacturer:

a. Fauna Research, Inc. 8 Bard Avenue



Red Hook, NY 12571 (845) 758-2549


2.4 ANIMAL SQUEEZE (HUGGER)

A. Product: Exotic Animal Restraint or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Manufacturer:

a. Fauna Research, Inc. 8 Bard Avenue Red Hook, NY 12571 (845) 758-2549


B. Squeeze Schedule: - 1. Giraffe Restraint

Galvanized 8’ Long 12’ Wide 18’ High Shift Door at each end Escape Door, Horizontal Squeeze 12 Access Doors, 2 Catwalks, Belly Bands and Winch 2. Okapi Restraint Galvanized 8’ Long 53.5” Wide 110.5” High Shift Door at each end

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of zoo equipment.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems for zoo equipment to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls and floors of pits for suitable conditions where recessed zoo equipment is to be installed. Pits shall be plumb and square and properly sloped for drainage.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate size and location of zoo equipment indicated to be attached to or recessed into concrete or masonry, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation.

B. Clean recessed pits of debris.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install zoo equipment, including motors, pumps, control stations, wiring and accessories as required for a complete installation.

B. Hayrack: Attach hayrack securely to wall at height required by Owner with 0.375” diameter stainless steel through bolts or expansion bolts as required by wall condition.

C. Giraffe Hay Feeder: Attach securely to wall at height required by Owner with 0.375” diameter stainless steel through bolts or expansion bolts as required by wall condition.

D. Animal Squeeze (Huggers): Shall be installed by manufacturer.


A. Adjust zoo equipment for proper, safe, efficient operation.

B. Restore marred, abraded surfaces to their original condition.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain zoo equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."


AUDUBON ZOO IMPROVEMENTS

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 1

SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of food service equipment.

1. Stainless steel sinks and counters.


1. Refer to Division 15 Sections for service roughing-ins; drain traps; atmospheric vents; valves, pipes, and fittings; and other materials required to complete food service equipment installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of food service equipment indicated. Include manufacturer's model number and accessories and requirements for access and maintenance clearances, water and drainage, power or fuel, and service-connections including roughing-in dimensions.

B. Shop Drawings: For food service equipment not manufactured as standard production and

catalog items by manufacturers. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions, fabrication details, service requirements, and attachments to other work.

1. Piping Diagrams: Details of piping systems and differentiating between manufacturer-

installed and field-installed piping.

C. Maintenance Data: Operation, maintenance, and parts data for food service equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include a product schedule as follows:


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing food service equipment, who has completed installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing food service

equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of food service equipment through one source from a

single manufacturer.



D. SMACNA Standard: Where applicable, fabricate food service equipment to comply with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," unless otherwise indicated.


A. Deliver food service equipment as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.

B. Store food service equipment in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of food service equipment installation areas by field measurements before equipment fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish required dimensions and proceed with fabricating equipment without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Project Warranty:

1. The manufacturer shall warrant that any part of the kitchen equipment is free from

defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of ten (5) years from the date of substantial completion.



1. Tables:



a. Advance Tabco Mfg. b. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher leveled, and in finish specified in "Stainless-Steel Finishes" Article.

B. Stainless-Steel Tube: ASTM A 554, Grade MT-304, and in finish specified in "Stainless-Steel

Finishes" Article.

C. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening coating. Provide coating compounded for permanent adhesion to metal in T1/8-inch TT (3-mm)T thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.


A. Fabricate food service equipment according to NSF 2 requirements. Factory assemble equipment to greatest extent possible.

B. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that

minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Provide ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.

1. Welded Butt Joints: Provide full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,

continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams, filling in with solder, or spot welding.

2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining surfaces.

3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth and undepressed.

C. Fabricate field-assembled equipment prepared for field-joining methods indicated. For metal

butt joints, comply with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or fastening devices.

E. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks

mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing.

F. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.

G. Cap exposed fastener threads, with stainless-steel lock washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL EQUIPMENT

A. Provide Advance Tabco Tables Mfg., Inc. product series KSS or approved equal 30” wide and in lengths and locations indicated on drawings

B. Edges and Backsplashes: Provide equipment edges and backsplashes indicated complying

with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Tables: Fabricate with reinforced tops, legs, and reinforced undershelves or cross bracing to

comply with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Tops: Minimum T0.0781-inch- TT (1.984-mm-)T thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Legs: T1-5/8 inch TT (41.3 mm) T OD, minimum T0.0625-inch- TT (1.588-mm-)T thick stainless steel with stainless-steel gusset and adjustable insert bullet-type feet with minimum adjustment of T1 inchTT (25 mm)T up or down without exposing threads, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Undershelves: Minimum T0.625-inch- TT (1.588-mm-)T thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Top and Undershelf Reinforcement: Provide minimum T0.0781-inch- TT (1.984-mm-)T thick, stainless-steel reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Sinks: Fabricate of minimum T0.0781-inch- TT (1.984-mm-) T thick stainless steel with fully welded, 1-piece construction. Construct 2 sides and bottom of sink compartment from 1 stainless-steel sheet with ends welded integral and without overlapping joints or open spaces between

compartments. Provide double-wall partitions between compartments with T2-inch- TT (13-mm-)T

radius rounded tops that are welded integral with sink body. Cove horizontal, vertical, and interior corners with T3/4-inch TT (19-mm)T radius. Pitch and crease sinks to waste for drainage without pooling. Seat wastes in die-stamped depressions without solder, rivets, or welding.

1. Depth: Min. 12" 2. Wastes: T1-1/2-inch TT (38-mm) T stainless-steel strainer plate. 3. Drainboards: Minimum T0.0781-inch- TT (1.984-mm-)T thick stainless steel, pitched to sink at

T1/8 inch/12 inches TT (3 mm/300 mm) T of length. Reinforce drainboards with minimum T0.0781-inch- TT (1.984-mm-)T thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Legs: T1-5/8 inch TT (41.3 mm) T OD, minimum T0.0625-inch- TT (1.588-mm-)T thick stainless steel with stainless-steel gusset welded to T0.1094-inch- TT (2.779-mm-)T thick, stainless-steel support plate. Provide adjustable insert bullet-type feet with minimum adjustment of T1 inchTT (25 mm)T up or down without exposing threads, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Drawers: Provide lift-out type, 1-piece, die-stamped drawer pan fabricated from T0.050-inch- TT

(1.27-mm-)T thick stainless steel with inside corners radiuses. Support drawer pan with T0.0625-inch- TT (1.588-mm-)T thick, stainless-steel channel frame welded to drawer front. Mount drawers on NSF-certified, full-extension, stainless-steel drawer slides that have minimum T100-lbTT (45-kg)T load capacity per pair, ball-bearing rollers, and positive stop.


A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish

indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Concealed Surfaces: No. 2B finish (bright, cold-rolled, unpolished finish).

C. Exposed Surfaces: No. 3 finish.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter



and leave surfaces chemically clean.

E. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.


A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of food service equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of connections before

installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install food service equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,

original design, and referenced standards.

B. Complete equipment field assembly, where required, using methods indicated.

1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler. 2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent

finish. Comply with welding requirements in "Fabrication, General" Article.

C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing,

unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints. 3.3 PROTECTING

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure food service equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Stainless steel sinks and counters: Where items of this designation are indicated, provide products complying with the following:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. TABCO KSS Series

2. Accessories: As noted on drawings supply units with drawers measuring 23" x 17"x 5"



deep and sinks measuring 16" x 20" x 12" deep, with pantry type faucet. END OF SECTION 11400


MODULAR BUILDING PARTITIONS 13126 - 1

SECTION 13126 - MODULAR BUILDING PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single story animal holding building partitions.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of building partition system component. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

1. Framing system. 2. Wall panels. 3. Doors. 4. Accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following building partition system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans and templates before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach partitions.

2. Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.

C. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Include details of reinforcement.

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Include details of fabrication and assembly of door hardware. Organize schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified erector.

B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following products:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.



2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Shop primers.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to building partition systems including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Condition of work performed by other trades. b. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials and erector's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements:

1. Established Dimensions for partitions: Comply with established dimensions on approved plans.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace partition components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes or failure of components within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from FCP, Inc. and as indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Choice Barns. 2. FCP, Inc.

2.2 PARTITION SYSTEMS

A. Description: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a partition system capable of withstanding loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

1. List of base bid materials -

2. List of Alternate 2 & 3 materials, each alternate requires half of the material listed -

QTY COMPONENT DESCRIPTION SIZE

4.00 Stall Fronts 1-5/8" Vertical Grills & Sliding Door -Titan 13'4" x 8'

Screws for Roofing, Siding, and Structure 8.00 Windows & Grills 1-5/8" Vertical Grill 4' x 4'

16.00 Miscellaneous Cut Charge -Custom Wall / Gable / Truss Sizes 8.00

4.00 Component Sliding Door -Titan 3'4" x 7'

8.00 Component Shutter (Each) -Titan 4' x 4'

1.00 Engineering Assembly Drawings

4.00 Stall Fronts 1-5/8" Vertical Grills & Hinged Door -Titan 15'4" x 8'

2.00 Stall Fronts 1-5/8"Vertical Grills & Hinged Door -Titan 14'8" x 8'

500.00

Screws for Roofing, Siding, and Structure 6.00 Windows & Grills 1-5/8" Vertical Grill 4' x 4'

16.00 Miscellaneous Cut Charge -Custom Wall / Gable / Truss Sizes 12.00 Miscellaneous Connector Channel Welded to 3" x 3" Post 8.00

4.00 Component Sliding Door -Titan 3'4" x 7'

12.00 Component Shutter (Each) -Titan 4' x 4'

6.00 Component Barrel Bolt Latch -Hardware Style 1.00 Engineering Assembly Drawings



2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories as standard with partition system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.

1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

2. Fabricate framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchors with erector present, for compliance with requirements and partition system manufacturer's tolerances.

C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition.

3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Examination: Examine framing to verify that structural-panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer.

1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating panels, to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to panel installation.

B. General: Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

3.4 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular walls. Anchor wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.



3.5 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION

A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturers' written instructions. Coordinate installation with other components.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Door Hardware: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean surfaces immediately after installing. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, dirt, and other substances.



MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-1

SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract apply to the work specified in DIVISION 15 -

MECHANICAL.

B. Separation of Division 15 into Sections is for convenience only and is not intended to

establish limits of work.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide labor, materials and equipment for complete and operating systems.

1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching for the work of this Division shall be in accordance with the

requirements of the General Conditions.

B. Work of this Division shall include providing information for any required openings to those

responsible for concrete slabs and other concrete members.

C. Field cut openings shall be located to avoid the reinforcing. Locations shall be subject to

approval of the Architect/Engineer.

D. No structural members shall be field cut or pierced without the written approval of the

Architect/Engineer.

1.4 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show the general arrangement and

approximate physical sizes of equipment, piping and ductwork. Every nut, bolt, brace,

hanger, etc., is not indicated or specified; all items required, necessary or incidental, for the

proper and dependable operation of each system shall be provided under this Division

whether specifically referred to or not. Refer to architectural drawings for all necessary

dimensions.

1.5 CODES AND PUBLICATIONS

A. Work shall be executed in accordance with best engineering practices, guidelines, and the

latest edition of all applicable Codes and Publications which shall include but shall not be

limited to the following:

1. City of New Orleans Building Code

2. Sewerage & Water Board of New Orleans, Plumbing Code

3. Louisiana State Plumbing Code

4. Louisana State Sanitary Code

5. ASPE Data Book

6. ASHRAE Handbooks

7. Louisiana State Fire Marshal Act

8. SMACNA, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

9. NFPA - 90A, Air Conditioning & Ventilating Systems

10. NFPA – 101, Life Safety Code



B. Where the above are at variance with the drawings or specifications, the more stringent

requirements shall be applicable.

1.6 REVIEW, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall apply for and pay for governmental reviews and permits. The

Contractor shall arrange for and pay inspection and service connection fees incidental to the

mechanical work including the cost of utility main extensions.

B. No work shall be concealed until approved by the local inspector and the Architect/Engineer.

Local regulations shall be adhered to.

C. Upon completion, a Certificate of Approval from the appropriate regulatory agency shall be

provided the Architect/Engineer.

1.7 VISITING SITE

A. The Bidder shall visit the site of proposed work so that he may understand the facilities,

difficulties, and restrictions attending the execution of the Contract. He will be allowed no

additional compensation for failure to be so informed.

1.8 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Prior to bidding the Contractor shall coordinate all items of work referred to as "work of other

Divisions" to insure items are not omitted or duplicated.

B. Power wiring and raceways for mechanical equipment including power disconnect switches,

will be provided under DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Power wiring for HVAC controls shall

be as specified under SECTION 15910 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR

CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEMS.

C. Supports for equipment, except supports specifically indicated to be provided under other

Divisions, shall be provided under this Division. Supports shall be checked and coordinated

under this Division to insure that they suit the equipment to be installed. Al supports shall

comply with local codes and be constructed above flood levels as stipulated by the local

authorities. The Contractor shall include these costs in his bid.

D. Damaged surfaces of factory finished items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the

Architect/Engineer as the work of this Division. Nameplates shall be protected until painting

has been accomplished. Protection shall be removed and nameplates cleaned prior to

acceptance of equipment.

E. Door grilles and access doors will be provided under this Division for installation under other

Divisions.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. Equipment and materials provided under this Division of the specifications shall be installed

according to manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall review all

manufacturers' application and installation instructions prior to ordering equipment or

commencing with the work. If the drawings or specifications show or describe any

deviations from the manufacturer's recommendations the Contractor shall request

clarification, from the Architect/Engineer and provide as directed at no additional cost to the

Owner.



1.10 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee equipment, materials and workmanship for one year after

beneficial use of a particular system, beneficial occupancy of the building or final acceptance

of entire project. Where specifically indicated extended warranties shall be provided.

Beginning date of guarantee will be established only after written request is received by the

Architect/Engineer from the Contractor, and agreed upon by the Architect/Engineer, stating

the date the systems were turned over to the Owner for beneficial use or occupancy.

B. During the one year period of guarantee, any defects in equipment, materials, or

workmanship shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

Mechanical and associated electrical equipment shall be serviced and adjusted without cost

during the guarantee period. Servicing and adjusting shall include all labor, material, parts,

etc., required during the first year.

1.11 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. No piping, ducts or other mechanical equipment foreign to electrical equipment shall pass

through or above spaces dedicated to panelboards, distribution panels, switchboards, and

battery charging panels. Work shall conform to NFPA 70, Article 384.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

in categories for which standards have been set by that agency. Methods of installation

shall be in full accord with the latest and best engineering practices. Pressure vessels, as

called for by respective codes, shall be stamped ASME and National Board Commission.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Names of manufacturers and catalog numbers indicated in the Contract Documents are to

establish a standard as to basis of design and quality. Other products similar in design and

of equal quality may be used if submitted and approved by the Architect/Engineer. Refer to

General Conditions for additional information.

B. When the Contractor elects to use acceptable alternate manufacturers' equipment, the

Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the change with all trades affected. The

Contractor shall also pay for any additional work required under this Division as well as any

other Division if the alternate equipment is used. Any other systems affected and other

changes due to this substituted equipment shall also be the sole responsibility of the

Contractor.

C. If required by Architect/Engineer because of substitutions, the Contractor shall submit for

review ¼” scale working drawings of equipment areas with plan and section views.

2.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 30 days after award of the Contract, and before executing any work, the Contractor

shall submit for review six copies of descriptive equipment literature or shop drawings in one

complete indexed and bound submittal for the following items:

Access Doors

Magnetic Starters

Flexible Duct and Fittings

Vibration Isolators



Insulation (all types)

Refrigerant Specialties

Sheetmetal and accessories

Piping and accessories

Controls

Electric Hot Water Heaters

Plumbing Fixtures

Plumbing Specialties

Intake Hoods and Accessories

Relief Hoods and Accessories

Exhaust fans

Diffusers, Registers, Grilles

Mechanical Identification

Supports and Anchors

Condensing Units and Accessories

Rooftop Air Handling Unit (refrigerant cooling coil

& gas fired heating)

Split System Evaporative Condensing Units

Filters

Test and Balancing Contractor/Submittal

Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers

Fuel Gas Piping

Fire Protection System Design Drawings

Fire Protection Piping and Accessories

Structural Support Drawings and Materials

Louvers

B. Where applicable submissions shall include installation drawings and brochures showing

locations, methods of anchoring, connections to work of others, wall conditions at each

particular installation and special floor mounting conditions.

C. Submittals shall be identified with project name, equipment name and number as indicated

on the drawings, and specification paragraph reference. Submittals shall be properly

marked to show proposed model number and accessories being provided and shall have

the Contractor's stamp certifying that he has reviewed the submittal and found it to be in

accordance with the specifications and drawings.

D. Submittals which do not comply with the above will be returned without review, rejected for

resubmittal.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Control equipment enclosures such as, but not limited to, starters, data gathering panels,

temperature control panels, etc., provided by the Contractor or provided as part of a

packaged piece of equipment shall meet the following minimum standards unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Control equipment enclosures provided within a building or an accessible attic shall be

equivalent to or greater than NEMA 1 type construction.

C. Control equipment enclosures provided outside of a building, a non-enclosed area or in an

accessible crawl space under a building shall be equivalent to or greater than NEMA 3R

type construction with drain and breather.

D. Control equipment enclosures provided within hazardous areas, controlling explosion-proof

equipment shall be NEMA 7 or 9 type construction.

E. Control equipment enclosures provided for cooling towers and installed outdoors shall be

NEMA 4X non-corrosive.

F. Where indicated on the drawings flush mounted enclosures shall be provided.



2.5 MAGNETIC STARTERS

A. Provide magnetic starters for all three-phase motors. Also provide magnetic starters for

single-phase motors which start and stop as part of an automatic control sequence. Unless

noted otherwise, magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type rated per NEMA standards.

Starters shall have under-voltage protection when used with momentary-contact push

button stations and shall have under-voltage release when used with maintained contact

push button stations. Enclosures for starters shall be as specified. Starters in motor control

centers shall be fully compatible with the motor control center. Provide two-speed starters

for two-speed motors.

B. Starters shall be complete with integrally fused 120-volt control transformer, start-stop push

button and pilot light or hand-off-auto switch and pilot light, where indicated, or as required

for control. Starters for motors interlocked to run with other motors or which have automatic

start/stop controls (exclusive of safety controls such as firestats, freezestats, etc.) shall have

hand-off-auto switch. Starter shall be wired so as not to by-pass safety controls when in the

"hand" position.

C. Starter contacts shall be of silver alloy, and shall be of the double break type. The movable

magnet and contact assembly, an arc hood in which the fixed contacts are mounted,

solenoid cell, and thermal overload relays (one in each phase) shall be assembled and

mounted on a heavy steel back plate. The only moving part shall be the magnet and contact

assembly, which shall move up and down. Each pole shall be enclosed in an individual arc

chamber.

D. Starters for 5 horsepower and larger 3-phase motors shall include under

voltage/phase-reversal/phase-loss protection relay wired into the control circuit.

E. Overload protective devices shall be selected in accordance with the motor nameplate, and

shall be of the thermal inverse time limit type and shall include a manual reset type push

button on the outside of the cover. Overloads shall operate on the melting alloy principle.

F. Starters shall have normally open and/or closed external electrical interlocks as required to

suit equipment controlled.

G. Acceptable manufacturers: Furnas Class 14 or Square D Class 8536 or approved equal.

2.6 MOTORS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall be constant speed, normal starting torque for

pumps, high starting torque for fans (with low starting current) as required for the application.

Electrical characteristics shall conform with the electrical supply as indicated on the

electrical drawings.

B. Three-phase motors shall be squirrel cage induction type.

C. Single-phase motors shall be split phase or capacitor start type with built-in thermal overload

unless indicated otherwise.

D. Motors shall be guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with 10% voltage variation

above or below the specified voltage. Motors shall be rated for an ambient temperature of

40 degrees C and a temperature rise not to exceed 40 degrees C.

E. Motors shall be copper wound high efficiency type and have either sleeve or prelubricated

ball bearings as required for the particular application. Open drip-proof motors shall have

Class B insulation. TEFC motors shall have Class F insulation.



F. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in the specifications, housings for motors in

indoor locations shall be open drip proof (ODP) or explosion proof type. Motors in outdoor

locations or subject to excessive moisture shall be totally enclosed or totally enclosed fan

cooled (TEFC) type. Belt drive motors shall have bases with provisions for adjustment in

field.

G. Motors provided on equipment not as an integral part of the equipment but propelling the

equipment by the use of belts, sheaves, couplings, etc., shall be as manufactured by U.S.

Electric, Marathon, Emerson, General Electric or approved equal. Manufacturers requesting

approval shall submit evidence of a factory authorized service facility within a reasonable

distance of the project to service or replace motors under warranty. Motors manufactured

by or specifically for equipment manufacturers and provided as an integral part of the

equipment package need not comply with the requirements of this paragraph.

2.7 SAFETY PANS

A. Safety pans shall be fabricated from 16-gauge (min.) galvanized sheet steel. Sides of pans

shall be a minimum of 2" high with top edges hemmed. Sides longer than 6'-0" shall have

additional flat bar or angle top edge bracing to prevent sagging. Joints and seams shall be

soldered watertight. Pans shall be at least 6" larger on all four sides than the equipment it is

serving.

B. Provide a 1" steel female pipe coupling in side of pan near the bottom for overflow piping

connection.

2.8 PREPARED OPENINGS

A. Piping installed through masonry walls or concrete floors above grade shall pass through

pipe sleeves.

B. Ducts installed through masonry walls or concrete floors above grade shall pass through

20-gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeves. Duct sleeve shall have a ½” maximum annular

clearance around duct. Allowance shall be made for external duct wrap.

C. Ducts installed through floors of mechanical rooms shall have a 4" high concrete curb on all

four sides to prevent water from leaking through openings.

D. Ducts installed through partitions, walls or floors which are smoke rated or have a fire rating

of one hour or greater shall be installed in sheet metal sleeves in accordance with SMACNA

standards.

E. Exposed piping passing through masonry walls shall be fitted with chromium plated

escutcheons on each side of the wall. Exposed ductwork passing the masonry walls shall

be fitted with a 2" wide sheet metal flange around all four sides of duct on each side of the

wall.

2.9 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for tubing and piping through masonry or concrete walls shall be Schedule 40,

galvanized steel pipe.

B. Sleeves for tubing and piping through fire or smoke rated dry wall partitions and concrete

floors above grade shall be a minimum of Schedule 10, galvanized steel pipe.

C. Sleeves for all tubing and piping penetrating basement walls, and floors, and slabs below

water level shall have a water stop flange welded to sleeve.



2.10 FIRE BARRIER MATERIAL

A. Fire barrier material shall be provided in annular spaces between sleeves and piping or

tubing where piping or tubing penetrates floors or partitions that have a fire rating of one

hour or greater.

B. Material shall be UL classified as a through penetration fill, void or cavity material and shall

be capable of passing a 4 hour fire test per ASTM E-814.

C. Material shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

D. Acceptable manufacturers: Thomas & Betts Fire Safe, 3M Fire Barrier, Nelson Fire Stop,

PTI Fire Seal, Metacaulk or approved equal.

2.11 SAFING MATERIAL

A. Safing material shall be installed in annular spaces between sleeve and pipe or tubing where

sleeve and pipe or tubing penetrate partitions that are designated as smoke separations.

B. Material shall be mineral wool designed for hand packing. Material shall have an ASTM E84

rating of flame spread -10, fuel contributed -0, smoke developed -0 and shall be rated

non-combustible per ASTM E136.

C. Acceptable manufacturers: U.S. Gypsum, Carborundum, or approved equal.

2.12 CURBS AND SUPPORTS

A. Prefabricated metal curbs and equipment support rails for equipment provided on built-up

roofs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, shall be provided under SECTION 15810 -

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts

into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are per manufacturer

requirements. A minimum 4” slab with 2000 psi concrete complete with ¾” anchor

(expansion bolts) at appropriate manufacturer anchoring points shall be provided.

Isolation/snubbers shall be per manufacturer requirements.

C. Curbs and equipment supports for equipment installed on metal roofs shall be a product of

the metal roof manufacturer.

D. Poured in place concrete curbs and supports shall be in accordance with Division 3.

E. Supports for equipment shall be incompliance with local codes and authorities having

jurisdiction. The final elevation of the equipment platform/support and related system

components shall be above the flood stage and accepted local flood levels.

2.13 HANGERS AND CLAMPS

A. Hangers shall adequately support the weight of the pipe and material contained within.

Hangers shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-58, ANSI B31.1 and UL 203.

B. Hangers for piping above grade shall be as follows:

1. Cast iron or steel piping:

a. 8" and smaller interior hangers shall be Grinnell Figure 70 or Fee and

Mason Figure 400, adjustable swivel ring hanger and rod, carbon steel

construction, zinc-plated finish.



b. 10" and larger hangers shall be Grinnell Figure 260 adjustable clevis

hanger and rod, carbon steel construction, black finish for interior use,

galvanized for exterior or unenclosed areas.

2. Copper tubing:

a. Grinnell Figure CT-69 or Fee and Mason Figure 500, adjustable tubing ring

and rod, carbon steel ring with copper finish and malleable iron adjusting

nut.

3. Riser clamps:

a. Clamps, bolts and nuts for cast iron or steel piping shall be Grinnell Figure

261, carbon steel construction. Black finish for interior use, galvanized for

exterior or unenclosed areas.

b. Clamps for copper tubing, glass or plastic piping shall be Grinnell Figure

261c, black carbon steel construction, copper plated or with formed section

plastic coated.

C. Hangers for piping under concrete slabs on grade or fill - soil, waste and vent, greasy waste

and vent, and domestic water piping shall be type 304 stainless steel rod wrapped around

the pipe and lapped over the slab reinforcing steel. Hangers for any other piping shall be

type 304 stainless steel clevis type hanger and rod with rod lapped over the slab reinforcing

steel.

2.14 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions:

1. Steel piping 2 1/2" and smaller. - Unions shall be ANSI B16.39 malleable iron,

WOG, female pattern, threaded ends, brass seat, with ground joint.

2. Copper tubing 2 1/2" and smaller. - Cast copper unions shall have solder ends, with

ground joint.

2.15 DISSIMILAR METALS

A. 2" and smaller - Dielectrically isolated unions, couplings or nipples.

B. 2" and larger - Dielectrically isolated and gasketed flanges.

2.16 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification of piping shall be by the use of colored, waterproofed, all-temperature,

self-adhering vinyl pipe markers and directional arrows.

2.17 VALVE TAGS

A. Tags shall be provided for each valve. Tags shall be constructed from 19-gauge brass

sheets, 1-1/2" in diameter. Tags shall be attached to valves using brass jack chain and/or

S-hook.

B. Each tag shall contain 1/4" high letters defining the valve service. The valve number shall

be 1/2" high. Lettering and numerals shall be black enamel filled.

2.18 TAMPER/PROOF FASTENERS

A. Where tamperproof or vandal proof fasteners are indicated, the Contractor shall coordinate

and use the same type of fastener on all items.

B. Provide Owner with two wrenches, screw driver, etc., for each type of fastener used on the

project.



2.20 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.

2. Trerice, H. O. Co.

3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

B. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass, 7 inches (178 mm) long.

C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.

D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.

E. Window: Glass.

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with

locking device.

G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit

installation.

H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5

percent of range.

2.21 THERMOWELLS


1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

3. Ernst Gage Co.

4. Marsh Bellofram.

5. Miljoco Corp.

6. NANMAC Corporation.

7. Noshok, Inc.


9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.

10. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.




14. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

15. Winters Instruments.

B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,

diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.

2.22 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.



2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

3. Ernst Gage Co.

4. Eugene Ernst Products Co.

5. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc.

6. Marsh Bellofram.

7. Miljoco Corp.

8. Noshok, Inc.


10. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.




B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100.

1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum 4-1/2-inch diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 , bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is

indicated.

4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.

7. Window: Glass.

8. Ring: Metal.

9. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half scale.

10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure

11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

C. Pressure-Gage Fittings:

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal

disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.23 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. MG Piping Products Co.

3. National Meter, Inc.

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

5. Sisco Manufacturing Co.


7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed

and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

16. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.

17. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.



E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one

thermometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing

elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

F. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and probe.

Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig .

G. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and

tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be [25 to 125 deg F .

H. Retain subparagraph above or first subparagraph below if only one thermometer is required.

I. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial and

tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F.

J. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Valves shall be provided where indicated on the drawings or as hereinafter described.

B. All valves shall be installed so that the handle is accessible and operable. Where required

due to space limitations, special short style handles may be provided on ball valves.

C. All valves located in walls, chases and above suspended, inaccessible ceilings shall be

provided with access doors. Valves located above accessible acoustical tile ceilings shall

have the location of each valve marked with a pressure sensitive colored dot applied to the

T-bar. Color to be selected by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Valves located above ceilings indicated to be used for drains or for future use shall have a

pipe plug or nipple and cap closure. Valves in equipment spaces indicated to be used for

drains, blowdowns, etc., shall have hose threads for extensions to floor drains.

E. Gate, globe and other style valves having packing glands shall have valve handles installed

in the horizontal or vertical (down) position or any angle between to keep packing glands

moist.

3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. At the completion of the work, unless noted otherwise in the general conditions, mark-up

one mylar sepia and two sets of blueline drawings with colored pencils in a neat and

understandable manner to show significant changes made during construction.

Underground piping, valves and cleanouts outside of the building shall be dimensioned on

the record drawings. Dimensions shall indicate the location of exterior mains with reference

to the exterior building walls and/or corners.

3.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Prior to the time scheduled for occupancy, the Contractor shall provide the services of a

competent mechanic to instruct the Owner or his representative in the care and operation of

all equipment.

B. Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Architect/ Engineer

two bound copies of operating instructions, which shall include:



1. Description of major components of systems, including the function of major items.

2. Detailed operating instructions and instructions for making routine minor

adjustments.

3. Routine maintenance operations.

4. Manufacturer's catalog data, service instructions wiring diagrams, fabrication

drawings and parts list for each piece of operating equipment.

5. Copies of equipment submittals and shop drawings, including review sheet,

reviewed by and acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

6. Guarantee and Warranty Information.

7. Names and telephone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers.

C. Literature shall be contained in hard back binders and divided into a suitable number of

volumes so as to permit convenient heavy usage.

3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. The electrical system shall be 120/208 volt, 4 wire, 3 phase. Refer to schedules and

electrical drawings for motor voltages.

B. Motors for mechanical equipment shall be provided under this Division. The work of this

Division shall include setting and aligning integral drive motors in operating position.

C. Unless noted otherwise, motor starters [and motor control centers] for mechanical

equipment shall be provided under this Division and installed and electrically connected

under DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.

D. Power wiring, raceways and disconnect (excluding control disconnects) switches shall be

provided under DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.

E. Any other electrical work in connection with DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL shall be done

under this Division. Control disconnects, control wiring and raceways, and all electric

interlock and signalling wiring and raceways shall be provided under this Division.

F. Firestats and line voltage speed and thermostatic control devices for single phase supply

and/or exhaust fans shall be provided and set under this Division and electrically connected

in the branch circuit wiring under DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.

G. Any other safety, signalling, and control devices such as thermostats, firestats, damper

motors, valve operators, push buttons, pilot lights, control and/or monitoring panels, crank-

case heaters, etc., shall be provided and wired under this Division in strict accordance with

an approved wiring diagram.

H. Wiring and raceways installed under this Division shall comply in all respects with the

requirements of DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.

3.5 CONCRETE

A. Formed and poured in place concrete work including equipment housekeeping pads,

sumps, etc., shall be in accordance with the American Concrete Institute's Standard

Specifications, shall be standard weight concrete and shall test at 3000 psi in 28 days.

Concrete equipment bases that are installed on vibration isolators, shall be provided as work

of this Division.

B. Provide required templates and dimensioned drawings for housekeeping pads, supports,

sumps and anchor bolts. A 4" high (min.) concrete housekeeping pad shall be provided

under all exterior and floor supported mechanical equipment.



3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Unless otherwise specified, supports necessary for properly supporting the work and the

equipment of this Division shall be provided under this Division. Additionally, provide

isolation materials to prevent transmission of vibration to the building structure. Isolation of

equipment as shown on drawings or specified is the minimum required, and any additional

isolation required to prevent transmission of vibrations shall be provided under this Division,

in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

3.7 SAFETY PANS

A. Provide safety pans under water heaters, air handling units, etc. Pipe safety pan outlet to

floor drain.

3.8 OPENINGS, GROUNDS AND CHASES

A. Openings, grounds, lintels and chases will be provided under other Divisions, as directed by

this Division, to accommodate the piping, ductwork and equipment. Sleeves and prepared

openings shall be accurately located in slabs or walls before pouring of concrete.

B. It shall be the responsibility of this Division to ascertain that chases, openings and holes are

properly located.

1. Holes through existing concrete shall be either core drilled or saw cut. Drilled or cut

holes required shall have the approval of the Architect/Engineer prior to cutting or

drilling.

2. Sleeves set in openings cut in existing masonry or concrete walls or concrete slabs

shall be 1" smaller in outside diameter than the cored hole. The sleeve shall be

grouted in place with non-shrinking grout and the joint between the sleeve and grout

caulked with a silicone based caulking compound.

C. Where piping passes through smoke and/or fire separations, pack annular space between

sleeve and piping with safing or fire barrier material. Pipe insulation shall be terminated and

sealed on each side of sleeve.

3.9 ACCESS DOORS

A. Equipment which may require constant or periodic operation or adjustment such as but not

limited to valves, water hammer arrestors, cleanouts, automatic, smoke and fire dampers,

damper operators, mixing boxes, variable volume equipment, steam traps, plumbing traps,

plumbing fixture connections, etc., located in or above inaccessible ceilings, walls, or chases

shall have hinged metal access doors as required by type of construction.

B. Minimum door size shall be 8" x 8". Doors shall be of sufficient size to adequately service,

repair, replace or inspect the equipment.

3.10 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Piping and tubing provided through masonry or concrete walls, concrete floors above grade

and smoke or fire rated partitions shall be installed through pipe sleeves as specified.

B. Sleeves are not required for soil, waste, vent storm drainage or domestic water piping

through slabs on grade or fill. Any other piping shall be provided with sleeves.

C. Sleeves in walls shall be finished flush with both sides of wall. Sleeves in concrete floor

above grade shall project a minimum of 2" above finished floors.



D. Diameter of sleeves shall be large enough to provide a 1/2" minimum annular space

between pipe and sleeve or insulation and sleeve. Annular space shall be large enough to

accommodate pipe movement due to expansion or contraction.

E. Where piping or tubing passes through fire or fire/smoke rated separations, the annular

space between the piping or tubing and sleeve shall be filled with UL Classified fire barrier

material.

F. Where piping or tubing passes through smoke rated separations, the annular space

between the piping or tubing and sleeve shall be packed solid with safing material.

G. Annular space between pipe and sleeve provided through exterior walls shall be made

waterproof by filling with a silicone type caulking compound on the exterior side only.

3.11 INSERTS

A. Supports, guides, brackets and braces shall be adequately fastened to the structure by

means of concrete inserts, expansion shields or wedge type devices.

B. Inserts in slabs and beams for fastening work shall be cast in place wherever possible. If

additional inserts are required after concrete is placed, drilled type shall be used. Powder

driven fasteners shall not be used.

3.12 GENERAL PIPING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Exposed and concealed horizontal lines of pipe and tube shall be carried on hangers

hereinbefore specified and properly spaced to maintain alignment. Install pipe and tubing

true to line and grade.

B. Piping shall be concealed except where noted. Piping shall be installed above suspended

ceilings and in furred partitions. Where ceilings and partitions are to be installed under other

projects, coordinate accordingly. Exposed piping shall be installed parallel to or at right

angles with building walls, except where otherwise shown on drawings. Changes in

elevation, to suit varying ceiling heights, shall be made so that piping will stay exposed.

C. Exposed pipe through walls, floors and ceilings shall be fitted with chromium plated

escutcheons securely held in position with allowance for expansion. Escutcheons shall be

large enough to fit the pipe, tubing or insulation and to cover openings around the sleeves

through walls.

D. Wherever changes in sizes of piping occur, changes shall be made with reducing fittings.

E. Minimum bury for exterior piping shall be 24" below finish grade, or per local codes and

authority having jurisdiction requirements unless noted otherwise on drawings or in

specifications.

F. Cutting and boring through structural members shall be done only when approved by and

under supervision of the Architect/Engineer.

G. Offsets in piping above slab shall be made with fittings. Bending of pipe shall not be

permitted.

H. Automatic valves or traps shall be provided with unions and valves [and by-passed] so that

they can be removed for servicing while the equipment served is being operated manually.

Valving shall also be arranged so as to eliminate the necessity of draining major parts or

entire system while service or repairs are made.



3.13 CONNECTION OF COPPER TUBING

A. Copper tubing shall be cut with square ends, and burrs and fins removed. Tubing shall be

handled and protected carefully and tubing cut, dented, or otherwise damaged shall be

replaced. Ends of tubing and fittings shall be cleaned using sand or emery cloth.

B. Copper Water Tube: Apply a thin coat of flux to end of tube and solder cup. Insert tube into

fitting full depth and apply heat. Apply solder until bead appears at end of fitting. Clean

excess solder and flux from completed joint.

C. Copper Refrigerant Tube: Refrigerant piping shall be installed so proper oil drainage and

entrainment are maintained. Materials used in the construction and installation of refrigerant

piping system shall be suitable for the refrigerant used and no material shall be used that will

deteriorate due to the chemical action of the refrigerant or the oil or the combination of both.

Equipment and piping openings shall be plugged or capped to prevent air, dirt, or moisture

from entering the system. Piping must be thoroughly cleaned before the system is charged

with refrigerant. Suction lines shall be pitched no less than 1/2" per 10' toward the

compressor. During the brazing process dry nitrogen shall be bled continuously through the

piping.

3.14 CONNECTION OF SCREW JOINTED PIPING

A. Piping shall be square cut and free from fins, burrs, die marks, etc. Threads shall be full cut

to depth of die.

B. Apply approved lubricant or thread sealing tape on male threads only. Screw fitting and pipe

together using pipe wrenches so that not more than three threads remain exposed on pipe.

Clean excess joint material from completed joint.

C. Joints in galvanized piping systems shall be cleaned and sprayed with two coats of zinc rich

rust inhibiting paint.

3.15 CONNECTION OF WELDED JOINT PIPING

A. Welded joints shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. Welders shall be qualified

in accordance with the applicable provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,

Section 7. Prior to erection each length of pipe shall be held in an inclined position and

repeatedly tapped to loosen any scale or foreign matter within the pipe. Each length of pipe

shall be thoroughly swabbed prior to erection.

3.16 CONNECTION OF GROOVE JOINTED PIPING

A. Piping shall be inspected and verified free from indentations, projections, grooves, weld

seams or roll marks on the exterior pipe surface over the entire gasket seating area to

insure a leak-tight gasket seating. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Cut and roll grooves shall

meet the manufacturer's criteria.

B. Gasket, pipe ends and coupling housing shall be properly lubricated per manufacturer's

recommendations prior to seating and aligning.

3.17 HANGERS AND CLAMPS

A. Vertical support and bracing for risers shall be by use of riser clamps at every floor but not

less than 15'-0" on center.

B. Horizontal piping above grade shall have hangers and rods adequate for size, material and

service, and be supported at not more than the following intervals on straight runs of piping:



MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING – CAST IRON PIPING

PIPE

DIAMETER

HANGER

SPACING

MIN. HANGER

ROD-DIAMETER

Up to 4” 5’0” and at all joint 1/2”

MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING – PVC PIPING

PIPE

DIAMETER

HANGER

SPACING

MIN. HANGER

ROD-DIAMETER

1/2” to 1” 4’-0” 3/8”

1-1/4” to 2” 5’-0” 3/8”

2-1/2” to 4” 6’-0” 1/2”

MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING – ALL OTHER PIPING

PIPE

DIAMETER

SCREWED,

SOLDERED, &

WELDED JOINTS GROOVED JOINTS

MIN HANGER

ROD-DIAMETER

1/2” to 1-1/2” 6’-6” 6’-6” 3/8”

1-1/2” to 2” 10’-0” 7’-6” 3/8”

2-1/2” to 3” 10’-0” 10’-0” 1/2”

C. Underground piping shall have hangers and rods to support the piping at not more than the

following intervals on straight runs of piping:

PIPE

DIAMETER

MAX. HANGER

SPACING

MIN. HANGER

ROD-DIAMETER

1/2” to 10” 5’-0” [4’-0”] 1/4”

D. When interior hanger rods are over 12" in length, provide lateral bracing every fourth hanger

or as required to prevent swaying. Offsets or bends in hanger rods or pipe hanging from

pipe are not acceptable.

E. In securing rods and hangers to wood or metal, angle clips, beam clips or C-clamps shall be

used. Angle clips must be attached to structure by means of large screws or bolts.

Securing rods to concrete shall be as hereinbefore specified.

F. Trapeze hangers with U-bolts, pipe straps or individual hangers may be used where two or

more pipes run parallel at the same elevation.

G. Pipes must be installed so that they may contract or expand freely without damage to other

work or injury to themselves.

H. Vibrations or movement developing in piping shall be eliminated or isolated by re-spacing of

hangers, anchoring or installation of spring hangers as directed. Refrigerant liquid piping

shall be isolated by providing a 6" long piece of 3/4" thick elastomeric type insulation

between pipe and hanger.

I. Insulated piping with a normal operating range of 55 degrees or less, provide a 20-gauge

sheet metal saddle approximately 12" long and having 180-degrees of contact with

insulation between the hanger or support and the insulation for each pipe. Insulated piping

with a normal operating range of 56 degrees or greater may have the hanger installed



between the pipe and the insulation.

J. Where individual pipe hangers are installed outside of the insulation jacket or trapeze

hangers are used to support insulated pipes, a galvanized sheet metal saddle, as described

above, shall be installed between the support and the insulation.

K. Piping shall be racked and handled in a manner to prevent entrance of dirt and foreign

matter. Open pipe ends shall be plugged or capped during erection.

L. Perforated type strap hangers shall not be used.

M. Horizontal pipe supports shall be provided not over 1' from the fitting at each change in

horizontal direction or vertical elevation of the piping.

N. Piping and fittings below pile supported slabs on grade or fill shall be supported as follows:

1. Piping shall be hung on 5' centers.

2. PVC piping and fittings shall have a PVC half-sleeve installed between the hanger

and the pipe.

3. Fittings shall be hung at each joint.

a) Vertical combinations, wye and eighth bends and up-right tees shall have

two hangers.

b) Horizontal combinations, wye and eight bends and tees shall have three

hangers.

c) Horizontal double combinations, double wye and eighth bends and crosses

shall have four hangers.

3.18 UNIONS OR FLANGES

A. Unions or flanges shall be provided at items of equipment to facilitate their easy

maintenance, including tube bundle or coil removal, and/or cleaning. It shall not be

necessary to remove any valve, strainer, or device to do the required maintenance. Piping

connections at equipment shall be in accordance with the best engineering and installation

practices. The requirements of this paragraph will be strictly enforced and if in the opinion of

the Architect/Engineer it is not adhered to the Contractor will be required to re-pipe the

equipment as directed.

3.19 WORK RELATED TO EQUIPMENT NOT FURNISHED AS WORK OF THIS DIVISION

A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, any required mechanical services for and required

mechanical connections to items indicated on the drawings or in the specifications or items

provided by the Owner shall be mechanically connected as work of this Division. The

Contractor shall provide piping, valves, traps, etc., as required for complete operation of

each piece of equipment.

3.20 DISSIMILAR METALS

A. Dielectric couplings shall be provided between copper, bronze or brass piping material and

steel piping material or steel tanks. Dielectric unions shall be provided at equipment where

specified for equipment maintenance.

B. Dissimilar metals shall be isolated from surface contact with each other by the use of a

non-conductive material, tape, etc.



3.21 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall protect equipment, fixtures, and work from damage. Damaged work

will be rejected and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Where possible, rooms

containing new plumbing fixtures shall be kept locked until the building is turned over to the

Owner. Immediately after installation of each plumbing fixture, it shall be covered with a

fixture protector.

B. Mechanical equipment shall be protected from damage and from the weather. Provide

adequate and proper storage facilities for items during the progress of the work. Special

care shall be taken to provide protection for bearings, open connections, pipe coils, pumps,

compressors and similar equipment.

3.22 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

A. Prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall clean equipment and remove grease, dirt and

foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, flush valves and similar items shall

be thoroughly cleaned. Remove and thoroughly clean and reinstall liquid strainer screens

after the system has been in operation 10 days.

B. Air, oil and natural gas piping shall be blown out with clean compressed air.

C. When connections are made to existing systems, the Contractor shall do cleaning and

purging of the existing systems required to restore them to the condition existing prior to the

start of work.

3.23 FRICTION LOSSES, ELECTRICAL RATINGS AND SPACE REQUIREMENTS

A. The values of air and water friction losses, electrical current ratings and space requirements

for various pieces of equipment, as contained in these specifications or as scheduled, are

estimated values and sizes and have been used in obtaining specifications for equipment

and for sizing ducts, pipe, electric wiring and motor controls. Any necessary changes in any

of these items resulting from values other than the estimated ones shown shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor and shall be subject to the approval of the

Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall pay any costs for additional labor and material

required including costs of any other Contractor involved.

B. Should substitute equipment require different requirements from that shown on the

drawings, the responsibility for the cost of the changes shall rest with this Division. Any such

changes MUST be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

3.24 MARKING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Each magnetic starter shall be suitably identified by means of 1/4" high letters cut in white

laminated phenolic strip to show black letters. Additionally, each piece of mechanical

equipment, where more than one of each is provided, such as but not limited to, boilers, air

handling units, exhaust fans, etc., shall also be labeled. Strip shall be secured by means of

two brass bolts and nuts or screws.

3.25 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

A. Piping, whether insulated or not shall be identified. Identification may be omitted from piping

in inaccessible chases and furring and where use is obvious, due to its connection to fixtures

or equipment and where the appearance would be objectionable, as in finished rooms.

B. Identification shall be placed as follows:



1. Near each valve and branch connection.

2. Above accessible ceilings wherever piping emerges or disappears from view when

viewed from the floor of the room in which it is installed.

3. Labels shall not be more than l0' apart.

3.26 VALVE TAGS

A. Every valve provided on this project shall be tagged.

B. Valve tags shall be provided so that tags are readily readable.

C. Valve tags shall be listed on a valve tag chart. Chart shall indicate valve service, valve

number, room number and if above ceiling or in wall.

D. Copies of valve tag chart shall be included with project acceptance documents.

3.27 CHANGES TO PIPING OR DUCTS

A. Should the Contractor desire to make changes in the routing or arrangement of piping or

ducts, whether for his own convenience, to avoid conflict with the work of other trades, or to

conform to local codes, such changes shall not be made without the prior approval of the

Architect/Engineer.

3.28 STARTING AND TESTING

A. A competent and experienced service and installation mechanic shall be employed by the

Contractor to start and adjust the equipment. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to

require the test of any item of equipment or machinery. Such tests shall be conducted by

the Contractor in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.

3.29 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. Prior to the final acceptance of the project the Contractor shall deliver to the

Architect/Engineer, for review, the following:

1. Certificates of approval from local regulatory agencies.

2. Extended equipment warranties.

3. Signed receipts showing that keys to access doors, locked equipment, underground

valve wrenches and vandal-proof screwdrivers have been delivered to the Owner.

4. Valve tag list.

5. Record drawings.

6. Operating instruction manuals which shall include copies of reviewed submittals and

shop drawings including review sheet.

7. Results of potable water sterilization tests.

8. HVAC test and balance reports.

B. Final payment will be withheld until all applicable items have been provided to and are found

satisfactory by the Architect/Engineer.



BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections.

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 3. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 4. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 5. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 6. Mechanical demolition. 7. Cutting and patching. 8. Touch up painting and finishing. 9. Access doors. 10. Excavation and backfill

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred

spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact

by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather

conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.


A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding

processes involved and that certification is current.



C. ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

D. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and

ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When

stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-

place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment

for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. in categories for which standards have been set by that agency. Methods of installation shall be in full accord with the latest and best engineering practices. Pressure vessels, as called for by respective codes, shall be stamped ASME and National Board Commission.

2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS



A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the

piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3-mm) maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel

flanges.

2. ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring-joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, except where other

thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated.

D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32.

1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver

(approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content. 2. USE BELOW TIN-LEAD (50:50) SOLDER WITH DWV OR OTHER COPPER

NONPRESSURE DRAINAGE TUBE AND FOR SOLDERING COPPER SHEETS. DO NOT USE FOR POTABLE WATER TUBING. Alloy Sn50: Tin (50 percent) and lead (50 percent).

3. Alloy E: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and copper (approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

4. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

5. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

6. Alloy Sb5: Tin (95 percent) and antimony (5 percent), having 0.20 percent maximum lead content.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys. 2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for

wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following:

1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): ASTM D 2564. 4. PVC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138, color other than

orange.

I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.



J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. BELOW NORMALLY USED WITH BURIED PIPING.

K. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-

end pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. 5. Finish: Enamel paint.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.

1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set-screw.

a. Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

4. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set-screw, and chrome-plated

finish. 5. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar

metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.

2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig minimum

working pressure at a 180 deg F temperature. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150- or

300-psig minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly,

full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or

300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F temperature.

7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig working pressure at 225 deg F temperature.

C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include

interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened.

D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:



1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,

having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified.

4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe-sleeve end.

a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with

ductile-iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe.

c. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe. 1. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of

manufacturer's design.

5. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.RETAIN THE FOLLOWING OPTION ONLY WHEN REQUIRED.

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.

6. PVC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

7. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 8. PE Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup-shaped, smooth outer surface,

with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.5 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.50-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.



2.6 ACCESS DOORS

A. Doors in gypsum board or masonry construction shall be Karp type DSC-214M or Milcor style M-Standard, 16-gauge steel frame and 14-gauge steel door construction, continuous piano hinge and zinc chromate prime coat.

B. Doors in glazed or ceramic tile construction shall be same type as above except all

stainless steel construction. C. Doors in inaccessible acoustical tile ceilings, or walls with wall covering shall be Karp type

KSC-210, or Milcor style AT 16-gauge steel frame and 18-gauge steel panel construction, recessed door for acoustical tile or gypsum board covered with matching wall covering, concealed hinge with a zinc chromate prime coat, and exposed edges painted white when installed in acoustical tile ceiling.

D. Doors in fire rated partitions or ceilings (up to 1 ½ hour rating) shall carry UL “B” Label;

KARP style KRP-150 FR or Milcor Style. E. Door required in types of construction not hereinbefore specified shall suit the type and

style of material in which installed. F. Unless otherwise indicated doors shall have screw driver operated locks.

2.7 MOTORS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall be constant speed, normal starting torque for pumps, high starting torque for fans (with low starting current) as required for the application. Electrical characteristics shall conform with the electrical supply as indicated on the electrical drawings.

B. Three-phase motors shall be squirrel cage induction type.

C. Single-phase motors shall be split phase or capacitor start type with built-in thermal overload

unless indicated otherwise.

D. Motors shall be guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with 10% voltage variation above or below the specified voltage. Motors shall be rated for an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and a temperature rise not to exceed 40 degrees C.

E. Motors shall be copper wound high efficiency type and have either sleeve or prelubricated

ball bearings as required for the particular application. Open drip-proof motors shall have Class B insulation. TEFC motors shall have Class F insulation.

F. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in the specifications, housings for motors in

indoor locations shall be open drip proof (ODP) or explosion proof type. Motors in outdoor locations or subject to excessive moisture shall be totally enclosed or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type. Belt drive motors shall have bases with provisions for adjustment in field.

G. Motors provided on equipment not as an integral part of the equipment but propelling the

equipment by the use of belts, sheaves, couplings, etc., shall be as manufactured by U.S. Electric, Marathon, Emerson, General Electric or approved equal. Manufacturers requesting approval shall submit evidence of a factory authorized service facility within a reasonable distance of the project to service or replace motors under warranty. Motors manufactured by or specifically for equipment manufacturers and provided as an integral part of the equipment package need not comply with the requirements of this paragraph.



2.8 PREPARED OPENINGS A. Piping installed through masonry walls or concrete floors above grade shall pass through

pipe sleeves. B. Ducts installed through masonry walls or concrete floors above grade shall pass through

20-gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeves. Duct sleeve shall have a 1/2" maximum annular clearance around duct. Allowance shall be made for external duct wrap.

C. Exposed piping passing through masonry walls shall be fitted with chromium plated

escutcheons on each side of the wall. Exposed ductwork passing the masonry walls shall be fitted with a 2" wide sheet metal flange around all four sides of duct on each side of the wall.

2.9 FIRE BARRIER MATERIAL A. Fire barrier material shall be provided in annular spaces between sleeves and piping or

tubing where piping or tubing penetrates floors or partitions that have a fire rating of one hour or greater.

B. Material shall be UL classified as a through penetration fill, void or cavity material and shall

be capable of passing a 4 hour fire test per ASTM E-814. C. Material shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 2.10 SAFING MATERIAL A. Safing material shall be installed in annular spaces between sleeve and pipe or tubing where

sleeve and pipe or tubing penetrate partitions that are designated as smoke separations. B. Material shall be mineral wool designed for hand packing. Material shall have an ASTM E84

rating of flame spread –10, fuel contributed –0, smoke developed –0 and shall be rated non-combustible per ASTM E136.

2.11 MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Provide magnetic starters for all three phase motors. Also provide magnetic starters for

single phase motors which start and stop as part of an automatic control sequence. Unless noted otherwise magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type rated per NEMA standards. Starters shall have undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact push button stations and shall have undervoltage release when used with maintained contact push button stations. Enclosures for starters shall be as hereinbefore specified. Starters in motor control centers shall be fully compatible with the motor control center. Provide two-speed starters for two-speed motors.

B. Starters shall be complete with integrally fused 120 volt control transformer, start-stop push

button and pilot light or hand-off-auto switch and pilot light, where indicated, or as required for control. Starters for motors interlocked to run with other motors or which have automatic startstop controls (exclusive of safety controls such as firestats, freezestats, etc.) shall have hand-off-auto switch. Starter shall be wired so as not to by-pass safety controls when in the "hand" position.

C. Starter contacts shall be of silver alloy, and shall be of the double break type. The movable

magnet and contact assembly, an arc hood in which the fixed contacts are mounted, solenoid cell, and thermal overload relays (one in each phase) shall be assembled and mounted on a heavy steel back plate. The only moving part shall be the magnet and contact assembly which shall move up and down. Each pole shall be enclosed in an individual arc chamber.



D. Starters for 5 horsepower and larger 3-phase motors shall include under voltage/phase-reversal/phase-loss protection relay wired into the control circuit.

E. Overload protective devices shall be selected in accordance with the motor nameplate, and

shall be of the thermal inverse time limit type and shall include a manual reset type push button on the outside of the cover. Overloads shall operate on the melting alloy principle.

C. Starters shall have normally open and/or closed external electrical interlocks as required to

suit equipment controlled.

D. Provide two auxiliary contact to 120V controls transformer and all necessary controls transformers for other power from these starters.

H. Provide a thermomagnetic trip circuit breaker for motor disconnect use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING UNDER BUILDING SLABS

A. Before excavating or trenching, the Contractor shall locate and stake out existing underground utilities, which are to remain and may be adversely affected by the work. Work shall be performed in a manner to avoid damaging the existing utilities. The Contractor shall repair or replace any utilities damaged by him.

B. The Contractor shall do all excavating, trenching and backfilling for the work of this Division.

The Contractor shall work around or remove as necessary all obstructions. Bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard. Bell holes shall be excavated to insure that pipe rests on solid earth for its entire length.

C. Backfilling trenches for piping under structural pile supported slabs shall be done by hand.

Fill shall be "walked" or hand tamped on each side of pipe to provide compaction that will hold the piping in alignment. The remainder of the trench may be backfilled by hand or approved mechanical means. Care shall be taken during tamping to keep piping in alignment.

D. The Contractor shall remove any water which may be found or may accumulate in the

trenches and shall perform all work necessary to keep them clear of water while the work is in progress, or as may be required for inspections.

3.2 SUB-SURFACE OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Care must be taken not to disturb, injure or remove any pipes, cables, conduits or other underground structures or utilities. If necessary, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, shore-up and protect underground piping, conduit structures or utilities which may be endangered during the work and shall maintain such structures and utilities in operation.

B. In the event subsurface structures, pipes, cables, conduits or utilities are broken or

damaged in the execution of the work, the Contractor shall notify the proper authorities and shall make repairs, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect and authorities involved. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to persons or property caused by such breaks.

C. The Contractor shall uncover, sub-surface obstructions in advance of construction so that

the method of avoiding same may be determined before pipe laying reaches the obstructions.

D. The Architect will, in all cases, be the judge of the necessity of expedience of any change or

rearrangement of any underground structures which may interfere with the construction of the work under this Section.



3.3 SHEETING AND SHORING

A. Sheeting and shoring shall be placed in excavations and trenches as required to suit the ground conditions and to properly and safely support the excavations and trench walls and any adjacent structures.

B. Placement of the sheeting and shoring in the trench shall not restrict the excavation and

trench width specified in other Sections.

C. Sheeting and shoring for excavations and trenches less than five feet in depth may be of wood. Wood indicated to remain in excavations and trenches shall be treated type. Sheeting and shoring for excavations and trenches greater than five feet in depth shall be of steel construction.

D. Unless otherwise instructed by the Architect, all wood sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be

cut-off at an elevation of 24" below finished grade. The lower portion of the sheeting and bracing below grade shall remain in the ground. If instructed by the Architect to remove the wood or steel sheeting and shoring it shall not be removed until backfilling is completed.

3.4 SURFACE OBSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall be responsible for the integrity of all poles, culverts, posts, fences, trees, walls, buildings or any other structures, property or objects along the line of his work and shall shore up, support and protect them when necessary. Any damage caused by or through his work shall, within a reasonable time, be repaired and/or replaced and restored to the same condition as existed before his work, without any additional compensation.

3.5 CROSSING OF DITCHES

A. Natural drainage ditches or swales shall not be unreasonably blocked or obstructed or prevented from carrying their customary drainage and shall be replaced by the Contractor in as good condition as they were originally, without additional compensation.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage of any kind resulting from interference

with or obstruction of any drainage ditches or other waterway. 3.6 THRUST BLOCKS

A. Thrust blocks shall be provided for underground water mains 4" and larger and sewer force mains at each change of direction 11¼ degrees or greater, at tees, tapping sleeves, hydrants, and at dead ends. Thrust blocks shall be constructed of concrete or timbers. Thrust blocks shall be of sufficient size to resist the force resulting from the flow of water through the type of fitting being blocked.

B. Timber thrust blocks shall be constructed by setting treated 2 x 12 planks against the

undisturbed soil of the trench wall and wedging appropriate sized treated blocking between the planks and the fitting. An adequate quantity of planks shall be placed against undisturbed soil to sufficiently distribute the forces so that the bearing value of the soil will resist the reaction of the fitting.

C. Concrete mix for thrust blocks shall be 1:2 1/2:5. Concrete in thrust blocks shall not cover

any pipe joints or interfere in any way with future maintenance of the joints.

D. Thrust blocks will not be required on lines where restrained joints are installed per NFPA-24.



3.7 PIPING SYSTEMS--COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams)

indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and

service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.

Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements.

Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board

partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece, with set-screw, and polished chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping.

2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw.

3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. Insulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with concealed hinge, spring

clips, and chrome-plated finish. 5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw or spring

clips.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board

partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated.



1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified.

2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.

3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches (150 mm). b. Steel Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches (150 mm) and larger that

penetrate gypsum-board partitions. c. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic

grout.

4. Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

N. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches. 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed

instructions.

N. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.

O. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements. R. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in

individual piping system Sections.

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings

before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter

22 "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Brazing Manual" in the "Pipe

and Tube" chapter.



5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME

B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity

of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified).

c. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is

being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that

are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended

Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article.

7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

8. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following standards:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent-cement and

primers. b. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. c. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM D 2846 and

ASTM F 493. d. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Application: ASTM D 2672. e. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855. f. PVC to ABS (Non-Pressure) Transition: Procedure and solvent cement

described in ASTM D 3138.

9. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Heat-Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heat-fusion equipment according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining. b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket-Type Fittings: Socket joining.

N. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as

specified below.

1. Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch (50-mm) or smaller threaded pipe connection.

2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

3. Wet Piping Systems (Water and Steam): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.



3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION--COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown

only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems

and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated.

REFER TO DRAWING COORDINATION CHECKLIST. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.9 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

No piping, ducts or other mechanical equipment foreign to electrical equipment shall pass through or above spaces dedicated to panelboards, distribution panels, switchboards, and battery charging panels. Work shall conform with NFPA 70, Article 384.

3.10 PAINTING AND FINISHING

Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.11 COORDINATE CONCRETE WORK WITH DIVISION 3.

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

3.12 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed

to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.13 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated. B. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed,

remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.



D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) beyond the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.

E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site. F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make

operational equipment indicated for relocation. G. In the removal of existing fixtures, equipment, ductwork and/or piping, the contractor shall

insure that the portion of any system which remains continues to be operable. H. Routings indicated for existing mechanical systems approximate. The contractor shall

field verify existing conditions prior to ordering equipment or materials and shall make field adjustments as required.


A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. C. Field cut openings shall be located to avoid the reinforcing. Locations shall be subject to

approval of engineer.

D. No structural members shall be field cut or pierced without the written approval of the engineer.

3.15 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.16 ACCESS DOORS

A. Equipment which may require constant or periodic operation or adjustment such as but not limited to valves, water hammer arrestors, cleanouts, automatic, smoke and fire dampers, damper operators, mixing boxes, variable volume equipment, steam traps, plumbing traps, plumbing fixture connections, etc., located in or above inaccessible ceilings, walls, or chases shall have hinged metal access doors as required by type of construction.



B. Minimum door size shall be 8" x 8". Doors shall be of sufficient size to adequately

service, repair, replace or inspect the equipment. 3.17 PENETRATIONS THROUGH STAIRWELLS, UNCONDITIONAL SPACES, AND MOISTURE OR

VAPOR BARRIERS

All penetrations through stairwells, unconditional spaces, moisture or vapor barriers shall be completely sealed with appropriate silicon exterior caulk sealant or approved weather proofing sealant.



MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTERS 15055 - 1

SECTION 15055 – MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors and field installed motor starters.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a component of equipment.

B. Field-Installed Motor Starter: A motor starter installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral component of motorized equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motor Starters: For each type and size of motor starter, provide nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting arrangements.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

1. Each installed unit's type and details. 2. Nameplate legends. 3. Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for

each type of motor and for each control scheme.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply with the following:

1. Compatible with the following:

a. Magnetic controllers. b. Reduced-voltage controllers.



2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating.

3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. 4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another Section.

2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.

B. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.

C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected.

E. Service Factor: 1.15.

F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

H. Enclosure: Open drip-proof for indoor motors and totally enclosed fan cooled for outdoor motors.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Standard, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.



E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.

1. Finish: Enamel, factory standard color.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output. 2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation. 3. Insulation: Class H. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.



2.6 MOTOR STARTERS

A. Control equipment enclosures such as, but not limited to, starters, data gathering panels, temperature control panels, etc., provided by the Contractor or provided as part of a packaged piece of equipment shall meet the following minimum standards unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Control equipment enclosures provided for cooling towers and installed outdoors shall be NEMA 4X non-corrosive.

C. Provide magnetic starters for all three-phase motors. Also provide magnetic starters for single-phase motors which start and stop as part of an automatic control sequence. Unless noted otherwise, magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type rated per NEMA standards. Starters shall have under-voltage protection when used with momentary-contact push button stations and shall have under-voltage release when used with maintained contact push button stations. Enclosures for starters shall be as specified. Starters in motor control centers shall be fully compatible with the motor control center. Provide two-speed starters for two-speed motors.

D. Starters shall be complete with integrally fused 120-volt control transformer, start-stop push button and pilot light or hand-off-auto switch and pilot light, where indicated, or as required for control. Starters for motors interlocked to run with other motors or which have automatic start/stop controls (exclusive of safety controls such as firestats, freezestats, etc.) shall have hand-off-auto switch. Starter shall be wired so as not to by-pass safety controls when in the "hand" position.

E. Starter contacts shall be of silver alloy, and shall be of the double break type. The movable magnet and contact assembly, an arc hood in which the fixed contacts are mounted, solenoid cell, and thermal overload relays (one in each phase) shall be assembled and mounted on a heavy steel back plate. The only moving part shall be the magnet and contact assembly, which shall move up and down. Each pole shall be enclosed in an individual arc chamber.

F. Starters for 5 horsepower and larger 3-phase motors shall include under voltage/phase-reversal/phase-loss protection relay wired into the control circuit.

G. Overload protective devices shall be selected in accordance with the motor nameplate, and shall be of the thermal inverse time limit type and shall include a manual reset type push button on the outside of the cover. Overloads shall operate on the melting alloy principle.

H. Starters shall have normally open and/or closed external electrical interlocks as required to suit equipment controlled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR STARTER INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each motor starter assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer link.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following:

Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-

hanger shield insert indicated.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Pipe Hangers:

a. Grinnell Corp. b. National Pipe Hanger Corp. c. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

2. Channel Support Systems:

a. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.



b. National Pipe Hanger Corp. c. Unistrut Corp.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. c. Pipe Shields, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. b. Hilti, Inc. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer

to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied

finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in

sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-

out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior

and exterior applications.



2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Specification Sections. B. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 3. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 4. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. C. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4

to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. D. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

E. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

F. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent

crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-

density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate



or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier

and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield. G. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs. 4. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install

hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support

together on field-assembled channel systems. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping

and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space

attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.



H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment

supports.



B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be

shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING

Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15060


DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 1

SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.


1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.

3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems. 4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp.

3. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:

a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.

4. Calcium Silicate Insulation:

a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco. c. Schuller International, Inc.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.



D. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.

E. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with ASTM B 209 , and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this Section.

1. Finish: Smooth finish. 2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

E. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 0.10 inch thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. 1. Moisture Barrier: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 2. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch wide.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. .

1. Tape Width: 4 inches .

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch , soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch , soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.



1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface.

E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each duct system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.



G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and

joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.

2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor.

1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION



A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches . Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. 5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation

surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches

from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Space anchor pins as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches . Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.


d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.



5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.


3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:

1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement

to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and plenum surface.

3.6 CLOSED-CELL PHENOLIC-FOAM INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation as follows:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten without deforming the insulation materials.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches . Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch , soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.

3. On exposed applications, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch . Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands without deforming the insulation material.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches . Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch , soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands.

3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.



3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.10 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork. 2. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork. 3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork. 4. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork. 5. Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork. 6. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork. 7. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Testing agency labels and stamps. 8. Nameplates and data plates. 9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE



A. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket 2. Thickness 1-1/2 inches 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

B. Service: Round, return-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches . 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

C. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

D. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, concealed.


E. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, exposed.


F. Service: Round, return-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

G. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.



H. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, exposed.




PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1

SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.


1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building.

2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

3. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums. 4. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for

pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment. 5. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection

saddles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS (Not Required)



B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.





1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc.

2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:

a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.

3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp.

4. Polyolefin Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. IMCOA.

5. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:

a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.



6. Calcium Silicate Insulation:

a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco. c. Schuller International, Inc.


A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.

2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:

a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.

b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.

B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


D. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

E. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.

F. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

G. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.



2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray. 3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within the

piping system.

D. Heavy PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 30-mil- (0.75-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.

1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.


E. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil- (0.5-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.

1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.


F. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

G. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick. 2. Finish and Thickness: Painted finish, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick. 3. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 4. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same material,

finish, and thickness as jacket.

H. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; and factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes.

I. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. 1. Moisture Barrier: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 2. Elbows: Gore type, for 45- and 90-degree elbows in same material, finish, and thickness

as jacket. 3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide.




A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).

1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).

B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.


A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.



D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs at least 12 inches (300 mm) from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.



4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm)

below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.


A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet (4.5 to 6 m) to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping

seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.



C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. 4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation

jackets at least 1 inch (25 mm) at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:


2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting

covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic.






adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.





2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.




1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.







1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.





1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

3.7 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. For split tubes, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. 3. For self-adhesive insulation, staple longitudinal seams after sealing. Cement to avoid

openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.



1. Apply mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.



1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Apply cut segments of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.







1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic.






adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.




2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of phenolic-foam insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.





2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered segments of phenolic-foam insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.







3.9 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches (75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.

3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.



2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.

3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.


1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.


A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket

manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.



2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)

wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

3.11 FINISHES


B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.12 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration-control devices. 3. Fire-suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect. 2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for

various pipe sizes. 3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various

pipe sizes.



B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications.

3.14 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.15 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.

1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F (15 to 60 deg C). 2. Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe,: 1”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

B. Service: Domestic chilled water.


a. Copper Pipe: 1”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes 6. Finish: None.

C. Service: Rainwater conductors.


a. Cast Iron Pipe, Below 3”: 1” b. Cast Iron Pipe, 3” and Above: 1 ½” c. PVC Pipe, Below 3”: 1” d. PVC Pipe, 3” and Above: 1 ½”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper



5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

D. Service: Roof drain bodies.

1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F (0 to 38 deg C). 2. Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 ½” 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

E. Service: Condensate drain piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F (2 to 24 deg C). 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric 3. Insulation Thickness: ¾” 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

F. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.


a. Pipe: Below 2”: 1” b. Pipe: 2” and Above: 1 ½”


G. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.


a. Copper Pipe, ¾” min.


H. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.


a. Pipe, Below 2”: 1” b. Pipe, 2” and Above: 1 ½”




3.16 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.

B. Service: Domestic water.

1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F (15 to 60 deg C). 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, ¾”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No 6. Finish: None.

C. Service: Storm water.


a. Pipe, 1”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No 6. Finish: None.

D. Service: Refrigerant suction.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F (2 to 10 deg C). 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, ¾”

E. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.


a. Pipe: 1 ½”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No

6. Finish: None.



VALVES 15100 - 1

SECTION 15100 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections. 2. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and

temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in

Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Materials and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph. B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for

power piping. C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.


VALVES 15100 - 2

C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.



products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division – Not full port at air unit chill and hot

water heating use fullport type at blow down strainers b. Hammond Valve Corporation. c. NIBCO Inc. d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this

Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures. B. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. C. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special

operator features: Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller.

D. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.

E. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. F. Threads: ASME B1.20.1. G. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. H. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.

Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze

body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections: 1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle. 2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. 3. Memory Stop: For operator handles.


VALVES 15100 - 3


A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operation. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a

bright finish. Clean valve socket. C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.


VALVES 15100 - 4

F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.

Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until

it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to

determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. B. Align threads at point of assembly. C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal

threading is specified. D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is

being threaded. 3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as

flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper

shutoff and retention. 3.6 VALVE END SELECTION

Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

D. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for

heating hot water. E. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end. C. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; ball, and butterfly for

throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop. Non-full port type.

C. Chilled-Water and Hot Water Heating Systems: Use the following valve types:

Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop non-full port type.

D. Strainers:


VALVES 15100 - 5

Strainers to be bronze body, 250 lb. SWP, strainer core to be stainless steel material. Core holes to be 5/32” diameter, 33 holes per square inch, 62% open free area.

3.8 ADJUSTING

Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.



GAGES AND THERMOMETERS 15122 - 1

SECTION 15122 – GAGES AND THERMOMETERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each meter,

gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

a. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit. b. Ernst Gage Co. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Palmer Instruments, Inc.

e. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

g. Winter's Thermogauges, Inc. 2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to

maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. 2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASTM E 1. B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9

inches long. C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree

adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens. E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.



F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit

installation. 2.4 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold fixed

thermometer stem. 1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping. 2. Material: Steel, for use in steel piping. 3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of

insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated. 4. Insertion Length: To extend to one-third of diameter of pipe. 5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket. 6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil

2.5 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test

thermometer. 1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping. 2. Material: Steel, for use in steel piping. 3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches but not less than thickness of

insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated. 4. Insertion Length: To extend to one-third of diameter of pipe. 5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket. 6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.6 AIR PRESSURE MONITOR On each air handling unit system provide a Dwyer Co. Model No. 252-AF-8” scale air monometer, 0.20 to 2.0” for reading the air pressure drop across the filtering system. Provide 2 angles, 2A317 gauge plugs and 2 vent valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install in the following locations:

1. Supply outduct of each air handling unit

C. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are

indicated. 1. Install with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) into ductwork.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated air filter devices. B. Install electrical connections for control power and control devices.



C. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are provided and specified in Division 16 Sections.


A. Calibrate gages according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation. B. Adjust faces of gages to proper angle for best visibility. C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and

broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint. END OF SECTION 15122


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 1

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside the building.


1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Service Piping: 100 psig 2. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 80 psig .

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.



B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.2 COPPER TUBING

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L , water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M , water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing and drain valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Use the following piping materials for size range:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K ; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.



E. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for size range: 1. NPS 3 and SMALLER:: Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B) copper pressure fittings; and

soldered joints.

F. Underslab Domestic Water Piping NPS 4 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L . No fittings or joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.


A. Refer to Division 2 Section for site water distribution and service piping.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

C. Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and locations indicated.

D. Install underground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

F. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems.

G. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages, and to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

H. Install aboveground domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

I. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

J. Perform the following steps before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.



2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of

piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

K. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

L. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valve or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and ball valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing valves.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:



1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet : MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet , if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 : 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 : 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 : 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 : 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.




A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

1. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:



1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. 1.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-DWV" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.

B. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.

C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.

2.4 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Sleeve Materials: a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.



b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined.

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil, waste and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Cellular-core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-

cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: [Flexible,] [Shielded,] nonpressure pipe couplings

for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. 5. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. 6. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved joints.


A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and



reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

H. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's

written installation instructions. 3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.

J. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

K. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following:



1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3 : 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 : 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 : 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.



B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water . From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.



MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 15241 - 1

SECTION 15241 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration isolation roof curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.


1. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger restraints. 2. Division 15 piping sections for flexible pipe connectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS (not required)

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Isolation Technology, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Lord Industrial Products. 5. Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.



7. Wagner Products Corp.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the equipment supported.

1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to provide uniform loading over the pad area.

2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.

3. Load Range: From 10 to 50 psig (69 to 345 kPa) and a deflection not less than 0.08 inch per 1 inch (2 mm per 25 mm) of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 50 psig (345 kPa).

B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-drilled and tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color-code to indicate capacity range.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)

thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor loading to 100 psig (690 kPa).

6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment. 7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-spring-type isolators.

1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to structure and bonded to a 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.


3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip

galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.

E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.



F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and elastomeric insert in compression.

1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity range.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.

1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars conforming to ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). Include support brackets to anchor base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance above the floor.

3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.

4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported. 6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows. 7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb designed to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 125-mph (56-m/s) wind impinging laterally against the side of the equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding, unhoused, laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.

1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building structure and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material and 2 inches (50 mm) of rigid insulation on the inside of the assembly.

2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to permit leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a rubber isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials, attached to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the lower support assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according to manufacturer's written instructions and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psig concrete, and trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.

E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.


A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operations.

B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 1/4 inch of movement at start and stop.



MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 1

SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation semi-rigid and flexible

duct insulation, blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. This section also includes insulation requirements for kitchen hood ductwork.


1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for

penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. 2. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and

protection saddles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field

applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with

requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-

developed rating of 150 or less.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application. C. Coordinate installation and testing of electric heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with

the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-

applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket. 2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and

grades: a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber

insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.

b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for

indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. 5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with

ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M. B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 1. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 2. 3. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 4. Special_Shape Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 5. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.



D. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

E. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded,

closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1. F. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for

dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.2 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and

aluminum foil. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock

ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.

D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-

(0.5-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC. 1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, use rigid insulation material on all pipe fittings and valves.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. E. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209

(ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.

Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).

Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm). B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed,

stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

D. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel pin and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin lenght sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and

other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.


A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's

written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, piping, and duct, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and

thicknesses required for each system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs, and

tight longitudinal seams and end joints for duct. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered for

equipment requires insulation. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a

vapor retarder. H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. K. Apply rigid insulation over pipe fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal

and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation

at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. 1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation

on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.



3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,

taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). Apply

insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

4. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder. 5. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on

seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. 6. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids

with vapor-retarder mastic. P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof

flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches

(50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate

insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and

floors. S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."



T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.



1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands

without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with

vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.



1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and

bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber rigid insulation.



1. Apply rigid premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. 3. Cover fittings with rigid insulation, heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers

on pipe insulation jackets at least 1 inch (25 mm) at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.


1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of

pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes. Secure fitting covers

with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.



5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.


E. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and

anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions. 3. Space anchor pins as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.


d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13-mm) staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.


3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming

insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with

vapor-retarder mastic. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched

staples at 6 inches o.c.



4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.



1. Apply rigid premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cover fittings with rigid insulation standard PVC fitting covers. 3. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe

insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.


1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or rigid glass-fiber

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For strainers, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

2. Apply rigid insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.

Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.




1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and

bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.



3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.



1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended



1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe

insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation

to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.



3.7 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. For split tubes, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. 3. For self-adhesive insulation, staple longitudinal seams after sealing. Cement to

avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: 1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and


circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.



1. Apply mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended





1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe

insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply cut segments of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange

insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.





1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming

insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with

vapor-retarder mastic. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched

staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.




2. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. 3. Cover fittings, rigid insulation with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers

on pipe insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.


1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of

pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered segments of phenolic-foam insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to



packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For strainers, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.

Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.




A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets. 1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams

and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket

manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint

strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-retarder mastic. C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3.10 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as

specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats

of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field

quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

B. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality-

control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:



C. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: 1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect. 2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less,

for various pipe sizes. 3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for

various pipe sizes. D. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

E. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according

to these Specifications. 3.12 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,

and field-applied jackets. B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,

thickness, and jacket requirements. 3.13 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following

systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration-control devices. 3. Fire-suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.

3.14 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Domestic hot, cold and hot water.

1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, all sizes: ½” thick

4. Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None.

B. Service: Domestic chilled water.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F . 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.



3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, All sizes: ½” thick.

4. Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None.

C. Service: Condensate drain piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: ¾” 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

D. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.


a. Steel Pipe, all sizes: 1-1/2” thick b. Copper Pipe, all sizes: 1-1/2” thick

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Painted.

E. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.


a. Steel Pipe, 4” and smaller: 1” thick b. Steel Pipe, 5” and larger: 1-1/2” thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: Painted.

F. Downspout Insulation: All horizontal and vertical storm drainage piping shall be insulated, including vertical riser to roof deck, including fittings and the underside of the roof drain body, through chases. Insulate piping with rigid ½” fiberglass with vapor retarder barrier facing. Sheet closed cell insulation is acceptable at the drain body is acceptable. Low density insulation wrap is not acceptable.

3.16 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill

insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.

B. Service: Chilled-water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F .



2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Steel Pipe, all sizes: 2” thick. b. Copper Pipe, all sizes: 2” thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

C. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.


a. Steel Pipe, 4” and smaller: 1-1/2” thick b. Steel Pipe, 5” and larger: 2” thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None.

3.17 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end

of this Section. END OF SECTION 15250


EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15252 - 1

SECTION 15252 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.


1. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for insulation for piping and HVAC systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, flame spread rating, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.





1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.



B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.


C. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hemetically sealed cells, incombustible.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 1. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 2. 3. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 4. Special_Shape Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 5. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.


A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.

1. Tape Width: 4 inches .

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.




A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each equipment system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

K. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

L. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.

M. Insulate the following equipment:

1. Chilled-water air separators. 2. Chilled-water compression tanks . 3. Chilled-water centrifugal pump housings.

N. Omit insulation from the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.



3.4 TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesive-attached or self-adhesive anchor pins and speed washers on sides of

tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. On tank and vessel, 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches

o.c. in both directions. c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of tanks and

vessels.

5. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. 6. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing 7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands. 8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches . 9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other elements

that require frequent removal for service. 10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates. 11. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated

to receive vapor retarder.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

3.5 FINISHES


B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect/Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.



3.6 TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment: Chilled-water and heating hot water air separators, compression tanks, pumps, storage tanks. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F . 2. Insulation Material: Cellular glass. 3. Insulation Thickness: 2” thick

4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No - heating hot water vessels. Yes – Chilled water

vessels. 6. Finish: Aluminum Jacketing-Suitable for outside use where exposed to the

elements



PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400 - 1

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work under this Section shall include providing a complete and functioning interior plumbing

system for the project and all appurtenances indicated or necessary. The systems shall

include but shall not be limited to the following:

1. Sanitary system (sewer, soil, waste and vent)

2. Water system (hot, and cold)

3. Plumbing fixtures

B. All items specified or required shall be provided for a complete and operating system as

described in SECTION 230500 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS.

1.2 BACKING

A. Each plumbing fixture not specified to be installed on a concealed chair carrier shall be

provided with proper backing within the wall. Such backing shall be provided under other

Divisions as directed by this Division.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. All valves shall be as listed below unless otherwise noted on the drawings:

1. Shut-off valves above grade:

a. 2" and smaller - Nibco Series S-580 or Apollo Series 70, standard bore ball

valve; 400 psi ASTM B584 bronze body, ASTM B16 brass ball and stem;

Teflon seats, packing and gaskets; solder ends; two piece construction with

lever handle.

b. 2 1/2" through 5" - Nibco Series LD-2000-3 or Metraflex Series BW-2,

butterfly valve; 200 psi ASTM A-126 or 536 iron lug style body with

aluminum bronze disc, ASTM B148; EPT liner; for ANSI standard 150 psi

flanges; with locking lever handle.

2. Throttling valves above grade:

a. 2" and smaller - Nibco Series S-580 or Apollo Series 70 standard bore ball

valve; 400 psi ASTM B584 bronze body, ASTM B16 brass ball and stem;

Teflon seats, packing and gaskets; solder ends; memory stop plate; two

piece construction with lever handle.

3. Check valves above grade:

a. 2 1/2" and smaller - Nibco Series S-413 or Jenkins #92-A, 150 psi swing

check; ASTM B62, bronze body and disc holder; composition type

removable disc; soldered ends.

B. Ball and throttling valves installed in insulated piping shall have factory furnished metal stem

extensions suitable for the thickness of the insulation installed.

C. Each type of valve furnished for the project shall be the product of the same manufacturer;

i.e., all ball valves or all butterfly valves, unless prior written deviation is given by the

Architect.



2.2 PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS

A. Soil, waste and vent:

1. Pipe and fittings above first floor slabs:

a. Centrifugally spun, cast iron pipe, and drainage type fittings with plain or

beaded ends; CISPI 301; pipe and fittings shall be coated with coal tar

enamel, AWWA-C203; joints shall be neoprene elastomer sleeve with

stainless steel shield and clamp assembly; sleeve shall bear the ASTM

C564 marking, clamp shall bear the CISPI NOHUB marking.

b. Horizontal waste arms between stacks and fixtures shall be hard drawn,

copper, type DWV, ASTM B306, or type L, ASTM B88; fittings shall be

wrought copper drainage type, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze drainage

fittings, ANSI B16.23; joints shall be solder type using 95-5 type tin-

antimony solder, ASTM B32, Alloy grade 95A.

2. Pipe and fitting under slabs on grade or fill and within 10 feet of building.

a. Service weight, centrifugally spun, cast iron pipe and drainage type fittings

with hub and spigot ends, ASTM A74; pipe and fitting shall be coated with

coal tar enamel, AWWA-C203; joints shall be neoprene insert type

compression gaskets, ASTM C564.

B. Domestic Water:

1. Pipe and fittings above slab:

a. Piping 2 1/2" and smaller - Seamless copper water tube, type L, hard

drawn, ASTM B88; fittings shall be wrought copper pressure type, ANSI

B16.22 or cast bronze pressure type, ANSI B16.18; joints shall be solder

type using 95-5 type tin-antimony solder, ASTM B32, alloy grade 95A.

2. Pipe and fittings under slab:

a. Piping 1½” and smaller - Seamless copper tube, type L, soft annealed,

ASTM B88. No joints will be allowed below the slab. Turn piping up and

make joints above the slab.

b. Piping 2” through 3” - Seamless copper water tueb, type L, hard drawn,

ASTM B88; fittings shall be wrought copper pressure type

ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze pressure type ANSI B16.18; joints shall be

silver soldered using brazing alloys AWS A5.8, melting at or above 1000

degrees F.

c. Piping 4” or larger - Centrigfugally spun, gray cast iron pipe and pressure

type fittings, Class 250, ANSI/AWWA-C111/A21.11; cement mortar lining

shall be a minimum of 1/8” thick, ANSI A21.4; joints shall be mechanical

type using cast iron gland, gasket and stainless steel T-bolts.

C. Storm Drainage

1. Pipe and fittings under slabs on grade or fill and within 5 feet of building:

a. Service weight, centrifugally spun, cast iron pipe and drainage type

fittings with hub and spigot ends, ASTM A74; pipe and fittings shall be

coated with coal tar enamel, AWWA-C203; joints shall be neoprene

insert type compression gaskets, ASTM C564.

2. Pipe and fittings above first floor slabs:

a. Service weight, centrifugally spun, cast iron pipe, and drainage type

fittings with plain or beaded ends; CISPI 301; pipe and fittings shall be

coated with tar or enamel, AWWA-C203; joints shall be neoprene

elastomer sleeve with stainless steel shield and clamp assembly; sleeve

hall bear the ASTM C564 marking, clamp shall bear the CISPI NO-HUB

marking, clamp shall be Clamp-All or approved equal.



2.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Arrestors shall be tested and sized per P.D.I. Standard WH 201 and ASSE 1010.

B. Arrestors shall be permanently sealed units constructed of copper, brass or stainless steel

materials.

2.4 CLEANOUTS AND COVERS

A. Cleanout plugs installed in cast iron and copper piping systems shall be cast brass, flanged

type with raised or countersunk square head, CSS301.

B. Cleanout plugs installed in plastic piping systems shall be ABS or PVC, to suit type of piping

installed, with raised or countersunk square head.

C. Covers installed inside the building shall be cast nickel brass, 10" diameter, with a scoriated

satin finish and brass ring.

D. Covers installed outside the building shall be cast iron, 10” diameter, with a cast iron ring.

Word “SEWER” or “DRAIN” shall be cast on the cover.”

1. Acceptable manufacturers: Tyler #2-101, Vulcan #VCO-1, or approved equal.

2.5 BACKFLOW DEVICES

A. Hose End Vacuum Breakers:

1. Vacuum breakers shall be of brass construction with polished chrome finish.

Internal working parts shall be stainless steel with silicone rubber diaphragm and

disc. Female inlet and male outlet threads shall be standard 3/4" garden hose type.

2. Vacuum breakers shall have provisions for draining and "non-removable" features.

3. Assembly shall comply with ASSE Standard 1011.

2.6 INSULATION

A. All insulation shall have a vapor barrier jacket or facing complying with NFPA 90A fire and

smoke hazard rating as determined by Underwriters' Laboratories procedure UL 723, ASTM

E84 and NFPA 255 not to exceed a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

Maximum jacket permeability (if jacketed) shall be 0.02 perms per ASTM E96.

B. All accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, etc., shall have the same fire

and smoke hazard rating as jacket or facing.

C. Fiberglass insulation:

1. Pre-formed, split type, 1/2" thick fiberglass pipe insulation with an all service jacket

having a maximum "k" factor per ASTM C335 of 0.23 Btu´in/hr´ft²´°F at a mean

temperature of 75 degrees F.

D. Elastomeric insulation:

1. Preformed, un-slit tubular type 1/2" thick slip-on type foamed elastomeric pipe

insulation having a maximum "k" factor per ASTM C177 or C518 of 0.27

Btu´in/hr´ft²´°F at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F.

E. Fitting and valve insulation:

1. Fiberglass blanket insulation equal in thickness to the adjacent pipe insulation, field

cut to fit fittings. Valves shall be insulated using oversized pipe insulation field cut to

fit valves.



2. Oversized foamed elastomeric or polyethylene equal in thickness to the adjacent

pipe insulation. Miter joints at fittings and field cut to fit valves.

F. Accessories:

1. Fitting jackets - preformed, one-piece, snap-on PVC jacket covers for fittings.

2. Metal Jackets - Smooth or embossed aluminum, 0.016" thick with poly craft

moisture barrier.

2.7 FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. All fixtures shall be provided with traps, set true and plumb and securely fastened in place.

All supply pipes to fixtures shall be fitted with stop valves. All exposed metal parts,

trimmings, piping, fittings, valves, etc., shall be chromium plated brass. Heavy pattern cast

iron floor flanges or threaded nipples with suitable gaskets to make joints gas and watertight

shall be used on all china fixtures.

B. China or enameled fixtures shall be white and shall be as manufactured by American-

Standard, Crane, Eljer or Kohler.

C. Stainless steel sinks shall be as manufactured by Elkay, or Just.

D. Electric water coolers shall be as manufactured by Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Haws or Sunroc.

E. Standard type brass supply fittings and trim shall be as manufactured by American-

Standard, Crane, Eljer, Kohler, Speakman or Delta HDF.

F. Flush valves shall be as manufactured by Delany, Sloan, or Zurn.

G. Drains and fixture carriers shall be as manufactured by Josam, Smith, Wade, Zurn or

Jonespec.

H. Water closet seats shall be as manufactured by Beneke, Bemis, Church, Olsonite or

Centoco.

I. Terrazzo mop basins shall be as manufactured by Fiat or Stern-Williams.

J. Specialty type brass supply fittings and trim shall be as manufactured by Chicago Faucet, T

& S Brass or Elkay.

K. Fixtures:

SEE FIXTURE SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS

2.8 MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

Fixture Standard Height Barrier-Free Height

W.C. 15" rim to floor * 19" seat to floor

L. 31" rim to floor 29" bottom of apron to floor

E.W.C. 40" rim to floor 36" spout outlet to floor

S. 36" rim to floor ** 34" rim to floor

* Handle for flush valve in barrier-free stall shall be mounted to wide side of stall, refer to



architectural drawings.

** Sink bowl shall be 6½" deep (max.).

2.9 DRAINS

A. Refer to DRAIN SCHEDULE on drawings for all required drains.

2.10 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

A. Heater shall be of the vertical lowboy electric storage type, fit the allocated space, be

suitable to operate on the voltage indicated and have the capacity scheduled on the

drawings.

B. Tank shall be of steel construction, lined with a high temperature glass, hydraulic cement or

baked on fluorocarbon polymer. Tank shall be equipped with dip tube, anode rod, and drain

valve. Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi..

C. Heater shall be factory pre-wired and tested and shall be Incoloy immersion type with

individual fusing. Thermostat shall be immersion type or surface mounted. High

temperature limit device shall be manual reset type. Control transformer shall be 120 volt.

Where input exceeds 18 kw, multiple thermostats shall be provided to limit input in steps not

exceeding 18 kw.

D. Tank shall be insulated with heavy density fiberglass insulation and encased in a factory

finished metal jacket.

E. A suitably sized ASME temperature and pressure relief valve shall be furnished and

installed.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Refer to DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES for all toilet room accessories.

2.12 FLOW-BALANCING DEVICES

A. Body of the device shall be of cast iron construction. Indicating device shall be of stainless

steel and sight glass shall be borosilicate glass. Device shall be capable of operating at 125

psig and 250 degrees F. Working parts must be able to be removed without breaking the

piping connections.

B. Device shall provide a visual reading of the flow without using external attachments. A built-

in balancing valve shall provide external adjustments. Flow range shall be between 2 and

10 gpm.

2.13 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Wall hydrants shall be box type, Josam #71020-54-73 or Zurn #1330-3. Box and cover shall

be cast brass with nickel finish. Hydrant shall be cast brass with tubing inlet, integral

vacuum breaker and loose key operator for hydrant and box cover.

B. Acceptable manufactures: Smith, Wade, Woodford, Zurn, or approved equal.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 JOINTS

A. Hubless joints - Joints shall be made using approved connectors as herein before specified.

Piping shall be inserted into sleeve until seated, install shield to completely cover sleeve,

tighten clamps with torque wrench to specified pressure.

B. Cast iron to PVC joints - Joints shall be made using premolded insert type adaptors placed

in the hub of the PVC pipe. Apply approved lubricant to spigot end of cast iron pipe, apply

sufficient pressure to cast iron pipe to force spigot end into adaptor.

C. Installation of screw jointed, and solder jointed, grooved jointed, [and/or welded jointed]

piping shall be as specified in SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS.

3.2 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Install water hammer arrestors on all cold water headers serving two or more flush valves

and on all hot and cold water headers serving four or more fixtures without flush valves.

Also, install arrestors at all quick closing valves such as, but not limited to, disposers,

washing machines, dishwashers, solenoid valves, etc. Care shall be exercised when

selecting arrestors for high volume water usage equipment.

B. Arrestors shall be selected, sized and installed per P.D.I. Standard WH 201.

C. Air chambers may be installed on a single fixture (not in battery) furnished with manually

controlled compression type supply fittings.

D. Install access doors as herein before specified for all arrestors installed in all inaccessible

chases, walls or ceilings.

3.3 CLEANOUTS AND COVERS

A. Cleanouts shall be of the same size as pipes in which they are installed up to 8" in diameter.

Piping 10" and larger, and where indicated on the drawings 8" pipe, shall use manholes in

lieu of cleanouts for cleaning purposes.

B. Cleanouts shall be installed at the base of all stacks and at each change of direction more

than 45 degrees.

C. Cleanouts shall be installed not more than 50 feet apart in lines 3" and smaller; 75 feet apart

in 4" lines and not more than 100 feet apart in lines 5" and larger. Cleanout plugs shall be

within 3" of finished grade or building slab.

D. Covers shall be installed on all cleanouts concealed underground and under slabs on fill or

grade.

1. Cleanouts outside the building shall have the cover installed flush with the concrete

paving or shall be set securely in a precast or reinforced concrete collar 12" larger

than the diameter of the cast iron ring flange.

2. Cleanouts in the floor inside buildings shall have the covers and ring set flush with

the finished floor covering. Cleanouts in carpeted areas shall have ring with an

additional carpet flange.

3. Cleanouts in walls, chases or inaccessible ceilings shall have access doors as

specified in SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS.



3.4 BACKFLOW DEVICES

A. Install backflow devices where indicated on the drawings.

B. Device shall be constructed so that they may be removed and serviced without removing the

device from the piping system.

C. When installed inside the building an air gap drain (AGD) funnel shall be installed and piped

to the nearest floor drain unless otherwise noted.

3.5 INSULATION

A. All pipe, fittings, valves, etc., shall be insulated as herein after specified unless otherwise

noted.

B. Piping systems:

1. All domestic water piping, fittings and valves installed inside the building [or in an

accessible crawl space] shall be insulated with pipe insulation as herein before

specified.

2. Fitting insulation shall be covered with jacket covers. Jacket cover joints shall be

fastened using stainless steel tack fasteners, pressure sensitive tape, brushed-on

vapor barrier mastic or any approved combination.

3. All horizontal runs of soil and waste piping and horizontal runs of storm drainage

piping inside the building as well as the fittings shall be insulated. The bottom of the

roof drain body and the vertical pipe between the drain body and the horizontal main

shall also be insulated.

a. Piping installed above suspended ceilings shall be wrapped with 1" thick

duct wrap.

b. Exposed piping shall be insulated with split type pipe insulation as herein

before specified for water piping. Use oversized insulation on hub and no-

hub joints.

4. All floor drains and P-traps above the first floor slab, receiving air conditioning

condensate, shall have the waste piping and fittings including the bottom of the floor

drain insulated from the floor drain or P-trap to the waste stack.

C. Joints:

1. Fiberglass:

a. Transverse joints in exposed fiberglass insulation shall be secured by self-

adhering butt strips.

b. Longitudinal joints in exposed fiberglass insulation shall be secured by self-

adhering lap strips which are an integral part of the vapor barrier jacket.

c. Longitudinal joints in concealed fiberglass insulation shall be secured as

specified for exposed insulation or may be stapled by using outward

clinching staples.

d. If the self-adhering lap strips do not adhere firmly, Contractor shall re-

secure the defective lap strips by stapling as specified above.

2. Elastomeric:

a. Where possible tubular insulation shall be slipped onto the piping prior to

joining piping. Butt joints shall be coated with contact adhesive and glued

together.

b. When installing on already joined piping systems, insulation shall be slit

longitudinally, snapped over the pipe and all longitudinal and butt joints shall

be coated with contact adhesive and glued together.

c. Fittings shall be insulated by mitering and notching insulation. Valves shall

be insulated by using oversized insulation. All joints shall be sealed as

herein before specified.



D. Weatherproofing:

1. Where any insulation is exposed to areas of physical abuse or damp and wet areas

such as toilet rooms, crawl spaces, kitchens, dishwashing rooms, mechanical and

water heater rooms, etc., all insulation up to 6'-0" above the floor shall be covered

with aluminum jacket secured with soft aluminum bands on 12" centers.

2. Where fiberglass insulation is exposed to the weather it shall be covered with two

layers of 15 pound inorganic roofing felt secured in place with aluminum tie wires in

12" centers. Transverse joints of the felt shall be lapped a minimum of 6". The felt

shall be covered with an aluminum jacket, as herein before specified, secured by

soft aluminum bands on 12" centers.

3. Fitting insulation shall be covered with UV stabilized PVC or aluminum jacket

covers. All fitting joints shall be weatherproofed.

4. Elastomeric and polyethylene insulation shall be weatherproofed by applying two

coats of latex paint, per manufacturers recommendations, to the insulation.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES

A. General:

1. Each fixture shall be securely fastened to its supporting device (blocking, carrier,

floor or wall hanger).

2. Each fixture shall be installed level and plumb for proper operation.

3. Space between the finished wall and the top and sides of each fixture shall be

caulked with flexible silicone based compound.

4. All water lines serving fixtures shall be securely anchored in wall to prevent undue

movement.

5. Adjacent and similar fixtures shall be installed at the same elevation.

6. Where commercial chair carriers are specified for fixtures, carriers shall be securely

and properly bolted to the floor slab using wedge type anchor bolts. Securing

carriers to adjacent metal studs for support will not be permitted.

7. Where wall hangers are specified for fixtures being installed on metal stud walls, the

Contractor shall, if required by the type of fixture, provide additional bracing to

prevent wall from deflecting when 150 lbs. of pressure is applied to front edge of

fixture. [Where wall hangers are specified for fixtures being installed on masonry

walls, the Contractor shall use inserts as required to properly install hanger.]

8. Edges, tops and sides of fixtures requiring caulking or grout shall have joint finished

flush with fixture.

B. Water Closets:

1. Floor mounted bowls shall be securely fastened to closet flanges. Base of bowl

shall be set in a complete bed of waterproof grout. Annular space around hole in

slab and pipe or closet flange shall also be filled with the waterproof grout. Floor

flanges shall be caulked into position.

C. Lavatories and Sinks:

1. Wall hung bowls shall have the wall hanger securely fastened to the blocking within

the wall. Fixtures having anchor screw holes shall have anchoring screws securely

fastened to the blocking or the wall.

2. Countertop bowls shall be set in a continuous heavy bead of flexible silicone

caulking compound and anchoring screws tightened securely.

D. Mop Basins:

1. Reinforced plastic basins shall be installed so that fixture drains properly.

2. Precast terrazzo receptors shall be set in a complete bed of waterproof grout, ¼"

minimum thickness.



E. Floor Drains:

1. All floor drains shall be installed at the low point of the floor unless drain is used as a

hub drain.

2. Membrane flashing clamp shall be attached to the waterproof membrane furnished

under other Divisions.

3.7 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Wall hydrants shall be installed a minimum of 18 inches above finished grade.

B. Water lines serving hydrants shall be securely anchored to prevent movement. Flanges

shall be set flush with finished wall surfacesl.

3.8 SANITARY SYSTEM

A. Sewer piping from all soil and waste stacks shall be extended to the stub-out provided

above the first floor ceiling as indicated.

B. All horizontal soil and waste piping shall be graded not less than 1/8" per foot unless

otherwise noted.

C. Changes in direction in the sanitary system shall be made by the appropriate use of 45

degree wyes, long or short sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, or by a

combination of these or equivalent fittings. Single or double sanitary tees and short quarter

bends may be used only where the flow is from the horizontal to the vertical.

D. All fixtures not specified to be provided with traps as integral parts of their assembly shall

have separate traps with cleanouts. Waste and vent lines shall be provided for all fixtures

and drains, as scheduled on the drawings.

E. Vent piping shall be connected at a height of not less than 12" above the flood level of the

fixture served, and shall be graded to drip back into the soil, waste or vent stack by gravity.

F. Vertical stacks, unless indicated otherwise, shall be extended full size not less than 9" above

the roof and shall be placed in position before the roofing is applied. Vents shall be flashed

using two piece boot and thimble type flashing with the top of thimble turned down into the

cavity of the pipe. Flashing shall be of 2½ pound sheet lead and shall extend 8" from the

outside of the boot in all directions.

3.9 WATER SYSTEM

A. Domestic water piping shall be extended from existing valved and capped locations

indicated.

B. Branch lines from hot and cold water mains shall be provided and connected to all fixtures,

heaters, hose bibbs and outlets indicated. Shutoff valves shall be provided where shown,

specified or noted and on each supply to each fixture not provided with a compression stop

or auxiliary shutoff valve.

C. Provide valved make-up and/or quick-fill connections where indicated on the drawings for

the chilled water systems. Sizes shall be as indicated. Final connection will be made under

SECTION 15600 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS.



3.10 CLEANING AND FLUSHING

A. All new water lines shall be cleaned and flushed prior to being placed in use and before final

acceptance.

B. Water shall be allowed to flow at full main pressure through all fixtures and outlets for a

minimum of 15 minutes.

C. Prior to flushing, all aerators shall be removed and shall be replaced after flushing.

3.11 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING

A. All new potable water lines shall be disinfected prior to being placed in use and before final

acceptance of the project.

B. Disinfection shall be in accordance with the Sanitary Code, State of Louisiana; Chapter XIV,

Plumbing; Paragraph 14:112-1.

C. New water lines shall not be used until system is tested, disinfected and accepted by the

Architect and the Division of Health, Louisiana Department of Health and Human

Resources.

3.12 PROTECTION OF TUBING

A. Water piping installed through concrete slabs on grade or fill shall be protected by a 0.008

mm thick plastic sleeve, color coded (red for hot blue for cold) and shall extend from 12"

below slab to minimum of 6" above slab. Tubing shall be installed at least 3" clear of any

reinforcing steel, conduits, etc.

B. Where copper tubing is installed through holes or notches in the wood studs, joists, etc., or

through furring strips on hollow masonry walls, an approved steel plate shall be installed on

each side of member to protect the tubing from damage by nails, screws, staples, etc.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. All piping shall have identification marking as follows:

1. Copper:

a. Hard drawn copper shall be identified by color coding, name of trade-mark

of manufacturer and country of origin.

b. Soft drawn copper shall be identified by shipping tags, color coding of

cartons or as specified by the applicable ASTM Standard for type of copper

used.

2. Cast Iron:

a. Pipe shall have continuous marking the length of the pipe barrel indicating

manufacturer, country of origin and service weight of pipe.

3.14 TESTS OF PIPING

A. All tests described below shall be made in the presence of the Architect and a

representative of the authority having jurisdiction, if required.

B. Soil, Waste, Vent & Storm Drainage:

1. Piping shall be tested in sections not less than 10' nor more than 40' in height.

Stacks shall be filled with water to the highest point and allowed to stand for 30

minutes without dropping. A smoke or peppermint test may also be required.



C. Water:

1. Piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test of 100 psi for one hour with

no drop in pressure.

2. Piping systems installed above an existing ceiling system shall be tested with dry

nitrogen at 100 psi for one hour.

D. Existing Systems:

1. Where new systems are indicated to be connected to an existing system, the new

systems shall be tested and then connected to the existing system. Existing

systems are NOT to be subjected to the test pressure.

3.15 STORM DRAINAGE

A. Drainage piping from all interior roof drain leaders and interior area drains shall be

extended to approximately 10 feet beyond the building line, and connected to the

drainage stub or drop inlet provided under another division.

B. All horizontal piping shall be graded not less than 1/8” per foot unless otherwise noted.

See drawings for grading other than specified above. Swing joints shall be installed in all

storm drainage systems where piping leaves pile supported slabs.

C. Changes in direction in the underground and interior drainage systems shall be made by

the use of manufactured fittings.”



WATER DISTIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 1

SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment

inside building. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building.

B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping and water distribution piping.

C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and equipment throughout the building

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following

minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Service Entrance Piping: 100 psig. 2. Water Distribution Piping: 80 psig .


A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1 through

9 for potable-water piping and components.

1. Keyed Couplings, 5-Inch NPS and Larger: 6 of each type and size installed. Include one extra gasket with each coupling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M , water tube, drawn temper. C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 82, Types K and L . Water Tube, Annealed Temper.



2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article. B. Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22

wrought copper. C. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket

joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Include threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used

joining materials. C. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free. D. Copper, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606.

Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts. E. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating

at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined. 2.4 VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on

aboveground copper tubing. D. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Use the following:

1. 3-Inch NPS and smaller: Soft Copper Tube, Type L; Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; and Solder Joints.

E. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:

1. 3-Inch NPS and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and

soldered joints.



3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.

B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

3.4 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain. B. Install piping level without pitch. C. Fitting Option for Hard Copper Tube: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets may be used

instead of tee fittings. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint

construction. B. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube, drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube forming seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.


A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving

plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use ball valves for all piping. B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to

plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use ball valves. C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in

horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

A. Hose Bibb: Woodford Model B24 with vacuum breaker and anti siphon accessory. Provide appropriate accessories for inwall installation.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

Install the following: 1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.



2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet and less.

3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 100 feet.

4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 100 feet.

5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs. B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

diameters: 1. 3/4-Inch NPS and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with 3/8-inch

minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet. 2. 1-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 72 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod

diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet. 3. 1-1/4-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 72 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod

diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet. 4. 1-1/2 and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 96 inches with 3/8-inch minimum

rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet. 5. 2-1/2-Inch and 3-Inch NPS: Maximum horizontal spacing, 108 inches with 1/2-inch

minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet . 3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and

connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

3. Equipment: Connect cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.


A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows: B. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.



b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction. C. Test water distribution piping as follows: D. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable-water distribution piping as follows: B. Clean and disinfect potable service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows: C. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: D. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of

chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming

from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedure if biological examination shows contamination. E. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.



F. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is

full of water. B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of

piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use. C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not

operate water heaters before filling with water. D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, other fittings, and related components.

A. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this

Section includes drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract. B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include trim, fittings,

accessories, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, and other components of each category from one

source and by a single manufacturer. B. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of

plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures with equal performance characteristics may be considered.


A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering. B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.


A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing

fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FITTINGS

A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for

materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings. B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:

1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection. 2. Traps: Tubular brass with 0.045-inch wall thickness, slip-joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange,

escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.



3. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, with slip-joint inlet, and size to match equipment.

4. Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, and size to match equipment. 2.2 FLOOR-DRAIN SCHEDULE A. Floor Drain FD: Where plumbing specialties of this designation are indicated, provide products

complying with the following: 1. Applicable Standard: ASME A112.21.1M. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. #30000-E1 Josam Co. b. #S-2005-F37 Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. #Z-415-I Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div. 4. Body Material: Cast iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Outlet: Bottom. 7. Top or Strainer Material: Brass. 8. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel brass. 9. Top Shape: Round, Square with extended rim. 10. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.

11. Inlet Fitting: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and caulk or spigot outlet. 12.

2.3 LIVESTOCK WATERERS

A. Livestock waterers: Provide products complying with the following:

1. Provide pad mounted free-standing waterer of o.105” thick type 304 stainless steel construction, 16” width, 25” height with optional heater kit at 325 watts. Product shall be complete with removable stainless steel bowl, waterline shut-off lever. Brass shut-off valve, electrical junction box balance-beam water actuating system. Optional electric heater, thermostatically controlled. Flexible waterline connecting hose with fittings, balance beam counterweight, optional water line insulation, mounting lugs for securing to concrete pad, standard housing insulation and stainless steel housing. Nelson 760-24 or approved equal.


A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent

piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated.

B. Examine walls, and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION



A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in drawings,

and referenced standards. C. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall

construction, to reinforcement built into walls. D. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.

E. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. F. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-

pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildew-

resistant, silicone sealant. 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing

equipment in compliance with authority having jurisdiction's requirements. B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end

of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture. C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment: Connect equipment with supply inlets, supply risers,

and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.


A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation.

Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.


A. Operate and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at water heater valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping connections. D. Clean fittings and related items with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

Include the following:



1. Remove strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner.



RADIANT HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 15769 - 1

SECTION 15769 - RADIANT HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electric radiant heaters. 2. Prefabricated electric radiant heating panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, specialties, and accessories for each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment assemblies and suspension and attachment. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which heaters and suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.

5. Perimeter moldings.



D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that suspended radiant heaters and panels, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric radiant heaters and panels to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of radiant heaters and panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Chromalox Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company. 3. Fostoria Industries, Inc.; a division of TPI Corporation.



4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 5. Omega Engineering, Inc. 6. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.

D. Quartz Lamp Heating Elements: Coiled tungsten-wire heating element enclosed in clear quartz tube.

E. Quartz Tube Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium-wire heating element enclosed in quartz tube.

F. Metal-Sheathed Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium-wire heating element embedded in magnesium oxide powder and enclosed in metal sheath. Comply with UL 1030.

G. Comply with UL 499 and UL 2021.

H. Enclosures: Stainless-steel housing with anodized-aluminum reflector.

I. Unit Controls:

1. Line-voltage thermostat. 2. Enclosed contactor for remote thermostat. 3. Snow and ice detector with moisture sensor and integral temperature sensor.

J. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. See Schedule on Drawings.

2.2 PREFABRICATED ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATING PANELS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive radiant heating and cooling units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before radiant heating and cooling unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install radiant heating and cooling units level and plumb.

B. Suspend radiant heaters from structure.

C. Support for Radiant Heating and Cooling Panels in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each panel. Locate not more than 6 inches from panel corners.



2. Support Clips: Fasten to panel and to ceiling grid members at or near each panel corner with clips designed for the application.

3. Panels of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support panels independently with at least two 3/4-inch (19-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on panel. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of panel at a safety factor of 3.

D. Verify locations of thermostats with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above finished floor.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

C. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground electric units according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and units.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. After installing panels, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain radiant heaters and panels. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."



METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular and round, metal ducts and plenums for

heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg.


1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.

2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation. 3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated

casings for mechanical equipment. 4. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, (duct-mounted

access doors and panels) turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 5. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for constant-volume and reheat

boxes. 6. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 7. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing

and final adjusting of manual-volume dampers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined

in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.

B. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving

and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For duct wrap insulation and sealing materials. (Duct Liner

insulation is not approved) B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:



1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans. 3. Fittings. 4. Balancing dampers 5. Test and Balancing locations in main trunk duct. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 10. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,

vibration isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide

access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures,

diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements. E. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support,

and installed accessories and devices.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"

unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers

or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's

written recommendations. C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective

paper maintained through fabrication and installation.


March 7, 2012


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating

designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-

inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of

adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced. 2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral

compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for building materials.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or

galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. 2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;

compatible with duct materials. D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2.4 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other

construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and


March 7, 2012


intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and

rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, and discolorations. B. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

following: 1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg. 2. Return Ducts: 2-inch wg, negative pressure. 3. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg, negative pressure.

C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and

larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Coordinate duct layout with Test and Balancing Contractor to provide sufficient straight run of duct, proper location of test ports and access for Testing and Balancing purposes.

C. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification

indicated. 1. Install ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings. 2. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, offsets, changes in size and shape, and

connections. E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and

perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and

permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Install balancing dampers at all duct takeoffs. J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid

partitions, unless specifically indicated. K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting

layouts, and similar finished work. L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer

vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.


March 7, 2012


M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and

exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and

exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and

as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse joints. C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each

branch intersection. C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of

failure load. E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. G. Coordinate hangar spacing with structural steel to determine total number of hangars

required. Additional hangars, if required, will be at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct

Accessories." B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate

leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements. B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated,


March 7, 2012


test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface

area of test section. D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements Leakage Classification 12 for

rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10-inch wg.

E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable. F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test

Manual."

3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow. B. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.

3.7 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the

system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris. END OF SECTION 15815


DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors. 2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic

damper actuators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Motorized-control damper installations. 4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations,

including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 (Z180) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Duro Dyne Corp. 4. Greenheck. 5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.



B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with[ center-pivoted] blades of maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

C. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

D. Blades: 0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminum.

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple-blade, opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.



E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch - (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Greenheck. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch-(2.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch-(1.61-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

3. Provide opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf ; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company.

B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick as indicated and of length to suit application.



2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, [single] [double]-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.


a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. Ductmate Industries, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. Greenheck. e. Nailor Industries Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:



a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches [with outside

and inside handles].

C. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

D. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. . 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F .

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.



C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum

50-foot (15-m) spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches . 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches . 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches . 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches . 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches

J. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly.

N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly.

O. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.



C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."



POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 1

SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPELLER FANS


1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. Greenheck. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. Penn Ventilation

B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.

C. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

D. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

E. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with

larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.



6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.

G. Accessories: 1. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable

for maintenance. 2. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 3. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan

housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 4. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 5. Insect Screens: 6. Louver; Intake/Exhaust: Architectural or custom-built louver to be in compliance with the

French Quarter’s Historical District Commission

H. Capacities and Characteristics per schedule:

1. Vibration Isolators:

a. Type: Elastomeric or spring as supplied by manufacturer

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using elastomeric or spring mounts having a static deflection of 1 inch as supplied by the equipment manufacturer.

C. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and vibration isolators supplied by manufacturer.

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.



3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts

and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel

free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.

2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.

3. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."



B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.


A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.



3.5 DIFFUSER SCHEDULE

Refer to construction drawings.

3.6 REGISTER SCHEDULE

Refer to Construction Drawings.

3.7 GRILLE SCHEDULE

Refer to Construction Drawings.



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 1

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce

design objectives, including the following: 1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,

branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.

2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.


1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment

are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment. 2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and

equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as

to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,

branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors

of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results. E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of

measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the

suction side.



H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions

that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance

ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or

leaves the distribution system. K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment. L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and

reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute. P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.


A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by

either AABC or NEBB. E. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing,

adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified

testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the

approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's

"National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." G. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."



H. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national

standards. I. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural

Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

J. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more

frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Test and Balancer under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)


A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to

discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions

of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,

flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.



B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate

performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

D. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that

testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

E. Examine system and equipment test reports. F. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing

devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

G. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and

balancing. H. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings

are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. This shall be the work of

the mechanical contractor and controls subcontractor. J. Examine 2-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or

mixing fluid flows. This shall be the work of the mechanical contractor and controls subcontractor.

K. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction

piping. This shall be the work of the mechanical contractor and controls subcontractor. L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and

controls. This shall be the work of the mechanical contractor and controls subcontractor.

M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: This shall

be the work of the mechanical contractor and controls subcontractor. 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended

controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.



3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract

Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system

reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.

9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting,

and balancing procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mechanical contractor shall complete system readiness checks and prepare readiness

report. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required

and access to balancing devices is provided. 7. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations

can be met. 3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the

procedures contained in AABC national standards and this Section. B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the

procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.

C. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to

the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

D. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.



3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors

and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow

measurements. C. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-

and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. D. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. G. Check for airflow blockages. H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. I. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by

the fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as

practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance

personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound

traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design

static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect



factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to

design airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and

adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for

Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's

written instructions and calculating factors. E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified

tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of

design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at

pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in

addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest

vent.



4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing

device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually

operated. 3.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Determine water flow at all unit coils.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves. C. Measure flow at all units and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-

pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow

that is 5 percent greater than design flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing unit with the highest percentage over design flow. 2. Adjust each unit in turn, beginning with the unit with the highest percentage over

design flow and proceeding to the unit with the lowest percentage over design flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.8 MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following

data: 1. Entering and leaving water temperatures for units over 3000 CFM. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.

3.9 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 2. Water flow rate.



3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for

less than 7500 cfm. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

3.10 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature

regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.11 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely

affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual

measurements. D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve

operators. F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device

positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system

operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. Control Contractor shall verify all temperature control devices for proper operation

before any balancing work is started. 3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.



2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.13 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond

paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing

and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of

calibration. C. Final Report Contents:

1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include

approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following

data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 10. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents. 11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design

values. 14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.



d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch

diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches , and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches

. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in cfm . b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg . e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg). f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg . g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg . h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg . i. Outside airflow in cfm . j. Return airflow in cfm . k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:



a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch . f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. . h. Tube size in NPS . i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in cfm . b. Average face velocity in fpm . c. Air pressure drop in inches wg . d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F . e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F . g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm . i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F . k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F . l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed

in central-station air-handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh (kW). e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm .


a. Heat output in Btuh (kW). b. Airflow rate in cfm . c. Voltage at each connection. d. Amperage for each phase.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:



a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches , and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches

. 2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches , and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches

. g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm . b. Total system static pressure in inches wg c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg . e. Suction static pressure in inches wg .

I. Round, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F . d. Duct static pressure in inches wg . e. Duct size in inches . f. Duct area in sq. ft. . g. Design airflow rate in cfm . h. Design velocity in fpm . i. Actual airflow rate in cfm . j. Actual average velocity in fpm . k. Barometric pressure in psig .

M. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application.



d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.27 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional

testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.



ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. These specifications are intended to provide for labor, materials, equipment, and services

and of performing all operations required for the complete electrical system as specified herein and/or shown on the accompanying drawings.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of all sections of Division 16.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Summary: Electrical work includes, but is not limited to the following:

B. General Work: General work associated with electrical systems and equipment including excavating, backfilling, concrete equipment bases, concrete duct encasements, conduit sleeves and supports, anchors, vibration and sound isolation, access panels, identification, record drawings, installation permits, tests, inspections by governing authorities, cutting-and-patching work, utility companies connections coordination, start-up of electrical systems and equipment, training of Owner's operating personnel, operating and maintenance manuals, final cleaning of electrical and similar work.

C. Wiring and Power Distribution: Incoming service as indicated, transformers, switchboards,

panelboards, enclosures, electrical boxes, conduit systems, raceways, wires/cables, wiring devices, overcurrent protective devices, contactors, time switches, equipment connections, grounding systems, and similar work, all as indicated on electrical drawings and elsewhere in contract documents.

1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment shall conform in all respects to the requirements set forth in these specifications and the accompanying drawings. The Contractor shall furnish the items as specified or an equal as listed by addendum. Review of substitutions shall be requested in writing as described in the General Specifications and shall contain all data to indicate equality to what was specified.

B. Except as otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be new and bear the

approval label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated and all other standards specified herein.



1.5 PHASED CONSTRUCTION; SEQUENCING

A. Refer to Division-1 provisions for determination of how construction phasing and sequencing requirements may affect performance of electrical work.

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. There may be certain alternates involved in the construction. The Contractor is cautioned to be aware of and to provide appropriate adjustments for all alternates described in the specifications or on the drawings.

1.7 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND FEES

A. Obtain all necessary permits and work orders required and pay for all fees for such permits. Upon completion, a certificate of approval from the appropriate regulatory agency shall be furnished to the architect. All fees for services to be paid for by the Contractor. Include all such fees in bid.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the work installed by him for one year from the date of final acceptance of the project and shall furnish free of cost to the Owner materials and labor necessary to repair or replace defective items of workmanship. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment to be of the quality and capacity specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. All electrical products on this project shall conform, unless otherwise specifically noted, to applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association and shall be listed by the Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.

B. Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by manufacturer,

brand name or type, or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and style and shall be the basis of the bid. Except where noted, it is implied that “or approved equal” follows all specified items. Where two or more designations are listed, choice shall be optional with the Contractor.

C. All materials shall be in accordance with associated specifications and drawings. Where

equipment is specified by manufacturer, no substitutions shall be made without prior approval by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Any bills of materials, conduit and wire schedules, etc., will be used for identification, type,

and reference. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine exact quantities and components required to effect a complete job in accordance with drawings and associated specifications.

E. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Contractor shall obtain these instructions and they shall be considered a part of these specifications. Contractor shall furnish instructions, operation, and maintenance instructions.



2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All material, equipment, methods, and accessories entering into the work under this section of contract are subject to the approval or disapproval of the A\E. Approval of any manufacturer, material, or product shall not constitute a waiver of A\E’s right to demand full compliance with contract requirements, including shape, size, quality, and performance.

B. Equality of materials is that established by the opinion of A\E. Decision of A\E is final.

C. Whenever a material or article of equipment is specified by use of a proprietary name, or

by naming the manufacturer or vendor, an material or article which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the design will be considered for substitution, providing it is of equal substance, and function, meets specifications, and is aesthetically acceptable to the A\E. See division 1 for prior approval requirements.

D. Literature, technical data, etc., includes complete data and samples if necassary, with

submissions for substitutions. Burden of proof that material offered for substitution is equal, or superior, in construction and efficiency to that named, rests on the Contractor, unless proof is satisfactory to A/E, substitution will not be approved.

E. Approval for substitutions will be granted by the Architect/Engineer to the Electrical

Contractor, only through the General Contractor. 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT HANDLING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, unloading, storing, protecting from

weather, theft, breakage, etc., all electrical equipment, and material either purchases by the Contractor or furnished by others. The Contractor shall remove such material from storage and transport it to the site of erection when required for construction. The Contractor shall protect his own tools and any tools on loan from the Owner in a like manner. Also, the Contractor shall protect all equipment from accidental damage due to operating and maintenance activities that will be in progress in the same area.

PART - 3 EXECUTION

3.1 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

A. All applicable sections of the NFPA (latest edition) including the NEC, ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) latest edition, and all state and/or local codes or ordinances shall apply as minimum standards.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP

A. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Any work judged substandard by the architect shall be redone at the Contractors expense.



ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 16020 - 1

SECTION 16020 - ELECTRICAL COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: As soon as practicable after the contract is let, in order that work under this contract will not be delayed, submit to the Architect, for review, complete descriptive and dimensional data on those items specified in sections that follow.

B. Shop drawings shall be furnished for the following items as a minimum:

1. Panelboards 2. Safety and/or Disconnect Switches 3. Fuses 4. Grounding Equipment 5. Raceways and Fittings 6. Boxes 7. Wiring/Cables

C. Corrections or comments made on shop drawings during the review do not relieve this

Contractor from compliance with requirements of the contract documents, plans and specifications. Shop drawings will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with information given in the contract documents. Review of the shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, coordinating his work with that of all other trades, and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Review of shop drawings shall not permit any deviation from plans and specifications.

1.2 EQUIPMENT MANUALS

A. Furnish three bound sets of descriptive, dimensional and parts data on:

1. Panelboards 2. Safety and/or Disconnect Switches 3. Fuses 4. Grounding Equipment 5. Raceways and Fittings 6. Boxes 7. Wiring/Cables



1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage Coordination: It is recognized that space at project for storage of materials and products is limited. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and products with scheduling and sequencing of work so that storage requirements at project are minimized. In general, do not deliver individual items of electrical equipment to project substantially ahead of time of installation.

1.4 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS

A. At all times take precautions necessary to properly protect electrical equipment from damage. Failure to comply with the above to the Architect's satisfaction shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of the particular piece of apparatus in question.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL PRODUCT COORDINATION

A. Power Characteristics: For all items requiring power provided in sections of Division 2 through 15, the Contractor is to verify all electrical requirements, including voltages, ratings and any other electrical characteristics with actual equipment to be furnished and adjust work as required to provide proper electrical service to the particular item at not extra cost to owner. Notify the Architect before starting work if changes from the work shown on the drawings will be necessary.

B. Coordination of Options and Substitutions: Where contract documents permit selection

from several product options, do not proceed with purchasing until coordination of interface requirements has been checked and satisfactorily established.

C. Raceways, Wiring, Safety/Disconnect Switches, etc. for Equipment by Others: Electrical

service required for all equipment furnished under Division 15 (Mechanical), 16 (Electrical), or other Divisions of this Specification shall be furnished and connected as part of this work. It is part of the work of this Division to obtain correct roughing-in dimensions and requirements for this equipment and provide labor, materials, equipment and services for a complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Substrate Examination: Installer of each element of electrical work shall examine condition of substrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and shall make notification of conditions detrimental to completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

B. Existing Facilities and Conditions: The Electrical Contractor shall visit the building site to

determine existing conditions and will be held responsible for allowing for these conditions in his bid. This area of work may have existing storm drainage, mechanical and electrical utilities, etc. located underground. It is part of this work for the Contractor to determine the scope and location of all existing utilities and the scope and location of all new utilities to be installed concurrent with this project and arrange his work around others. Damages to existing utilities by the contractor shall be corrected by him at no additional compensation. Contractor shall call 1-800-272-3020 per Louisiana statutes.



C. Layout electrical work in conformity with contract drawings, coordination drawings and other shop drawings, product data and similar requirements, so that entire mechanical/electrical plant will perform as an integrated system, properly interfaced with other work.

D. Large and Heavy Equipment: Where possible, prearrange for movement and positioning

of large equipment into building structure, so that enclosing walls and roofs will neither be delayed nor need to be removed. Otherwise, make notice of opening requirements to be maintained for subsequent entry of large equipment units.


A. Structural Limitations: Do not cut structural framing, walls, floors, decks and other members which are load bearing, except with Architect's written authorization. Authorization will be granted only where there is no other reasonable method for completing electrical work, and where proposed cutting clearly does not materially weaken the structure.

B. Other Work: Do not endanger or damage other work through procedures and processes

of cutting to accommodate electrical work. Review proposed cutting with Installers of the work to be cut, and comply with their recommendations to minimize damage. Where necessary, engage original Installer or other specialists to execute cutting in recommended manner.

C. Patching: Where patching is required to restore other work, because of cutting or other

damage occurring during installation of electrical work, execute patching in manner recommended by original Installer. (Original Installer, where patching of finishes existing prior to beginning of work, refers to those performing similar work in areas of new construction.) Restore other work in every respect, including elimination of visual defects in exposed finishes, as judged by Architect. Engage original Installer to complete patching of the following categories of work:

1. Lawns, planting and unit-type paving (brick, etc.). 2. Exposed concrete finishes. 3. Exposed masonry and stonework. 4. Exposed structural metal and ornamental metal. 5. Architectural woodwork. 6. Waterproofing and vapor barriers. 7. Roofing, flashing, and accessories. 8. Exterior wall systems. 9. Sprayed-on insulation and fireproofing. 10. Interior exposed finishes and casework, where judged by Architect to be difficult

to achieve an acceptable match by other means.

3.3 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate various elements of electrical work so that electrical system will perform as indicated and be in harmony with other work of building. Architect will not supervise coordination, which is exclusive responsibility of Contractor.

B. Install raceways straight and true, aligned with other work, close to walls and overhead

structure, concealed where possible in occupied spaces, and out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space.

C. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment. Locate

services requiring maintenance on wiring devices and similar units in front of services



requiring less maintenance. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other work. Locate operating and control equipment and devices for easy access. Maintain NEC code clearances around all electrical equipment.

D. Install access panels where electrical work requiring access is concealed by finishes and

similar work. Access panels utilized shall be approved by the Architect.

E. Integrate electrical work in ceiling plenums, including lighting fixtures, with ceiling finish, suspension, ductwork, air diffusers and other work, so that required performances of each will be achieved.

F. Where work is in close proximity to the work of other contractors, the Electrical Contractor

shall review plans of other contractors and coordinate his work with theirs. The Electrical Contractor shall verify the location of lighting fixtures, beams, structural members, conduit, ductwork, pipes or other obstructions before beginning his work in the area. Notify the Architect where proper clearances do not occur or where the work of others would interfere with the safe and/or proper operation of this work. Give right-of-way in confined-service spaces to piping which must slope for drainage, and to larger HVAC ductwork and similar services which are less conformable than electrical services.

3.4 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or required by the Architect, the following mounting heights shall apply. Heights are to center of device unless noted otherwise:

Dimmers 4’-0”

Toggle Switches 4’-0”

Receptacles 1’-6”

Telephone/Data Outlets 1’-6”

Motor Control Equipment 5’-0”

Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations 4’-0” to top

Fire Alarm Visual, Audible, and Audible/Visual Alarm Indicating Devices

80” above floor or 6” below the ceiling; whichever is the lower to the bottom of the appliance

Panelboards 6’-6” to top (not more than 5’-6” from top most operating handling to floor.)

Cable TV Outlets 1’-6”

Time Switch 5’-0”

Contactor 5’-0”

B. Upon approval of the Architect, mounting heights may be adjusted to simplify cutting of concrete blocks in block walls or to facilitate furniture, base or cabinet arrangements. All mounting heights may be field adjusted by the Architect without any additional cost.

C. Wiring devices above counters and/or benches and/or shelves and/or lavatories shall be

mounted as directed by architect.

D. All mounting heights may be adjusted in the field to reduce visibility at outside and in certain inside areas. Coordinate heights of all equipment with screen walls, fencing, other equipment, etc., and with Architect before rough-in. This will include wall and rack mounted equipment inside or outside. Verify all mounting heights with Architect prior to rough-in.



E. Where designated by the Architect or otherwise shown, those rooms that are equipped for use by the physically impaired (handicapped) or to be designated adaptive for that use shall have all receptacle, telephone, and cable TV outlets mounted with the bottom 15 inches above the floor minimum and switches and other rough-ins (such as thermostats, dimmers, etc.) mounted with the bottom no higher than 42 inches above the floor.

3.5 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Panelboards, safety switches, transformers, switchboard equipment cabinets, motor starters, contactors, time switches, and all other equipment shown on the drawings and furnished and/or installed under this section of the specifications shall be labeled with laminated plastic nameplates inscribed to identify equipment with description shown on the drawings for panels, the name of the equipment controlled for motor starters, or the system of function involved for other equipment. Nameplates shall be black with white etched letters, 1/4" minimum size lettering.

B. Other labeling shall be furnished and installed as described elsewhere in these

specifications.

3.6 DRAWINGS

A. Conform with arrangement indicated by contract documents, recognizing that portions of work are shown only in diagrammatic form.

B. These specifications and accompanying drawings are intended to describe complete

workable systems of the various types. Items of materials, work, or equipment not mentioned, but normally necessary for the proper execution of this work, shall be provided as if specifically called for.

C. The drawings show approximate locations only of feeders, branch circuits, outlets, etc.,

except where specific routing or dimensions are indicated. The Architect reserves the right to make changes in locations indicated, before roughing-in, without additional cost to the Owner.

D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the offsets,

fittings, pull/junction boxes and accessories required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions and arrange work accordingly, furnishing fittings, bends, junction boxes, pull boxes, access panels, and accessories required to meet such conditions.

E. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, comply

with the Architect's decision on resolution of conflict.

3.7 MECHANICAL WORK

A. Coordinate electrical work with mechanical work (Division 15) for proper service to each item of equipment requiring electrical connection. Determine, with each mechanical equipment installer, the proper sequencing and location for disconnect switches and similar points of interface between mechanical and electrical work.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, final power connections are electrical work.

C. Power Wiring associated with DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL shall be done as work of this

Division. Except as may be hereinafter indicated, control wiring and associated raceway system will be done as work of DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL.

D. Work of other Divisions will include furnishing and setting motors.



E. Unless indicated otherwise, magnetic starters (including variable speed drives, etc.) will

be furnished under other Divisions for installation under this Division.

F. Overload elements in starters shall be selected according to actual motor nameplate full load current. Responsibility for this coordination shall lie with the Division under which the particular starter is furnished.

G. Unless indicated otherwise, power disconnect switches and single speed manual starting

switches shall be furnished and installed under this Division. Where combination magnetic starters are provided as work of another Division, the associated disconnect switch will be furnished as work of that Division. Fuses shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. Disconnect switches for control wiring will be furnished and installed under DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL.

H. Firestats for single phase fans will be furnished and set under DIVISION 15 -

MECHANICAL, and electrically connected in the branch circuit wiring as work of this Division. Other control wiring, including temperature control wiring, high voltage interlocking, start-stop wiring, together with conduit for same, will be furnished and installed under DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL; this includes, but is not limited to, thermostats, damper motors, aquastats, push buttons, selector switches, control power transformers, control panel, etc.

I. Refer to DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL, and to mechanical drawings for any additional

electrical power work required.

3.8 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate connections of electrical systems, telephone system, and cable TV system with exterior power, telephone, and cable TV services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Pay any charges for installation of their facilities.

B. Electrical, telephone, and cable TV services for this work will be supplied by the local

utility companies. Contact the utility company to schedule and arrange for their work to be done. Pay any utility company charges for the installation of their facilities, and make arrangements for final connection of the services. Electric service shall be installed, connected, and available for full use prior to completion or acceptance of the work.

3.9 SERVICE CONTINUITY

A. At all times during the construction of the project, services (power, telephone, fire alarm, etc.) shall be maintained to all portions of the site except with prior written approval of interruptions. Any required interruptions of services (power, telephone, fire alarm, etc.) due to work being performed under this contract shall be scheduled in advance after consultation with the Architect and the Owner.

B. At least 14 days prior to the requirement of any interruption of services, the Contractor

shall furnish to the Architect for approval a written plan for the work associated with the outage including a description of the installation and removal of temporary wiring and facilities necessary to be installed.



3.10 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

A. The physical location and arrangements of electrical equipment is shown on the plans and is to be used by the Contractor to review the Plans with the proposed equipment and equipment of other contractors that are affected, and to insure that all Code required clearances, wiring distances and maintenance accesses, including equipment heights, of all items are maintained. Alternate arrangements to accomplish the above due to field conditions or changes in physical size of the equipment proposed for the project are to be submitted to the Architect for review before any work is begun or equipment ordered. The alternate arrangement is to be presented in a 1/4 inch scaled drawing showing all equipment, including those of other contractors. Include shop drawing cut sheets and applicable information. Indicate on the drawing by dimension all required Code clearances, wiring distances and maintenance access requirements. Where equipment heights are required to be coordinated with architectural or other items, indicate revised heights.



ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT 16040 - 1

SECTION 16040 - ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Removal of Temporary Facilities: Refer to Division-1 sections for termination and removal of electrical temporary facilities.

1.2 DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES

A. Security and Protection: During electrical work closeout phase, meet with Owner's operating representative frequently and agree upon status of operational responsibility for electrical systems, including security provisions to prevent unauthorized operations, and including protective measures to ensure that systems are not neglected or misused.

1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Explanation: Except where otherwise indicated, electrical drawings (contract drawings) are diagrammatic in nature and may not show locations accurately for various components of electrical systems. Shop drawings prepared by Contractor show certain portions of work more accurately to scale and location, and in greater detail. It is recognized that actual layout of installed work may vary substantially from both contract drawings and shop drawings.

B. General Recording Procedure: Maintain white-print set (blue-line or black-line) of

electrical contract drawings and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, for mark-up of actual installations which vary substantially from work as shown. Mark-up whatever drawings are most capable of showing installed conditions accurately; however, where shop drawings are marked, record reference note on appropriate contract drawing. Mark with erasable pencil, and use multiple colors to aid in distinguishing between work of separate electrical systems. In general, record every substantive installation of electrical work which previously is either not shown or shown inaccurately, but in any case record the following:

1. Underground conduits both interior and exterior, drawn to scale and fully

dimensioned. 2. Work concealed behind or within other work, in a non-accessible arrangement. 3. Mains and branches of wiring systems, with switchboards, panelboards, and

control equipment and devices located and numbered. 4. Scope of each change order, denoting addendum or C.O. number. 5. Grounding systems.

C. Corrected Drawings: Contractor shall transmit marked-up record drawings to Architect;

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable.) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. General Condition: Refer to Division-1 sections for coordination of electrical closeout work with variable loads on electrical systems. Sequence closeout procedures properly, so that work will not be endangered or damaged, and so that every required performance will be fully tested and demonstrated.


ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT 16040 - 2

B. System Performance Test Runs: Coordinate test runs of electrical systems with test runs

of equipment served thereby (heating, air conditioning, plumbing, elevators, etc.). Check each item in each system to determine that it is set for proper operation. With Owner's Representative and Architect present, operate each system in test run of appropriate duration to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements. During or following test runs, make final corrections or adjustments of systems to refine and improve performances where possible, including noise and vibration reductions, elimination of hazards, better response of controls, signals and alarms, and similar system performance improvements. Provide testing or inspection devices as requested for Architect's observation of actual system performances. Demonstrate that controls and items requiring service or maintenance are accessible.

C. Cleaning: After final performance test run of each electrical system, clean system both

externally and internally. Touch-up minor damage to factory-painted finishes; refinish work where damage is extensive.

D. General Operating Instructions: Provide general operating instructions for each

operational system and equipment item of electrical work. Coordinate instructions with instructions for mechanical work and other equipment where associated with electrical systems or equipment.

E. Maintenance Manuals: Display and conduct "thumb-through" explanation of maintenance

manuals, record drawings, spare parts inventory, storage of extra materials, meter readings and similar service items.

F. Construction Equipment: After completion of performance testing and Owner's operating

instructions and demonstrations, remove installer's tools, test facilities, construction equipment and similar devices and materials used in execution of work but not incorporated in work.



ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK 16045 - 1

SECTION 16045 - ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Provisions of CONCRETE Section apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of electrical related work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in this or other Division-16 sections, and/or as required by applicable codes or project field conditions.

B. Types of electrical related work specified in this section include the following:

1. Access to Electrical Work:

Access doors in walls and ceilings. Removable cover plates in walls and ceilings.

2. Excavating for Electrical Work:

Underground electrical wiring. Underground duct banks Handholes and Pull Boxes Independent (isolated) foundations. Power and lighting poles.

3. Concrete for Electrical Work:

Encasement of electrical work. Electrical equipment foundations and mounting pads. Rough grouting in and around electrical work. Patching concrete which has been cut to accommodate electrical work.

4. Painting of Electrical Work:

Except as specified for individual items of equipment, painting of electrical work is not part of this work.


A. Access Units Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated for construction penetrated by access units, provide UL listed and labeled units, except for units which are smaller than minimum size requiring ratings, as recognized by governing authority.

1.4 SUBMITTALS: None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Access Doors: General: Where floors, walls and ceilings must be penetrated for access



to electrical work, provide types of access doors indicated by project conditions, including floor doors if any. Furnish sizes indicated or, where not otherwise indicated by project conditions, furnish adequate size for intended and necessary access. Furnish manufacturer's complete units, of type recommended for application in indicated substrate construction, in each case, complete with anchorages and hardware.

B. Access Door Construction: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate wall/ceiling door units

of welded steel construction with welds ground smooth; 16-gage frames and 14-gage flush panel doors, 175 degree swing with concealed spring hinges; flush screw-driver-operated cam locks; factory-applied rust-inhibitive prime-coat paint finish.

C. Removable Access Plates: General: Where switches, control devices, pull boxes, and

similar elements of electrical work are located within or behind wall or ceiling construction of finishes, or below grade, and are not (cannot be) provided with integral removable access plates as specified in other Division-16 sections, provide removable access plates of types and sizes needed for access requirements. Provide manufacturer's complete units with anchorages, fasteners, and standard factory-applied finishes.

D. Wall/Ceiling Unit Construction: Except as otherwise indicated, and where adaptable to

substrate, provide manufacturer's standard frameless round formed stainless steel or chrome-plated brass low-profile plate cover, with single exposed flush screw anchor, with bright polished finish.

E. Units Set at Grade: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard round

or square cast-iron units, complete with cast-iron pipe extension to protect electrical element being accessed; designed to be set slightly above finish grade, and to be encased in concrete; secure plate to body with bronze screws; natural mill finish on plate and body.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Install access units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with NEC, and with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate with other work, including substrate construction work, as necessary to interface installation of access units with other work.

C. Locate each removable access unit accurately in relation to electrical work requiring

access.

D. Provide adequate temporary support or attachment to framing or formwork so that units will not be dislocated during construction of substrates.

E. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb

or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

F. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

G. Remove and replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or damaged.



3.2 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: Do not excavate for electrical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimized.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in

manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling.

C. Notify the Architect before beginning any and each excavation. At this time, exact

locations of underground services to be installed shall be determined by inspection with the Owner and the Architect. Wherever other underground facilities are known to exist in the area of required excavations such facilities shall be located exactly by hand excavation by the Contractor. Should any minor relocation of new facilities be required before installation, the Contractor shall make the necessary relocation at no extra cost to the Owner.

D. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.

E. Excavate with vertical-sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where

otherwise indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to sustain sides of excavations. Remove sheeting and cross-bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not endanger the work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance below finished grade to not interfere with other work.

F. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and

authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WORK

A. Formwork: General: Design, construct, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads including pressure of cast-in-place concrete. Construct formwork so that formed concrete will be of required size and shape and in required location. Construct formwork with joints which will not leak cement paste. Form sides and bottoms of concrete work, except where clearly indicated to be cast directly in an excavation or against other construction, or on grade or prepared subgrade. Design and construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete and other work.

B. Install chamfer strips at external corners of exposed concrete work.

3.4 BACKFILLING

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, backfill with properly qualified backfill materials.

B. Backfill to elevations matching adjacent grades, at time of completion of work or as required to provide patching of paved surfaces.



ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 16060 - 1

SECTION 16060 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This section includes electrical demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and existing circuiting are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify that wiring and equipment to be disconnected serve only abandoned facilities not required to remain.

C. The Contractor shall perform a survey of the existing lighting system noting all fixtures and lighting control devices that are not in working order prior to demolition. This survey shall be turned over to the Owner’s representative after completion. The Owner’s representative shall review the list during final inspection to verify any fixtures requiring repair by the Contractor due to the removal and re-installation done on the project.

D. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents furnished to Architect. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems noted for removal.

B. Coordinate electrical service outages with Architect and Owner. See Section 16020 for additional requirements.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing systems in service. Disable system only as required to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. See Section 16020 - Electrical Coordination for other requirements.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK


ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 16060 - 2

A. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

B. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.

D. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. Patch surfaces and paint to match existing.

E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

F. For items noted to be removed on the drawing, remove associated existing wiring and conduits not required to be reused. Refeed any items fed through removed items as required with new circuiting to match existing. Field verify and adjust demolition as required to accommodate actual existing circuiting arrangement.

G. Coordinate exact scope of demolition with Architect and disconnect and remove additional items if required.

H. Do not reuse any conductors removed from existing conduit runs.



RACEWAYS 16110 - 1

SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of raceways is as required by the equipment served, as indicated by drawings and schedules and/or as required by project.

B. Types of raceways in this section include the following:

1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 5. Non-metallic conduit and fittings.


A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.

B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to

electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL listed and labeled.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation

of raceway systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized heavy wall, non-intermediate, FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI

C80.1.

C. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-408 and ANSI/NEMA FB1; threaded type.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): FS WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.

E. EMT Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB1; steel or malleable iron, compression type.

F. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, Zinc-coated steel, listed as an assembly for grounding as per NEC 250-91B.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A; ANSI/NEMA

FB1, listed as an assembly for grounding as per NEC 250-91B.

H. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanize inside and outside; coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC).


RACEWAYS 16110 - 2

I. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G; ANSI/NEMA FB1.

2.2 NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit and fittings of types, sizes, and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated.

B. Non Metallic Conduit: NEMA TC2, schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 90 degrees C

and U.L. listed except that for telephone and cable TV the non metallic conduits may be equal to type EB, U.L. listed with concrete encasement and type DB U.L. listed where concrete encasement is indicated to be deleted.

C. Non Metallic Conduit Fittings & Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA TC 3, solvent welded match

to conduit type and material. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS

A. Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and complying with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate with other work including concrete deck work, as necessary to interface

installation of electrical raceways and components with other work.

C. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations/heights.

D. Route exposed raceways and raceways above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping.

E. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires

within raceways.

F. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water piping.

G. Cut square and ream ends of all raceways. Cap open ends of raceways until conductors are installed. Install a #14 gauge fish wire in all empty raceways except telephone or communication system. Install a nylon pull string in telephone or communication system raceways.

H. Raceways which must cross building expansion joints shall, where practicable, cross

same in furred ceilings areas rather than in slabs or walls, arranged with sufficient flexibility to accommodate the building expansion. However, where such routing is not possible, expansion fittings as manufactured by OZ Electrical Manufacturing Company shall be provided in each raceway in concrete or attached to the structure whenever the raceway crosses an expansion joint in the concrete structure. Expansion fitting shall be installed on one side of the joint with its sliding sleeve end flush with the joint and with a length of bonding jumper in the expansion joint equal to at least three times the normal width of the joint. Each expansion fitting shall be zinc-coated steel and contain heavy factory installed packing and internal copper braid packing and shall be complete with UL approved bonding jumper.

I. Where raceways penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with


RACEWAYS 16110 - 3

UL listed caulk or foam silicone elastomer compound.

J. Furnish and install pull boxes and wiring/cable supports as required for installation of wiring. Boxes shall be code gauge galvanized steel with screw attached access panels in top, side or bottom, as required. Boxes shall be NEMA type as required by box location.

K. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs,

dirt, and construction debris.

L. Packaged flexible conduit/wire systems ("BX" systems) are not allowed.

M. Where they enter boxes or cabinets that do not have threaded hubs, conduits shall be secured in place with galvanized locknuts inside and outside the cabinet and shall have bushings inside. All raceways ends, including those for empty conduit, are to have bushings.

N. All raceways shall be installed concealed or as indicated or scheduled on the drawings

and shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the required number of insulated conductors including insulated equipment grounding conductors.

O. Raceways runs shall be straight; elbows and bends shall be uniform, symmetrical and

free from dents or flattening.

P. Conduits shall be located to avoid any conflicts with ceiling inserts shown on the Architectural drawings. Such inserts shall not be used for suspension of conduit installed by the Electrical Contractor. Additional inserts shall be provided by the Contractor as required for installation of conduit as specified herein.

Q. Conduit shall be run no closer than six inches to covering of hot water, steam or process

piping except where crossings are unavoidable. Conduit shall be kept at least 1 inch from covering of pipe crossed. Where several conduits (concealed and/or exposed) are run parallel to each other, they shall be grouped together on galvanized strut, with suitable clamps, which shall be attached to the wall or hung from the roof or structural ceiling. Where exposed conduit is indicated, the conduit shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the building walls and/or ceiling (roof) and shall be supported adequately by pipe straps or other approved devices. Where a single conduit is run exposed in a damp and/or wet location, Mineralac straps of the type which permit a 1/4" air space between the conduit and the wall should be used. All raceway fasteners shall be approved for the purpose (tie wire shall not be used).

R. Conduit shall be held securely in place by hangers and fasteners of appropriate design

and dimensions for the particular application. Support shall be such that no strain will be transmitted to outlet box and pull box supports. Wire shall not be used for the support of any conduit. Conduit shall not be supported by or attached to ductwork unless specifically allowed otherwise.

S. Where flexible conduit is called for, only steel flexible conduit and fittings that are

specifically listed as an assembly for grounding shall be allowed as per NEC 250-91B. For lighting fixture wiring, do not loop from fixture to fixture with flexible conduit. All flexible conduit must have a separate grounding conductor run the entire length of the circuit. This shall include all lighting, power and receptacle circuits unless otherwise noted.


RACEWAYS 16110 - 4

3.2 RACEWAY INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Underground Installations: Use rigid steel conduit or PVC conduit. Conduit rising from horizontal underground or in slab runs shall have rigid steel conduit risers, ells and bends. Conduits installed under building slab on grade elevation shall be buried under the vapor barrier out of the concrete pour and a minimum of 12" below the top of slab and shall be supported from slab with stainless steel hangers. All other underground conduit runs shall be buried minimum 24" below grade.

B. In Slab: Rigid steel conduit, 3/4" maximum size. Conduit in concrete slabs shall be

located so as not to affect the structural strength of the slabs. Conduit in general shall be located in the center 1/3 thickness of concrete slabs and when installed in slabs poured on grade or fill shall have at least one inch of concrete between conduit and plastic or other waterproof membrane; conduit shall not be installed under the plastic or other

installation shall meet the requirement indicated heretofore. The maximum size of conduit that may be run in a slab shall be as directed by the Architect. Conduit larger than 3/4", if permitted in reinforced concrete slabs, shall be parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcement; when at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit shall be close to one of the supports of the slab.

C. Conduits under structural slabs shall be adequately supported from the slab using 3/8"

diameter stainless steel rods properly spaced (not greater than 5' - 0" spacing between rods) to support the load and to suitably distribute the load within the capacity of the structural slab. Exposed sections of rods shall be coated with waterproof mastic.

D. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Rigid steel conduit.

E. Wet & Damp Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit.

F. Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.

G. Use flexible metal conduit for final connections to motors, dry type transformers, and for

other electrical equipment subject to movement or vibration - 36" maximum length each connection.

H. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical

equipment (36" maximum length) where subject to movement and vibration and also where subject to one or more of the following conditions:

1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Subjected to water spray. 4. Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water. 5. Mechanical Equipment Room containing chillers or pumps.



WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 1

SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or as required by project.

B. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section include the

following:

1. Copper conductors. 2. Fixture wires.

C. Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project are as follows:

1. For power distribution circuits. 2. For lighting circuits. 3. For appliance and equipment circuits. 4. For motor-branch circuits. 5. For alarm and communication system circuits


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation and color coding of electrical wires and cables.

B. UL Compliance: Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are UL listed and

labeled. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS

A. General: Provide electrical wires, cables, and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide soft annealed copper conductors per ASTM B-3 with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F). Wires shall be of the single conductor type. Conductors used for lighting and power sizes 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Sizes 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Conductors used for control or signaling sizes 10 AWG and smaller may be stranded.

B. Building Wires: Provide UL listed, factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and

materials, for applications and services indicated. Wiring shall comply with project's installation requirements, NEC, ICEA and NEMA standards. Wiring shall be combination type THHN/THWN for dry and wet locations; max operating temperature 75 degrees C (167 degrees F) for wet locations and 90 degrees C (194 degrees F), for dry locations;



Flame-retardant, moisture and heat resistant, thermoplastic insulation; Nylon jacket outer covering; Annealed copper conductor.

C. Fixture Wires: Fixture wires shall be of a type listed in Table 402-3 of the NEC, and they

shall comply with all the requirements of that table.

D. Connectors General: Provide UL type factory fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment

installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with other work.

C. Unless specifically noted otherwise, install all wiring in raceways.

D. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.

E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not

deteriorate conductor or insulation.

F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.

G. Throughout the system, conductors shall be identified by color coding as follows:

3 480V System 3 208 or (240 *) V System

1 240V System

Phase 1 – Brown Phase 1 – Black Line 1 – Black Phase 2 – Orange Phase 2 – Red Line 2 – Red Phase 3 – Yellow Phase 3 – Blue Neutral – White

Neutral – Gray Neutral – White

* Stinger shall be orange per N.E.C.

H. Color coding shall be the same continuous color for each conductor for sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller.

I. On sizes 8 AWG and larger, identification shall be by standard electrical color coding tape

at all termination junction, splice and pull locations.

J. Surface printing at regular intervals shall indicate manufacturer, size, voltage, insulation type and UL label.

K. White or gray colored insulation shall only be used for grounded (neutral) conductors.



L. Green colored insulation shall only be used for equipment grounding conductors. Insulation for isolated equipment grounding conductors shall be green with yellow tracers.

M. Unless noted otherwise, no wire shall be smaller than No. 12 for power or lighting service

or for switch legs. Wire for each branch circuit shall be of a single size and type from the branch circuit protective device to the last outlet on the circuit unless noted otherwise.

N. Branch circuit home run numbers shown on the drawings shall be used as a guide for

connection of circuit wiring to similarly numbered protective devices in branch circuit panelboards. Not more than three phase wires and one neutral shall be installed in any home run conduit unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings.

O. Where the length of a home run, from panel to first outlet, exceeds 75 feet for 120 volt

circuit or 175 feet for 277 volt circuits, the conductor size shall be No. 10 AWG or that shown on the drawings, whichever is larger. Additional increases in wire sizes shall be made as required to avoid excessive voltage drops.

P. All splices and terminations shall be insulated in an approved manner by an integral or

separate cover or by taping to provide insulating value equal to that of the conductors being joined.

Q. Feeders, motor circuit conductors, and main service entrance conductors shall run their

entire length without joints or splices.

R. Splices and joints in branch circuit wiring shall be made only at outlets or in accessible junction boxes. Joints and splices in branch circuit wiring shall be made with compression type solderless connectors or spring loaded, tapered, screw on type insulated units. Terminations or splices for conductors No. 6 AWG and larger shall utilize bolted or compression type connecting lugs. Compression type lugs shall be a factory supplied package made with a hydraulic type compression device approved by the lug manufacturer.

S. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

with manufacturers published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std. 486A and B.

T. Type THWN or THHN conductors may be connected directly to recessed fixtures only

when the fixtures are equipped with factory approved and supplied outlet boxes listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use with wire having insulation rated for maximum operating temperatures of 75 degrees C (167 degrees F); otherwise, for fixtures not rated for 75 degree C direct connection, use approved high temperature insulated conductors from the fixture to a separate outlet box placed at least one foot, but not more than four feet, from the fixture.

U. An insulated equipment, grounding conductor (green insulation) shall be installed within

the raceway with branch circuit and feeder conductors. Grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with N.E.C. unless noted otherwise.

V. Conductor sizes shall be increased as required to compensate for derating of conductor

ampacities due to number of current carrying conductors in raceways and ambient temperatures. Raceway sizes shall be increased where conductor sizes are increased.




A. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.

B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.



ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 - 1

SECTION 16135 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and/or as required by project.

B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Floor boxes. 5. Bushings. 6. Locknuts. 7. Knockout closures.


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-Series, and UL

886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL listed and labeled.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds./Pub No.'s OS1,

OS2 and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions and compliance with the specifications on outlet boxes, pull boxes and floor boxes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS

A. Outlet Boxes (concealed conduit): Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as required by particular application, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with conduit size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding.

B. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation,

including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations.



C. Device Boxes (concealed conduit): Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes suitable for installation at respective locations. Device boxes for switches, receptacles, telephone, computer, and communications shall be not less than 4" square and 1-1/2" deep with box extension ring as required by number of devices served. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with conduit size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide corrosion resistant screws for equipment type grounding.

D. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each installation,

including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations.

E. Outlet and Device Boxes (exposed conduit): Provide corrosion resistant cast metal

raintight outlet and wiring device boxes, of types, shapes and sizes required for each application, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, and cast metal face plates. Where weatherproof devices are indicated, provide spring hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion resistant plugs and fasteners.

F. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull

boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation.

G. Floor Boxes: Provide cast iron raintight adjustable floor boxes where indicated, with

threaded conduit-entrance ends, and vertical adjusting rings, gaskets, brass floor plates with flush screw-on covers with ground flange and stainless steel cover screws.

H. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion resistant box knockout

closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and

raceway installation work.

C. Provide weathertight outlet boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.

D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been

removed.

E. Install electrical boxes in those locations required to ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring.

F. Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 12" separation.



G. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.

H. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.

I. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which

attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.

J. In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile, or other noncombustible material, boxes and fittings shall be so installed that the front edge of the box or fitting will not set back of the finished surface more than 1/4". In walls or ceilings constructed of wood or other combustible material, outlet boxes and fittings shall be set flush with the finished surface. If a fixture canopy or pan is used as an outlet box cover, any combustible wall or ceiling finish between the edge of the canopy and the outlet box shall be covered with noncombustible material.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Upon completion of installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and demonstrate compliance with requirements.



ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 - 1

SECTION 16142 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or as required by project. Provide connections for all equipment furnished or installed as part of this work.

B. Make final electrical connections for all kitchen and laundry equipment shown on the

drawings whether or not such equipment is furnished as part of this work.

C. Refer to Division-15 sections for motor starters and controllers furnished integrally with equipment.

D. Refer to Division 15 sections for motor starters and controllers finished under Division 15

and installed under Division 16.

E. Refer to Division-15 sections for control system wiring, raceways, boxes, etc. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.

B. IEEE Compliance: Comply with Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric

Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections and terminations.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors". Provide electrical connection products and materials which are UL listed and labeled.

PARTS 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: For each electrical connection indicated and/or required, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete the work. This includes disconnect switches and/or wiring devices where required whether or not shown on the drawings.

B. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and

match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.

C. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable

insulating tubing and boots, wire nuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC, and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway, and equipment installation,

as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.

C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.



DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16170 - 1

SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of disconnect switch work is indicated on drawings.


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical disconnect devices.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches". Provide disconnect switches which have been UL listed and labeled.

C. Special Use Markings: Provide safety /disconnect switches constructed for special use, with appropriate UL marks which indicates that special type of use/application. Switches used as service entrance equipment shall be provided with UL markings indicating “Suitable for use as service entrance equipment”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on disconnect switches.

1.4 DRIP SHIELDS: A drip shield shall be installed at each disconnect switch located in a room on space containing sprinkler head. The shield shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent water damage to the electrical equipment due to a leak in the sprinkler system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FABRICATED SWITCHES: Disconnect Switches: Provide heavy duty surface mounted, sheet-steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes and with fusing and other electrical characteristics indicated or required; rated 240 and/or 600 volts as required, 60 Hz, with blades, and poles as required; disconnects shall incorporate spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. All switches shall have a neutral bar and equipment grounding lug for terminating equipment ground conductors. Construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity plated copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures for interior use and NEMA Type 3R enclosures for exterior use. Switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, Cutler-Hammer, Siemens or approved equivalent.

2.2 FUSES FOR FUSIBLE SWITCHES: Fuses for safety switches protecting panelboards shall be UL listed Type Class RK-1 with time delay feature. Fuses 601 amps or larger shall be UL listed Class L with time delay feature. All other fuses shall be dual element time delay type UL listed Type Class RK-1.


DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16170 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Install disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Install disconnect switches for use with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position.

3.2 GROUNDING: Provide equipment grounding lugs in all switches with connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and retest.



SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals is indicated by drawings and/or specifications and/or as required by project.

B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include the

following:

1. Clevis hangers. 2. Riser clamps. 3. C-clamps. 4. I-beam clamps. 5. One-hole conduit straps. 6. Two-hole conduit straps. 7. Round steel rods. 8. Lead expansion anchors. 9. Toggle bolts. 10. Wall and floor seals.

C. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment,

are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-16 sections. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices.

B. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub.

No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies".

C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.

D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS

A. General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified and/or as required. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option.

B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated; and having

the following construction features:

1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" diameter hole for round steel rod; approximately 54 pounds per 100 units.

2. Riser Clamps: For supporting 4" rigid metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and



nuts, and 4" ears; approximately 51 pounds per 100 units. 3. C-Clamps: Black malleable iron; 1/2" rod size; approximately 70 pounds per 100

units. 4. I-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2";

approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 5. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit; galvanized

steel; approximately 7 pounds per 100 units. 6. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 pounds per

100 units. 7. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2" diameter; approximately 67 pounds per 100

feet. 8. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel;

approximately 200 pounds per 100 units. C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the

following construction features:

1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2" approximately 38 pounds per 100 units. 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4"; approximately 5 pounds per 100 units.

D. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes, and materials indicated

and/or required; and having the following construction features:

1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

E. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for

non-armored type electrical cables in risers.

F. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, minimum 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated and/or required; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel:

1. Fixture hangers. 2. Channel hangers. 3. End caps. 4. Beam clamps. 5. Wiring studs. 6. Thinwall conduit clamps. 7. Rigid conduit clamps. 8. Conduit hangers. 9. U-bolts.

2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Conduit Sleeves: Provide conduit sleeves of one of the following:

1. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 2. Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.



B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade or in exterior walls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of supporting devices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to

interface installation of supporting devices with other work.

C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support conduit properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible.

D. Support all equipment covered by this specification directly from building structural

members independent of any ceilings or any other installed item. Panelboards and switches may be attached to suitably reinforced walls. Ground or slab mounted equipment shall be mounted on a separate four inch high concrete housekeeping steel re-inforced slab.

E. Do not attach items of this specification to HVAC ductwork, ceiling grids and ceiling

support members, piping or other equipment unless specifically shown otherwise. Position all supports and equipment such that access through lay-in ceilings or panels is not impaired and all Code required clearances are maintained.

F. Where applicable, under no circumstances is the Electrical Contractor to attach to or

support from any bar joist bridging. Any supports to the bar joists or any structural systems are to be approved by the Architect.

G. Wire shall not be used with or without spring steel fasteners, clips, or clamps for the

support of any conduit. Wood products shall not be used for the support or attachment of conduit or electrical equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.



GROUNDING 16450 - 1

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide grounding as indicated on the drawings and/or required by the NEC and/or as required for project.

B. Applications of grounding work in this section include the following:

1. Underground metal water piping. 2. Grounding rods. 3. Service equipment. 4. Enclosures. 5. Equipment.


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL listed and labeled.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869

pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding.

C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

A. Materials and Components: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems; with assembly of materials, including cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated.

B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for

grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC.

C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates,

connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, ¾” diameter x 10'.

B. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.


GROUNDING 16450 - 2

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds,

and methods used in connecting welding work. Provide welded connections where grounding conductors connect to underground grounding rods/electrodes.

2.3 GROUND CONDUCTOR

A. Each branch circuit and/or feeder shall have a green insulated ground conductor installed within the raceway with the power conductors sized in accordance with the N.E.C. The number of tick marks shown on each branch circuit and/or feeder does not include the ground conductor unless noted otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. General: Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical

grounding system with other work.

C. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding rods/electrodes.

D. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.

E. For all motor circuits and all circuits serving multi-outlet assemblies provide a separate

grounding conductor in addition to any conduit ground. Conduit runs shall be increased in size where necessary to accommodate the grounding conductor in addition to circuit conductors.

F. Where multiple ground rods are called for by the drawings, the minimum spacing shall be

six feet between each rod.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. The metallic raceway system and the neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded at the service equipment. The copper service grounding electrode conductor shall be extended with no splices in raceway from the service to as near as practicable to the point of entrance of the water service. Where the raceway routing is via finished areas, it shall be run concealed. Ground connection shall be visible, and connection of raceway and conductor to the water pipe shall be made with an approved ground connector similar to T & B conduit hub and water pipe clamp. Also bond to other items per NEC to form the grounding electrode system (this includes bonding on metal frame of building).

B. The above requirements shall be supplemented by grounding to 3/4" diameter 10' long

copper clad ground rods.

C. At each point of voltage transformation (including but not limited to transformers and inverters), the secondary neutral conductor and the secondary raceway system shall be grounded with a common ground conductor as described the NEC. The grounding electrode conductor described therein shall be continuous (no splices) and shall be in a


GROUNDING 16450 - 3

raceway. Where the raceway routing is via finished areas, it shall be run concealed. Ground connection shall be visible. Where water pipe connection is used, connection of raceway and conductor to a water pipe shall be made with an approved ground connector similar to T & B conduit hub and water pipe clamp.

D. Bonding jumpers shall be used around concentric or eccentric knockouts on equipment.

E. Grounding pole of each polarized receptacle (non-isolated ground type) shall be bonded

to its outlet box with conductor sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code and a machine or self-tapping screw, unless the receptacle is of the approved self-grounding type. Grounding pole of each isolated ground receptacle shall be connected to an insulated equipment grounding conductor.

F. Where water pipe grounding connection is made underground, a suitable pipe sleeve and

flush cap shall be installed to provide access to the connection.

G. Where ground connections are made in walls or inaccessible ceilings, access panels shall be installed. Access panels in walls shall be stainless steel.

H. See drawings for additional grounding requirements.



TRANSFORMERS 16460 - 1

SECTION 16460 - DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of transformer work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of transformers specified in this section include the following:

1. Dry-type transformers. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of electrical transformers.

B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA Std. Pub/No. TR 27

pertaining to transformers.

C. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Stds. C57-Series pertaining to power/distribution transformers.

D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NEMA Std. Pub/No.'s ST 20;

"Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications."

E. UL Compliance: Provide transformers and components which are UL listed and labeled.

F. NESC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of the National Electrical

Safety Code (ANSI C2) pertaining to indoor and outdoor installation of transformers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including rated kVA, primary and secondary voltages, percent taps, no-load and full-load losses in watts, hot-spot and average temperature rise, sound level in decibels, and standard published data.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's drawings indicating dimensions, and weight

loading for transformer installations. Submit drawings showing layouts, mounting and supports, spatial relationship to panelboards and associated equipment. Show wall brackets and platforms where required for mounting of transformers as shown on the drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:



1. General Electric Co. 2. Square D Company. 3. Cutler-Hammer Electric Corp. 4. Siemens

2.2 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation.

B. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers (480 Volt Primary): Provide factory-assembled,

general-purpose, air-cooled, dry-type distribution transformers where shown; of sizes, characteristics, and rated capacities indicated; three-phase; 60-hertz, 10 kV BIL, 5.75 impedance, with 480 volts delta connection primary and 208/120 volts secondary wye connected. Provide primary winding with minimum 4 total 2 1/2% taps, two above and two below full-rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operation. Insulate with 200 degree C Class insulation and rate for continuous operation at rated kVA. Limit transformer temperature rise to maximum of 150 degrees C above a 40 degrees C ambient. Provide terminal enclosure, with cover, to accommodate primary and secondary coil wiring connections and electrical supply raceway terminal connector. Equip terminal leads with connectors installed. Limit terminal compartment temperature to 75 degrees C when transformer is operating continuously at rated load with ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide wiring connectors suitable for copper or aluminum wiring. Cushion mount transformers with external vibration isolation supports; sound-level ratings not to exceed ANSI/NEMA standards. Electrically ground core and coils to transformer enclosure by means of flexible metal grounding strap. Provide transformers with fully-enclosed sheet steel enclosures. Apply manufacturer's standard light gray indoor enamel over cleaned and phosphatized steel enclosure.

C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, transformers 30 KVA and below shall be wall

mounted, and all above 30 KVA shall be floor mounted on 6" high concrete base reinforced with 6 x 6 - 6/6wwf. Where walls cannot properly support transformer, galvanized strut frames supported to floor and ceiling structure shall be provided to support transformers.

D. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, transformers installed indoors shall have

ventilated enclosures; transformers installed outdoors shall have totally enclosed enclosures approved for outdoor applications or shielded, ventilated enclosures approved for outdoor applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS

A. Install transformers as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NESC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.



B. Install units on vibration mounts. Comply with manufacturer's indicated installation

method.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std. 486A and B.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for transformers. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std. 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

B. Provide service grounding electrodes and connections as required by the NEC for a

separately derived electrical system. 3.3 TESTING

A. Prior to energization of transformers, check all accessible connections for compliance with manufacturer's torque tightening specifications.

B. Prior to energization, check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits.

C. Upon completion of installation of transformers, energize primary circuitry at rated

voltage and frequency from normal power source, and test transformers, including, but not limited to, audible sound levels, to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units or components, and proceed with retesting.



PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or as required by project.


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes. Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to installation of wiring and equipment in hazardous locations.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL requirements pertaining to panelboards,

accessories, and enclosures. Provide units which are UL listed and labeled.

C. Special Use Markings: Provide panelboards constructed for special use, with appropriate UL marks which indicates that special type of use/application. Panelboards used as service entrance equipment shall be provided with UL markings indicating "Suitable for use as service entrance equipment."

D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with all applicable NEMA Standards for panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards to verify compliance with all requirements of the drawings and this specification.

1.4 EQUIPMENT LOCKS

A. All panelboards, cabinets, and other electrical equipment having doors with locks, shall be keyed alike.

1.5 DRIP SHIELDS

A. A drip shield shall be installed at each panelboard located in a room or space containing sprinkler heads. The shield shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent water damage to the electrical equipment due to a leak in the sprinkler system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated.

B. Distribution, Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety constructed

factory assembled circuit breaker type panelboards in sizes and ratings as indicated. Construct with plated rectangular shaped copper bus bars which are securely mounted



and braced, and with lugs bolted to main bus bars. Provide anti-turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors, for connecting feeders. Provide equip with full-sized neutral bus bar with suitable lugs for circuits requiring neutral connection. Provide main and branch circuit breakers. Breakers shall be molded case bolt-in type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so that overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures with suitable lugs for incoming and outgoing equipment grounding conductors. Load center type panelboards are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes

and NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness, minimum 20" wide. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges. Equip with interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface mounting as noted on the drawings. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

D. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not

necessarily limited to circuit breakers as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.

E. Panelboards shall be as shown in the following schedule, or approved equal, and shall be

completely factory assembled. Do not purchase panelboards or cabinets until shop drawings have been approved.

Branch Circuit Panelboards (lighting and appliance 120/208 Volt Operation)

General Electric AQ Series Square D NQOD Series Westinghouse POW-R-LINE 1 Series Siemens S1/S3 Series

Distribution Panelboards (600 Amp Mains & Larger)

General Electric CCB Series Square D I-Line HC Series Westinghouse POW-R-LINE 4 Series Siemens S4/S5 Series

F. Where a specific interrupting rating is shown on the drawings, panelboards and

associated circuit breakers shall be rated for that value as a minimum. Combination UL listed series ratings may not be utilized for downstream units of series connected circuit beakers. Circuit breakers with non UL listed ratings are not acceptable.

G. For multiple section panelboards, route the grounding conductor full size from ground

buss to ground buss. Metal to metal cabinet grounding is not solely sufficient. The bus rating shall be continuous through each section, not tapered or diminished in size or rating. Cable from one section to another shall be full capacity and not reduced.



2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Each circuit breaker shall have continuous current rating visible without removing an enclosure cover, and the rating shall be engraved. This may be accomplished by installation of a phenolic label (black with white cut letters) adjacent to the circuit breaker. All circuit breakers shall be suitable for use with 75-degree C conductors. Where circuit breakers are used to supply HVAC equipment having motor group combinations, type HACR circuit breakers shall be used.

B. Unless indicated otherwise, circuit breaker spaces and spare circuit breakers shall be

divided equally between sections of multi-section panelboards.

C. Where ground-fault protections is provided for 3-pole circuit breakers performance testing of the ground fault protections system shall be provided after installation. Written documentation for this test shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS

A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of panelboards, and enclosures with cable and raceway installation

work.

C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds. 486A.

D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are

permanently and mechanically secure.

E. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures.

F. Fill out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation work. Type text, handwriting is not acceptable.

3.2 UNDERGROUND MAIN SERVICE

A. Arrange with local power company to provide electric service as indicated on the drawings.

B. Main underground service feeders shall be furnished and installed from the building

service equipment to the connection to the power company service as work of this Section.

C. Provide primary raceways from transformer to power company pole with nylon pull rope in

active raceway.

D. Provide concrete pad and ground grid for pad-mounted transformer.



E. Primary cable and transformer will be provided by the power company.

F. All metering equipment, including current transformers and enclosure, meter, conduit and wiring, shall be in accordance with the power company’s regulations.

G. Work of this Section shall begin at the point where the power company terminates its

work.

H. All fees and charges in connection with the above shall be paid as work of this Section.

3.3 TEMPORARY WIRING, LIGHTING POWER, TELEPHONE ETC., AT THE SITE:

A. Furnish and install provisions for temporary electrical service, telephone service and construction light and power during the construction period conforming to the contract documents, all local code and State labor law requirements. Temporary light and power provisions to be included shall be as hereinafter specified and as required in Division 1 Section

B. Arrange for temporary services with the Utility Companies. Pay any charges for

installation of utility facilities by utility companies.

C. Furnish, install, and maintain all temporary service equipment as required until permanent -over of temporary systems on the permanent

service when latter is ready for same.

D. Furnish, install, maintain and switch on and off on all regular work days a complete temporary light system, for the building while under construction.

E. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary feeders to permanent mechanical equipment and

existing distribution and power electrical panels requiring service before permanent feeders are ready for same.

F. Provide any and/or all relocations of temporary electric facilities as necessary to clear the

permanent installations of all trades.

G. Provide temporary panels, wires, conduits, etc. as required, to keep in operation the different building areas during construction. No additional compensation shall be provided to the Contractor to provide electrical power to all existing lights, receptacles, devices, HVAC equipment, etc., to keep these said areas in operation during construction.

H. Provide all required lighting for stairways to meet the requirements of all authorities having

jurisdiction.

I. All electrical related services to and within the limits of work shall be maintained in complete functional operation. All electrical related work in areas designated by the work to be under construction shall be made complete and functionally operable prior to proceeding with any other phase of the work.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds. 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.




A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.

B. Prior to energization check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

C. Prior to energization, check for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short circuits.

D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses,

neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 10. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of

protection status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 11. Surge-event operations counter. 12. TVSS To be retro-fitted

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per phase.

C. Connection Means: Permanently wired.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120 2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

3.7 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 3R Enclosure for retrofit TVSS

3.8 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground.



B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

C. Provide multipole, 30 A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor, unless otherwise indicated.



LIGHTING 16510 - 1

SECTION 16510 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or as required by project.


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of lighting fixtures.

B. UL Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures which have been UL listed and labeled.

C. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast

Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label.

D. Coordination: Determine the exact type of ceiling to be furnished in each area and obtain fixtures to suit. Deviate from specified descriptions only where necessary and to the extent necessary to ensure fixture-ceiling compatibility.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data on lighting fixtures and lamps which shall include complete catalogue data, photometrics and other data necessary to describe the fixture proposed.

B. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture,

assembled in luminaire type alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring. All ballasts shall be low noise, high power factor, low radio interference type and shall be provided with an automatic thermal cutout device.

B. Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts, capable of operating lamp

types indicated; with high power factor, and low-noise features; and with internal thermal protection; Ballasts shall be completely electronic type with minimum ballast factor of 85% and less than 20% total harmonic distortion (THD) Electronic ballasts shall meet FCC Rules/Regulations Part 18, 15J for ENI/RFI Emissions, and shall meet 1988 Federal Efficiency Standard (Law 100-357) where applicable. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Universal, Valmont, or approved equal.

C. High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts: Provide HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and

makes as recommended by lamp manufacturer, which properly matches lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and impedances for which lamps are designed. Ballasts shall limit inrush current to an amount less than operating current.


LIGHTING 16510 - 2

D. Ballasts for HID lamps shall be high power factor, constant wattage or constant wattage autotransformer, low noise level, and shall be furnished by the manufacturer of each type of particular lighting fixture specified.

E. Emergency Fluorescent Power Packs (Battery backup ballasts) shall be manufactured to

provide a minimum of 1100 lumens per fixture for 1 ½ hours operation during the emergency mode.

F. Ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps shall be high power factor type. G. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained by Lighting Fixture Schedule shown

on drawings.

H. For fixtures that are recessed ceiling mounted, provide for National Electrical Code required thermal safety cutout devices attached to the lamp housing. If the fixture is ballast powered, the thermal protection may be part of the ballast assembly only if the ballast is mounted at the lamp housing, otherwise use a separate thermal protection device clamped to the lamp housing. Fixtures so protected are to be suitable marked.

I. Catalogue numbers scheduled for lighting fixtures may indicate fixture compatibility with

certain types of ceiling construction. The Electrical Contractor shall determine exact type of ceiling actually to be furnished in each area and shall obtain fixtures to suit. Additionally, ceiling space requirements shall be verified and fixtures compatible for operation within the confines present shall be used. This would include any special mounting due to temperature, space limiting or above ceiling access requirement factors. Provide for heat resisting shielding or spacers and access panels as required. Submit any deviation to the Architect for review.

J. Any fixture specifically to be furnished by others, shall unless noted otherwise, be

roughed-in, installed, connected and lamped by the Electrical Contractor. Do not perform any work on such fixtures unless any damage noted is called to the attention of the Architect.

K. Fluorescent fixtures with multiple lamps shall have lamp sockets arranged so that lamps

are equally spaced to produce uniform lamp appearance. Fixtures to be installed in damp or wet locations shall be labeled by Underwriters Laboratory for that purpose.

L. Fixtures shall be finished (painted or other finish as specified) after fabrication.

M. Where the lamp manufacturer indicates possible hazardous conditions caused by lamp

breakage, fixtures shall contain protective lenses and/or screens to contain parts of broken lamps.

N. Fixture/pole/concrete foundation assemblies shall be provided to meet the local building

code for wind loading with minimum requirement of 100 miles per hour at 30 feet above grade. Submittal shall clearly indicate that this requirement will be met.

2.2 LAMPS

A. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, lamps installed in each fixture shall be of the type specifically recommended by the manufacturer of the fixture for use in the fixture: incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted type and fluorescent lamps shall be reduced wattage, energy efficient type.


LIGHTING 16510 - 3

B. Lamps shall be General Electric, Philips, or Sylvania. Unless otherwise indicated in

fixture schedule, fluorescent lamps shall be 3500 K rapid start. Compact fluorescent

lamps in public spaces shall be 3000 K.

C. Lamps shall be furnished and installed for all fixtures as work of this Division, including fixtures furnished as work of other Divisions.

D. All lamps of the different types (incandescent, fluorescent or HID) must be by the same

manufacturer. Any lamp as judged by the Architect as having a different apparent color or apparent color rendering shall be replaced by the Electrical Contractor without any additional cost.

2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

A. Where battery fixtures are used with switched branch circuits, the sensor circuit of each fixture shall be connected ahead of any local switching. This will permit “switching-off” fixture without signaling to sensor circuit that a power failure has occurred and “turning-on” of lamps on battery circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of

lighting fixtures with other work.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall support each fixture directly from building structural members independent of any ceilings or other installed item. Provide supplemental angle or channel trapeze supports required to span across piping, ductwork or other objects where direct above the fixture support is not possible. Do not attach to the ductwork. All support and weight of the fixture must be borne by the structure. These supports shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor as required by field conditions without additional cost. Ceiling framing members shall not be used to support fixtures except in specific areas where ceiling supports for this purpose have been specified elsewhere in this specification. Unless noted otherwise, lighting fixtures shall be permanently installed and connected to the wiring system.

D. Provide a minimum of 4 feet, but not more than 6 feet, of steel constructed flexible metal

conduit between the last branch wiring junction box and the junction box at the fixture. Do not loop from fixture to fixture with flexible conduit.

E. Fixtures and accessories requiring above the ceiling access in inaccessible ceilings shall

be provided with an approved access panel of type and configuration and finish as approved by the Architect. This access panel is to be located by the Architect and provided for by the Electrical Contractor.

F. Suspended fluorescent fixtures in continuous rows shall have one stem at the beginning

of the row, one stem at each channel joint, and one stem at he end of the row.


LIGHTING 16510 - 4

G. Fluorescent fixtures mounted individually on stems shall each have two single stem hangers. Fluorescent fixtures individually surface mounted shall be supported at both ends.

H. All recessed fixtures installed in plaster ceilings and gypsum board ceilings (including

ceilings with glue-on acoustical tiles) shall be furnished with metal plaster frames or other suitable mounting frames.

I. All recessed fixtures shall be so adjusted to their supports that their trim flanges fit tightly

and evenly against the surface of the ceiling.

J. In acoustical tile ceilings with exposed mechanical suspension systems, recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be lay-in type. Fixtures so supported shall be securely fastened to the ceilings framing member by approved fixture support clips (4 required per fixture).

3.2 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

A. Work of this Section includes advising other trades of exact location of all recessed fixtures so that ceiling construction and/or spacing may be coordinated as necessary to permit symmetrical positioning of fixtures in room.

B. For acoustical tile ceiling surface and/or suspended fixtures shall be centered on a tile a

tile joint, unless indicated otherwise.

C. The locations of fixtures in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and boiler rooms are approximate. The Contractor shall determine exact locations based on exact locations of mechanical, electric and boiler equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION AFTER PAINTING

A. Fixtures to be installed in or on painted ceilings and/or walls shall not be installed until painting is completed. Fixtures installed with paint applied over factory finishes will be rejected.

3.4 PROCEDURE

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner at his convenience the proper procedure for relamping each type of fixture.

3.5 CLEARANCE

A. Thermal or acoustic insulation shall not be installed over the top or within 3 inches of the sides of a recessed (incandescent, HID, or compact fluorescent) fixture enclosure, wiring compartment, or ballast unless the equipment is labeled for the purpose. Work of this Section includes advising other trades of this requirement, so that proper clearances are maintained.

3.6 FIXTURE COORDINATION

A. Lighting fixture submittal shall include data on each type of ceiling suspension system and associated acoustical tile. Information on the ceiling suspension systems shall include types of recessed fluorescent fixture suitable for use with each type as well as recommended installation details.


LIGHTING 16510 - 5

3.7 FIXTURE ADJUSTMENT

A. The Contractor shall aim all adjustable fixtures at night as directed by Architect or his designated representative. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment necessary for aiming fixtures. Equipment shall include but not be limited to bucket trucks, aerial booms, ladders, tools, meters, and personnel. The Contractor shall use a factory prepared aiming diagram.

3.8 TAMPERPROOF TOOLS

A. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner two tools for each type of tamperproof hardware.

3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.


A. After completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

B. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are

observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractors use and testing, as judged by Architect.


100% Construction Documents Bid Set - CDW Bid Spec...SECTION 08114 CUSTOM STEEL DOORS SECTION 08130...

Documents

Transcript of 100% Construction Documents Bid Set - CDW Bid Spec...SECTION 08114 CUSTOM STEEL DOORS SECTION 08130...